Auto Exchange Telephoneidcs 500 Programming Guide

iDCS 500
Programming Guide
Ed.
01
COPYRIGHT
This manual is proprietary to SAMSUNG
Electronics Co., Ltd. and is protected by
copyright.
No information contained herein may be
copied, translated, transcribed or duplicated for
any commercial purposes or disclosed to third
parties in any form without the prior written
consent of SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.This
manual is proprietary to SAMSUNG Electronics
Co., Ltd. and is protected by copyright. No
information contained herein may be copied,
translated, transcribed or duplicated for any
commercial purposes or disclosed to third
parties in any form without the prior written
consent of SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
TRADEMARKS
INTRODUCTION
Purpose
This guide is a programming description for iDCS 500 system users.
iDCS 500 allows users to utilize a digital phone to simply change the system setup.
Likewise, using a phone to change the system setup is called MMC(Man Machine
Communication) program.
This guide describes how to use a digital phone to use MMC.
When there are questions about iDCS 500 system or damage to the phone, please call
Seoul Commtech Co. Ltd., a network service company in enterprise IP solutions for
Samsung Electronics Co. Ltd.
Document Content and Organization

Chapter 1. Before Programming
This chapter describes things to know before starting MMC programming and about
the buttons of digital phone and cautions.
Chapter 2. MMC Programming
This chapter describes how to use each MMC program as it was listed.
SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
Page I
Introduction
iDCS 500 Programming Guide/Ed.01
Conventions
The following special paragraphs are used in this document to point out information
that must be read.
CAUTION
Indicate a potentially hazardous situation which if not avoided, may result in minor or
moderate injury. It may also be used to alert against unsafe practices.
NOTE
Indicates additional information as a reference
Console Screen Output

y
y
The lined box with Courier New font will be used to distinguish between
the main content and console output screen text.
Bold Courier New font will indicate the value entered by the operator on
the console screen
Description About the Model Name

iDCS 500 can be configured as iDCS-M and iDCS-L based on the number of cabinet.
In this guide, iDCS will be divided into the following 3 names:
y
y
y
Page II
iDCS 500 : used when describing any content for both iDCS-L and iDCS-M.
iDCS-M : a small size iDCS 500, which is composed of 1 layer cabinet. This term
is used only when mentioning any content corresponding to iDCS-M.
iDCS-L : a medium/large size iDCS 500 system, which is composed of 1, 2 or 3
layer cabinets. This term is used when mentioning any content corresponding to
iDCS-L.
Introduction
Reference
iDCS 500 Installation Guide
Introduces the installation related information for iDCS 500 system.

iDCS 500 Service Manual
Introduces circuit configuration of each section in iDCS 500 system, main functions,
parts list, troubleshooting, and disassembly diagram of main device.
DS-5012L Digital Phone User s Manual
This is a users manual for the Large LCD Digital Phone(DS-5012L) that can be used
by connecting to the iDCS 500 system.
ITP-5012L IP Phone User s Manual
This is a users manual for the Large LCD IP Phone that can be used by connecting to
the iDCS 500 system.
DS-5038D/5021D/5014D Digital Phone User s Manual
This is a users manual for the 2 Line LCD Digital Phone(DS-5038D, DS-5012D,
DS-5014D) that can be used by connecting to the iDCS 500 system.
ITP-5021D/5014D IP Phone User s Manual
This is a users manual for the 2 Line LCD IP Phone(ITP-5021D, ITP-5014D) that
can be used by connecting to the iDCS 500 system.
iDCS 500 Wireless LAN Service Manual
Introduces information needed to install the wireless device of the iDCS 500 system
or for its maintenance.
WIP-5000M Phone User s Manual

EDITION
DATE OF ISSUE
00
10. 2002
First Edition
01
3. 2003
Added the iDCS 500 MCP2 related contents
REMARKS
Page III
SAFETY CONCERNS
For product safety and correct operation, the following information must be given to
the operator/user and shall be read before the installation and operation.
Symbols
Caution
Indication of a general caution
Restriction
Indication for prohibiting an action for a product
Instruction
Indication for commanding a specifically required action
Page IV
Manual Title / Ed.00
Introduction
CAUTION
CAUTION
Digital Phone Volume Control
Program 807 Digital Phone Voice Quality Control seriously affects the system
credibility. Please call the reseller where you purchased the product to get an
experts advice.
System Passcode Change

When changing the system passcode using Program 900 System Program
Delete, please call the reseller where you purchased the product to get an
experts advice.
Compliance with the National Version Standard

For the national version, iDCS50 is designed to comply with the standard of
the corresponding country. Therefore, in case the Program 812 Program the
national standard change needs to be used, please call the service
company assigned by Samsung to get an experts advice.
Page V
TABLE OF CONTENTS
INTRODUCTION
Purpose ...................................................................................................................................I
Document Content and Organization ......................................................................................I
Conventions............................................................................................................................II
Console Screen Output ..........................................................................................................II
Description About the Model Name........................................................................................II
Reference ..............................................................................................................................III
Revision History..................................................... ! .
SAFETY CONCERNS
Symbols ................................................................................................................................ IV
CAUTION............................................................................................................................... V
CHAPTER 1. Before Programming

1
Introduction to Programming.......................................................................................... 1-1

1.1 Engineer Level Program............................................................................................ 1-1
1.2 Operator Level Program ............................................................................................ 1-1
1.3 Subscriber Level Program ......................................................................................... 1-1
Digital Phone Buttons ...................................................................................................... 1-2

2.1 DS-4000 Series Phone.................................................................................................. 1-2
2.2 DS-5000D Series Phone ............................................................................................... 1-3
Cautions in Programming................................................................................................ 1-5
Program List...................................................................................................................... 1-6

4.1 MMC Modifications for MCP/MCP2........................................................................... 1-6
4.2 Programmable MMC for Each User Level............................................................... 1-21
Overview of Programming Procedure.......................................................................... 1-27
Page VI
Table of Contents
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming

100 Station Lock ...................................................................................................................... 2-1
101 Change Subscriber Passcode......................................................................................... 2-3
102 Call Forwarding (MCP/MCP2) .......................................................................................... 2-4
103 Phone Answer Mode ........................................................................................................ 2-6
104 Change Station Name....................................................................................................... 2-8
105 Speed Dial ....................................................................................................................... 2-10
106 Speed Dial Name............................................................................................................. 2-12
107 Subscriber Button Extender (MCP/MCP2) ................................................................... 2-14
108 Program Status of Station ............................................................................................. 2-16
109 Date/Time Display Format ............................................................................................. 2-18
110 Subscriber Function On/Off (MCP/MCP2).................................................................... 2-19
111 Ring Tone ........................................................................................................................ 2-22
112 Alarm Time ...................................................................................................................... 2-23
113 Display/Modify Memo Contents .................................................................................... 2-25
114 Volume of Digital Phone................................................................................................. 2-27
115 Absent Message (MCP/MCP2)....................................................................................... 2-29
116 Alarm Time/Message...................................................................................................... 2-30
117 Emergency Text Message (For MCP2) ......................................................................... 2-32
118 Conference Group (For MCP2)...................................................................................... 2-34
119 Assign Caller ID Display Method .................................................................................. 2-36
120 Large LCD Option (For MCP2) ...................................................................................... 2-38
121 Digital Phone Language................................................................................................. 2-39
122 SPOT Information Display Speed ................................................................................. 2-41
125 Executive Present State (For MCP2)............................................................................. 2-42
200 Operator Program Mode ................................................................................................ 2-44
201 Change Operator Program Passcode .......................................................................... 2-46
202 Change Function Passcode (MCP/MCP2).................................................................... 2-47
203 Assign Nighttime Ring ................................................................................................... 2-49
204 Common Bell Control..................................................................................................... 2-50
205 Assign Pair Station of Loud Bell................................................................................... 2-51
Page VII
Table of Contents
206 Assign Barge-in Type..................................................................................................... 2-52

207 Voice Mailbox/Auto Attendant Port............................................................................... 2-53
208 Assign Ring Type for General Phone Port................................................................... 2-54
209 Assign Add-On Module (MCP/MCP2) ........................................................................... 2-55
210 System On/Off (MCP/MCP2) .......................................................................................... 2-57
211 Door Phone Ring Assignment....................................................................................... 2-68
214 DISA Alarm Ringing Station........................................................................................... 2-69
215 Voice Dial Option ............................................................................................................ 2-70
216 Voice Dialler .................................................................................................................... 2-71
217 ISDN Service ................................................................................................................... 2-72
220 Assign Station Pair......................................................................................................... 2-73
221 Statistics Data Print Option (MCP/MCP2)..................................................................... 2-74
222 Assign Hotel Guest Room Type (For MCP2)................................................................ 2-76
223 Fax Pair (For MCP2) ....................................................................................................... 2-78
224 Voice Alarm Message (MCP/MCP2) .............................................................................. 2-79
300 Set Station Function ON/OFF ........................................................................................ 2-81
301 Set Station Service Level ............................................................................................... 2-83
302 Set Call Pick-up Group................................................................................................... 2-84
303 Set Executive/Secretary................................................................................................. 2-85
304 Set Available C.O. Line for Each Station (MCP)........................................................... 2-86
304 Set Availability for Each Calling Group (MCP2) .......................................................... 2-87
305 Set Force Code Type ...................................................................................................... 2-89
306 Set Hot line ...................................................................................................................... 2-90
308 Set Background Music Source. .................................................................................... 2-91
309 Set Station Music On Hold (MOH)................................................................................. 2-92
310 Set Auto Route Selection Class .................................................................................... 2-93
312 Set Caller ID .................................................................................................................... 2-94
313 Copy Available Station/C.O. Line (MCP)....................................................................... 2-95
313 Copy Availability for Each Calling Group (MCP2)........................................................ 2-96
314 Set C.O. Call Alarm/Restriction ..................................................................................... 2-97
315 Set Branch Group........................................................................................................... 2-98
Page VIII
Table of Contents
316 Set Identification Ring.................................................................................................... 2-99

317 Set Available Station for Each Station (MCP) ............................................................ 2-101
317 Set Available Station Call Group for Each Station Call Group (MCP2) .................... 2-102
318 Set Available C.O. Line for Each C.O. Line (MCP)..................................................... 2-103
318 Set Available C.O. Call Group for Each C.O. Call Group (MCP2)............................. 2-104
319 Exchange Phone Information...................................................................................... 2-105
320 Set System Forward No Answer ................................................................................. 2-106
321 Set Text Message Available Phone (MCP).................................................................. 2-107
323 Set Caller ID (MCP/MCP2) ............................................................................................ 2-108
400 Set C.O. Function ON/OFF........................................................................................... 2-109
401 Set C.O. Line Type ........................................................................................................ 2-110
402 Set C.O. Line Dial Type .................................................................................................2-111
403 Set Call Restriction Class of C.O. Line....................................................................... 2-112
404 Enter C.O. Line Name................................................................................................... 2-114
405 Enter C.O. Line Phone Number ................................................................................... 2-116
406 Set C.O. Line Ring Mode.............................................................................................. 2-118
407 Disconnect C.O. Line ................................................................................................... 2-119
408 Set C.O. Line MOH........................................................................................................ 2-120
409 Display Program Status of C.O. Line.......................................................................... 2-121
410 Set C.O. Line DISA Service2-....................................................................................... 2-123
411 Set E1 C.O. Line Signal Mode...................................................................................... 2-124
412 Set Private Line/DID C.O. Line Signal Mode .............................................................. 2-125
413 Set C.O. Line Voice Mail Service Type........................................................................ 2-126
414 Set Caller ID Provided C.O. Line ................................................................................. 2-127
415 Set Abandoned Call Save Status ................................................................................ 2-128
416 Set Private Line/DID Answering Mode........................................................................ 2-129
418 R2MFC Signal ............................................................................................................... 2-130
419 Set Night Group for Each C.O. Line............................................................................ 2-132
420 Set PRS C.O. Line......................................................................................................... 2-133
421 Adjust C.O. Line Sensitivity......................................................................................... 2-134
422 Set Standard Sensitivity for Each C.O. Line (MCP2)................................................. 2-135
Page IX
Table of Contents
423 BRI S/T Mode ................................................................................................................ 2-136

424 Set ISDN Phone Connection Port ............................................................................... 2-137
425 Reset ISDN Card ........................................................................................................... 2-138
426 Set E1/PRI CRC4 Option .............................................................................................. 2-139
427 Set PRI Option .............................................................................................................. 2-140
428 Set BRI Option .............................................................................................................. 2-142
429 Set MSN Mode............................................................................................................... 2-144
430 Set C.O. Line Service Level ......................................................................................... 2-146
433 Set C.O. Line Billing Table (MCP/MCP2) .................................................................... 2-147
434 Display Connection Status .......................................................................................... 2-148
436 Set Insertion Digit for Conversion .............................................................................. 2-150
500 Change System Counter.............................................................................................. 2-151
501 Change System Time Variable (MCP/MCP2).............................................................. 2-153
502 Change Station Time Variable ..................................................................................... 2-165
503 Change C.O. Time Variable.......................................................................................... 2-167
504 Make/Break Dial Pulse Ratio ....................................................................................... 2-169
505 Change System Date/Time .......................................................................................... 2-170
506 Change System Tone Cycle......................................................................................... 2-171
507 Set Ring Mode Auto Conversion Time ....................................................................... 2-173
509 Set Holiday .................................................................................................................... 2-175
510 Change Common Phone Ring Cycle .......................................................................... 2-176
511 Set Common Phone Message Wait Lamp Cycle ....................................................... 2-177
513 Set Hotel Time Variable (MCP2) .................................................................................. 2-178
514 Set Substitute External Sound Source (MCP/MCP2) ..................................................... 2-179
600 Attendant Group ........................................................................................................... 2-180
601 Station Group (MCP/MCP2) ......................................................................................... 2-181
602 Enter the Name of a Station Group............................................................................. 2-184
603 C.O. Line Group (MCP/MCP2)...................................................................................... 2-186
604 Internal Page ................................................................................................................. 2-188
605 External Page................................................................................................................ 2-189
606 Assign a Speed Dial Block .......................................................................................... 2-190
Page X
Table of Contents
607 UCD Group Options ..................................................................................................... 2-191

608 Assign a Caller Information Saving Block (MCP/MCP2) .......................................... 2-193
609 Assign an Outgoing Call Saving Block (MCP/MCP2)..................................................... 2-194
611 Set a Short Message to a Station (MCP2) .................................................................. 2-195
612 Station for a Simultaneous Conference Call (MCP2) ..................................................... 2-196
614 Set a Station/C.O. Line Call Group (MCP2) ................................................................ 2-197
615 MGI Group (MCP2)........................................................................................................ 2-198
616 Set MGI Fixed User (MCP2) ............................................................................................ 2-199
700 Copy a Service Class Table ......................................................................................... 2-200
701 Service Class Table ...................................................................................................... 2-201
702 Enter a Table of Limiting Calls through a C.O. Line.................................................. 2-205
703 Enter a Table of Allowing Calls through a C.O. Line................................................. 2-207
704 Meta Characters to Limit Calling................................................................................. 2-209
705 Enter Common Speed Dial .......................................................................................... 2-210
706 Enter the Name of Common Speed Dial..................................................................... 2-212
707 Enter a Class Change Code (MCP/MCP2) .................................................................. 2-214
708 Enter an Account Code (MCP/MCP2) ......................................................................... 2-215
709 Enter a Code Excluded from the Limitation of Calls................................................. 2-216
through a C.O. Line .............................................................................................................. 2-216
710 Enter a Digit for Auto Route Selection (MCP/MCP2)................................................. 2-217
711 Enter a Timetable for Auto Route Selection .............................................................. 2-219
712 Enter the Route Table for Auto Route Selection (MCP/MCP2)................................. 2-221
713 Enter a Dial Conversion Table for Auto Route Selection (MCP/MCP2) ................... 2-223
714 Enter the Conversion Table of Dialing a Station Directly (MCP/MCP2)................... 2-225
715 Enter an Absent Message (MCP/MCP2) ..................................................................... 2-228
717 UCD Agent Code (MCP/MCP2) .................................................................................... 2-230
718 Area Code...................................................................................................................... 2-231
719 Guidance Data (MCP2) ................................................................................................. 2-232
720 Copy Keys ..................................................................................................................... 2-234
721 Save/Restore Keys ....................................................................................................... 2-235
722 Set a Button for Each Station (MCP/MCP2) ............................................................... 2-236
Page XI
Table of Contents
723 Set a Button for Each Type of a Phone (MCP/MCP2)..................................................... 2-242

724 Change Dial Numbers (MCP/MCP2)............................................................................ 2-248
725 Options of Printing System Message Detail Recording (MCP/MCP2)..................... 2-256
726 Voice Mail/Auto Attendant Options............................................................................. 2-260
728 Enter a Name to the Transfer Table of Caller Information (MCP/MCP2) ................. 2-263
730 Adjust the Recording Sensitivity of Internal Auto Attendant................................... 2-265
731 Delete Memory from Internal Auto Attendant ............................................................ 2-266
732 Transfer Table of Internal Auto Attendant .................................................................. 2-267
733 Internal Auto Attendant Options ................................................................................. 2-269
735 Option Table of Internal Auto Attendant..................................................................... 2-271
736 Message Combination of Internal Auto Attendant .................................................... 2-272
739 Set a Hold Message to Internal Auto Attendant ........................................................ 2-273
748 Enter a Number Ticket for Billing (MCP/MCP2) ......................................................... 2-274
749 Charge Rate (MCP/MCP2) ............................................................................................ 2-276
750 Reset the Voice Mail Card............................................................................................ 2-278
751 Specify Whether to Allow a Voice Mail ....................................................................... 2-279
752 Options of Automatic Voice Mail Recording.............................................................. 2-280
753 Alarm Ring from a Voice Mail ...................................................................................... 2-281
754 Halt the Voice Mail Card............................................................................................... 2-282
755 Specify the Alarm Condition of a Voice Mail.............................................................. 2-283
756 Set a Voice Mail to Music on Hold............................................................................... 2-284
757 Set a Voice Mail to Incoming or Outgoing ................................................................. 2-285
758 Conversion of System/Voice Mail Ring Modes.......................................................... 2-286
760 Cost Items (MCP2)........................................................................................................ 2-287
761 Set Tax Rate (MCP2)..................................................................................................... 2-289
762 Room Cost Rate (MCP2) .............................................................................................. 2-291
800 Set Technician Program Mode .................................................................................... 2-292
801 Change Technician Program Passcode ..................................................................... 2-293
802 Set Operator Program Scope ...................................................................................... 2-294
803 Set Tenant Group.......................................................................................................... 2-296
804 Set System I/O Port Parameter (MCP/MCP2) ............................................................. 2-297
Page XII
Table of Contents
805 Display Program Version ............................................................................................. 2-303

806 Verify New Card Installation ........................................................................................ 2-304
807 Adjust Digital Phone Tone Quality (MCP/MCP2) ....................................................... 2-305
809 Adjust Volume and Sensitivity (MCP/MCP2).............................................................. 2-308
810 Limit System Use Temporarily .................................................................................... 2-317
811 Restart System (MCP/MCP2) ....................................................................................... 2-318
812 Change Program Country Version.............................................................................. 2-320
813 Use Hotel Feature (MCP2)............................................................................................ 2-321
814 Set System Programming Language.......................................................................... 2-322
815 Copy Database.............................................................................................................. 2-323
818 Download Program (MCP/MCP2) ................................................................................ 2-325
819 Display SmartMedia Data (MCP/MCP2) ...................................................................... 2-327
820 Set System Link Number (MCP/MCP2)....................................................................... 2-330
821 Set Networking C.O. Line............................................................................................. 2-332
823 Set Network Service Level........................................................................................... 2-333
824 Convert Auto Route Selection Expansion Dial.......................................................... 2-335
825 Set Networking Option................................................................................................. 2-337
826 Set System Clock Synchronization Criteria............................................................... 2-338
829 LAN Printer Parameter ................................................................................................. 2-339
830 Set LAN Parameter (MCP/MCP2) ................................................................................ 2-342
831 Set VoIP Parameter (MCP) ........................................................................................... 2-344
831 Set MGI Parameter (MCP2)........................................................................................... 2-346
832 Set VoIP Access Code (MCP/MCP2) ........................................................................... 2-347
833 Set VoIP Internet Address............................................................................................ 2-351
834 Set VoIP General Option (MCP)................................................................................... 2-352
834 Set H.323 General Option (MCP2)............................................................................... 2-355
835 Set VoIP DSP Option (MCP) ......................................................................................... 2-357
835 Set MGI DSP Option (MCP2) ........................................................................................ 2-359
836 Set VoIP GateKeeper Option (MCP) ............................................................................ 2-361
836 Set H.323 GK Option (MCP2) ....................................................................................... 2-363
837 Set SIP Option (MCP2) ................................................................................................. 2-365
Page XIII
Table of Contents
838 Assign Private IP (MCP2).............................................................................................. 2-368

840 IP Phone Data (MCP2) .................................................................................................. 2-369
841 System IP Interlocking Data (MCP2)........................................................................... 2-371
845 Set Wireless Parameter (MCP2) .................................................................................. 2-373
846 Wireless Terminal Data (MCP2) ................................................................................... 2-375
847 Reset Wireless BTS (MCP2) ........................................................................................ 2-376
848 Set Wireless IP/MAC Address (MCP2)........................................................................ 2-377
849 Wireless System Data (MCP2)..................................................................................... 2-378
850 Display System Resource............................................................................................ 2-379
851 Display System Alarm .................................................................................................. 2-380
852 Display Alarm Type and Permission........................................................................... 2-382
853 Set Make Busy Status for Maintenance...................................................................... 2-383
854 Set System Diagnosis Time......................................................................................... 2-385
855 Display System Option Installation Status ................................................................ 2-386
856 Display System Programming Time ........................................................................... 2-388
858 Set System Emergency Alarm Key ............................................................................. 2-389
859 Display Hardware Version (MCP/MCP2)..................................................................... 2-390
860 Set ACD Status Service................................................................................................ 2-394
890 Initialize Port (MCP2).................................................................................................... 2-395
900 Clear System Passcode ............................................................................................... 2-396
LIST OF FIGURES
Figure 1.1
Figure 1.2
Figure 1.3
Figure 1.4
Page XIV
DS-4028E Phone.................................................................................................1-2
DS-5038D Phone.................................................................................................1-3
DS-5021D Phone.................................................................................................1-3
DS-5014D Phone.................................................................................................1-4
Table of Contents
This page intentionally left blank
Page XV
CHAPTER 1
Before Programming
In this chapter, the things to know before you start MMC programming, and the
digital phone buttons and cautions will be discussed.
Introduction to Programming
The MMC program means the changes on the data that is used for the system
operation program. There are 3 levels of MMC programming, such as engineer,
operator, and subscriber levels. According to the programming level, the subscriber
can program or cannot program the data change. The engineer level programming
and the operator level programming require a passcode for each level while the
subscriber level programming does not require a passcode.
1.1
Engineer Level Program

This level is allowed to program every level of program.
This level of programming can be done on every station line within the system, but it
can be done for only one station line at a time.
1.2
Operator Level Program

An engineer can do programming within the range set by the Program 802-Operator
Program Range Setting.
Programming is allowed for any station within the Tenant group, but it can be done
for only one station at a time.
1.3
Subscriber Level Program

Programming can be done for only subscriber level programs.
Page 1-1
Digital Phone Buttons
2.1
DS-4000 Series Phone

The following figure shows the shape of DS-4028E phone among DS-4000 series
phones.
LCD
Left Soft
Right Soft
A
B
Dial
Transfer
Button
Volume Buttons
Speaker
Button
Hold
Figure 1.1 DS-4028E Phone
Among 3 soft buttons, the first one is called the Left Soft Button, which is used to
save the modified data or to move the cursor inside the LCD display in the left
direction.
Among 3 soft buttons, the third one is called the Right Soft Button, which is used to
save the modified data or to move the cursor in the right direction.
Among 8 programmable buttons, the first 6 programmable buttons are assigned as
A~F to carry out specific functions or usage while programming. Generally,
these buttons perform specific functions that the user set for each corresponding button.
When MMC programming, other functions programmed on the programmable
buttons are as follows :
Page 1-2
(Volume)
Speaker Button
Hold
A Button
B Button
: Erase the previously entered item

: Select either a capital letter or small letter
: Enter the programming code
2.2
DS-5000D Series Phone

There are several DS-5000D series phones, such as DS-5038D, DS-5021D, and DS5014D, as shown in the figures below :
LCD Display
Programmable Buttons(21)
Soft Buttons
Scroll Button
Telephone Status Indicator
Volume Buttons
Redial Button
Dial Buttons
Microphone
Speaker Button
Conference Button
Transfer Button
Hold Button
Figure 1.2 DS-5038D Phone
LCD Display
Soft Buttons
Scroll Button
Telephone Status Indicator
Volume Buttons
Redial Button
Navigation Buttons
Dial Buttons
Microphone
Speaker Button
Conference Button
Transfer Button
Hold Button
Page 1-3
Programmable
LCD Display
Soft Buttons
Scroll Button
Telephone
Status
Volume
Redial Button
Dial
Speaker
Hold
Navigation
Microphon
Conference
Transfer
The DS-5000D series phones have 38/21/14 programmable buttons that a subscriber
can register any functions he/she wants to use. Also, there are several other function
buttons: the dial buttons, the volume button for controlling a voice volume, the redial
button that allows to redial the latest phone number, the conference button that can be
used during the conference, the transfer button that is used to transfer a call received
during a phone conversation to another subscriber, the hold button to hold a call for a
while, the speaker button, and the navigation buttons that are designed for the
convenience of phone users.
And, there is the LCD display that displays the phone status and various other kinds
of information. With three colors like red, green, and yellow, the phone status
indicator displays the current status of phone.
Page 1-4
Cautions in Programming
y
Programming can be done while the handset is placed on the phone at a standstill.
Programming can be done on any station line(a digital phone).
Programming can be done only on the digital phone, not on general phone.
If the digital phone does not have the LCD display, press the numbers using the
dial buttons as instructed by the programming guide, without using the volume
buttons [ ]. However, if the digital phone does not have soft buttons, certain
programming cannot be done. Therefore, only the subscriber level programming
is allowed on the digital phone that does not have the LCD display.
If the LCD displays an INVALID DATA message while programming, this

means that the entered data is invalid. Enter the correct data again.
The content of the displayed message for each step shows the status after each
step is executed.
If no key is pressed for a certain period of time during programming

(Key program end time, default is 60 seconds), it becomes a standstill from
programming mode.
If the handset is picked up while programming, it becomes a standstill from

programming mode.
Before the modified data is confirmed by pressing [Left Soft] button or

[Right Soft] button, the [Speaker] or [Transfer] button is pressed to make it at a
standstill or the phone is unplugged. In this case, the data entered up to that time
will be automatically saved as the data displayed on the LCD.
Page 1-5
Program List
The MMC modifications according to MCP and MCP2 systems and available MMC
for each user level will be discussed here.
4.1
MMC Modifications for MCP/MCP2

A part of MMC function is different when it is used on the MCP board-equipped
iDCS 500 or on the MCP2 board-equipped iDCS 500. Referring to the table below,
the user can check the difference between the MCP system and the MCP2 system for
each MMC function, as well as additional items.
In the table below, the meaning of the To Modify and Add section is as follows :
y No indication : The MMC functions used in the MCP board-equipped iDCS 500
system and in the MCP2 board-equipped iDCS 500 system are the same.
y MCP/MCP2 : The MMC functions used in the MCP board equipped iDCS 500
system and in the MCP2 board equipped iDCS 500 system are different.
y For MCP2 : The MMC functions used only in the MCP2 board equipped iDCS
500 system.
y For MCP : The MMC functions used only in the MCP board equipped iDCS 500
system.
MMC
Program No.
Program Description
Modified or Added Contents
100
Station Lock
N/A
101
Change the subscribers
N/A
To Modify
and Add
passcode
102
Call forwarding
<MCP2>
MCP/MCP2
- EXT, CFU, CFB, and CFNR

items are not applicable(N/A)
- Can enter the outside numbers
for the destination.
103
Set the phone answering
N/A
mode
104
Change the station name
N/A
105
Enter individual speed dial
N/A
number
106
Enter the name for individual
N/A
speed dial
Page 1-6
MMC
Program Description
Program No.
107
Set the station number for the

SG : station group number
subscriber button
To Modify
and Add
MCP/MCP2
(500-549)
<MCP>
- L : 500-549(5000-5049)
- M : 500-529(5000-5029)
<MCP2>
- L : 500-579(5000-5079)
- M: 500-539(5000-5039)
108
Displays the program status of
N/A
the phone
109
Set date/time display type
N/A
110
Set the subscriber function
<MCP>
on/off
- iDCS-M does not support
MCP/MCP2
items below :
07.CALL COST
08.AUTO CAMPON
11.DISP SPDNAME
12.CID REVW ALL
13.SECURE OHVA
111
Set the ring tone
N/A
112
Set the alarm time
N/A
113
Display or modify the memo
N/A
114
Set the volume of the digital
N/A
phone
115
Set the absent message
<MCP>
MCP/MCP2
- L : can set up to 30(01-30)

messages
- M : Can set up to 20(01-20)
messages
<MCP2>
- Can set up to 20(01-20)
messages
- 16-20 messages can be
differently set for each station.
116
117
Set the alarm time/message

Enter the urgent text
N/A
For MCP2
message
118
Set the conference group
For MCP2
Page 1-7
MMC
Program No.
Program Description
119
Set the caller ID display type
N/A
120
Set the large LCD option
<MCP2>
To Modify
and Add
For MCP2
- Add dial mode

121
Set the language to be used
N/A
for the digital phone

122
Set the speed for spot
N/A
information display
125
Set the executor absent status
For MCP2
200
Set operator program mode
N/A
201
Change the operator program
N/A
passcode
202
203
Change the passcode to use
<MCP2>
MCP/MCP2
functions
- Add Delete and WLI REGIST
Set to receive a call in night
N/A
mode
204
Set to control the common bell
N/A
205
Set the station pair for a loud bell
N/A
206
Set to listen-in a call
N/A
207
Set voice mailbox/auto
N/A
attendant port
208
Set the ring type for general
N/A
phone port
209
Set the station pair for the
<MCP>
add-on module
iDCS-M can set up to 2 phones
MCP/MCP2
for one digital phone.

<MCP2>
iDCS-M can set up to 4 phones.
210
Set the system on/off
<MCP>
items
below :
27. SVM/ALM SMDR

37. BEGN DGT DSP
38. ONE TCH FACC
40. CHAIN FWD
52. CHK SPV TRK
- 07. DSP SPDNAME is
supported only for the MCP
board-equipped iDCS-M.
Page 1-8
MMC
Program Description
Program No.
210
Set the system on/off
To Modify
and Add
<MCP2>
- 52. CHK SPV TRK is only
supported for MCP2.
211
Set to receive the door
N/A
phone ring
214
Set to receive a DISA
N/A
alarm ring
215
Set the voice dial option
N/A
216
Set the user of voice dial
N/A
217
Set the ISDN service
N/A
220
Set the station pair
N/A
221
Set an option to display
<MCP>
statistics data
- Can be used only when the LAN
MCP/MCP2
card is installed.
222
Set the guest room type
For MCP2
223
Set FAX pair
For MCP2
224
Set the voice alarm message
<MCP>
MCP/MCP2
- iDCS-M does not support this.

300
Set each station function
N/A
on/off
301
Set the station service level
N/A
302
Set call pick-up group
N/A
Set executive/secretary
N/A
303
function
304
Set the office line for each
<MCP2>
station number(MCP)
- Set a call pickup or call to
/set the call group(MCP2)
MCP/MCP2
specific C.O. calling group for

each station call group.
305
Set the compulsory input code
N/A
type
306
Set the direct call
N/A
308
Set the background music
N/A
source
309
Set the station hold tone
N/A
source
310
Set the level for LCR selection
N/A
312
Set to display the caller ID or
N/A
not
Page 1-9
MMC
Program No.
313
314
Program Description
Copy the station/office lines
<MCP2>
that can make a call(MCP)
This program copies the setting
/Copy the call group setting
for each call group to another call
(MCP2)
group.
Set the alarm/limit on the time
N/A
To Modify
and Add
MCP/MCP2
for C.O. line call

315
Set the branch group
N/A
316
Set the identifying ring
N/A
317
Set to dial any station line
<MCP>
from each station line(MCP)
Set each station to call other
/Set to dial any station call
stations.
group for each station call
<MCP2>
group(MCP2)
Set each station call group to call
MCP/MCP2
other station call groups.

318
Set to dial any C.O. line from
<MCP>
each C.O. line(MCP)
Set each C.O. line to call other
/Set to dial any C.O. call group
C.O. lines.
for each C.O. call
<MCP2>
group(MCP2)
Set each C.O. call group to call
MCP/MCP2
other C.O. call groups.

319
Exchange phone information
N/A
automatically
320
Set to transfer to the system
N/A
no answering mode
321
Set if the phone can use the
For MCP
text message or not

323
Set the caller ID
<MCP>
MCP/MCP2
- A caller ID can be set only for

the station in iDCS 500.
- 2 caller IDs can be set in iDCS-M
while 4 caller IDs can be set in
iDCS-L.
<MCP2>
- A caller ID can be set for not
only the station number but also
the C.O. line.
- Up to 4 caller IDs can be set for
each station or C.O. line.
400
Page 1-10
Set each C.O. line function on/off
N/A
MMC
Program Description
Program No.
401
Set the C.O. line type
N/A
402
Set the dialing type of C.O. line
N/A
403
Set the call restriction level of
N/A
To Modify
and Add
C.O. line
404
405
Enter the C.O. line name
N/A
Enter the C.O. number for the
N/A
C.O. line
406
Set to receive the C.O. line call
N/A
407
Hang up the C.O. line
N/A
compulsorily
408
Set the sound source for a while
N/A
the C.O. line is held

409
Display the program status of
N/A
C.O. line
410
Set the DISA service of the C.O.
N/A
line
411
Set the signaling method for E1
N/A
type C.O. line

412
Set the signaling method for a
N/A
private line/DID line

413
Set the voice mailbox type for
N/A
C.O. line service

414
Set the C.O. line to provide the
N/A
caller ID
415
Set to save information of the
N/A
caller abandoned call or not

416
Set the receiving method for a
N/A
private line/DID line

418
R2MFC signal
N/A
419
Set the nighttime group for each
N/A
C.O. line
420
421
Set a C.O. line for PRS service
N/A
Adjust the call sensitivity of C.O.
N/A
line
422
Adjust the standard sensitivity for
For MCP2
each C.O. line

423
S/T mode of BRI
N/A
424
Set the ISDN phone connection port
N/A
Page 1-11
MMC
Program Description
Program No.
425
Reset the ISDN card
N/A
426
Set the E1/PRI CRC4 option
N/A
427
Set the PRI option
N/A
428
Set the BRI option
N/A
429
Set to receive the MSN
N/A
430
Set the service level of C.O. line
N/A
433
Set to use the charging rate
<MCP>
table
To Modify
and Add
MCP/MCP2
this.
434
Indicate the connection status
N/A
436
Set the insert digits when
N/A
transferring the called number

500
Changes the system counter
N/A
501
Changes the system time
<MCP2>
variable
- Add LONG KEY DETECT
MCP/MCP2
- Add LONG KEY REPEAT

- Add TSW CONN.DELAY
502
Change the station time variable
N/A
503
Change the C.O. line time
N/A
variable
504
Dial pulse break ratio
N/A
505
Change the date/time of the
N/A
system
506
Change the system tone
N/A
507
Change the automatic change
N/A
time of ring mode

509
Set holidays
N/A
510
Change the ring cycle of general
N/A
phone
511
Set the standby lamp cycle for
N/A
message on general phone

513
Set the time variable of hotel
514
Set the external sound source
<MCP>
that replaces the system tone
iDCS-M does not support this.
Set the operator group
N/A
600
Page 1-12
For MCP2
MCP/MCP2
MMC
Program Description
Program No.
601
Set the station group

<MCP Station Group>
To Modify
and Add
MCP/MCP2
- L : 500~549(5000~5049)
- M : 500~529(5000~5029)
<MCP2 Station Group>
- L : 500~578(5000~5078)
- M : 500~538(5000~5038)
602
Enter the station group name
N/A
603
Set the C.O. line group
<MCP C.O. line Group>
MCP/MCP2
- L : 9, 800~848
- M : 9,800~809
603
Set the C.O. line group
<MCP2 C.O. line Group>
MCP/MCP2
- L : 9,800~828
- M : 9,800~828
604
Set the internal page zone
N/A
605
Set the external page zone
N/A
606
Allocate the speed dial block
N/A
Set the automatic call
N/A
607
distribution group option

608
Allocate the caller ID log block
Entry Number
MCP/MCP2
<MCP> L : 1500, M : 1000

<MCP2> L : 2000, M : 2000
609
Allocate the outgoing call log
- MCP system can be used
block
only on the LAN equipped
MCP/MCP2
system
- Buffer number
MCP-L : 1500, M : 1000
MCP2-L : 2000, M : 2000
611
Set the text message station
For MCP2
612
Set the conference call station
For MCP2
614
Set the station/C.O. line call
For MCP2
groups
615
Set the MGI group
For MCP2
616
Set MGI Fixed User
For MCP2
700
Copy the service level
N/A
701
Set the service level
N/A
702
Enter the limit on the C.O. line
N/A
origination
703
Enter the allowance on the
N/A
C.O. line
Page 1-13
MMC
Program No.
704
Program Description
Set the meta character for
To Modify
and Add
N/A
limiting a call
705
Enter the common speed dial
N/A
706
Enter the common speed dial
N/A
name
707
Enter the level change code
Number of level change code
MCP/MCP2
MCP-L : 500, M : 250

MCP2-L : 500, M : 500
708
Enter the charge code
Charge code number
MCP/MCP2
MCP-L : 999, M : 500

MCP2-L : 999, M : 999
709
Enter the exclusion code on
N/A
the C.O. line origination limit

710
Enter the LCR selection digit
Entry Number
MCP/MCP2
MCP-L : 2000, M : 1000

MCP2-L : 2000, M : 2000
711
Enter the LCR selection time
N/A
table
712
Enter the LCR selection
Number of Routing Table
routing table
MCP-L : 32, M : 16
MCP/MCP2
MCP2-L : 32, M : 16
713
Enter the LCR selection dial
Number of Dial Conversion
conversion table
MCP-L : 200, M : 100
MCP/MCP2
MCP2-L : 200, M : 200

714
Enter the stations direct dial

conversion table
- MCP board- installed iDCS-M
MCP/MCP2
does not support the MOH

SOURCE
- Number of Conversion Table
MCP-L : 999, M :400
MCP2-L : 999, M : 999
715
Enter the status message
<MCP>
MCP/MCP2
- iDCS-M : 20, iDCS-L : 30

<MCP2>
- Can set 15 status messages.
717
Set the agent code who
Number of the maximum agent
distributes automatic calls
code.
MCP/MCP2
<MCP> L : 300, M : 100

<MCP2> L : 300, M : 100
Page 1-14
MMC
Program Description
Program No.
718
Set the local area number
719
Screen guide data
720
Copy the phone buttons
N/A
721
Save/Copy the phone button
N/A
722
Set the button for each station
<MCP>
To Modify
and Add
N/A
For MCP2
MCP/MCP2
- Buttons only supported at iDCS-M

ACCT : Account
- Buttons not supported from
iDCS-M
ACC : Account
CONP : Networking name
EP : call pick-up on the fixed call.
MS : send a specific sound to
the key destined counter.
PRB : allow a break-in
PROG : individual program
PTHR : Networking path
replacement
SETDND : Set/clear not to
receive other station call
<Buttons supported only at MCP2>
- DIVERT : transfer to secretary
GRCONF : page the conference
group
STATE : set the executive status
<Hotel related items>
- BILL : billing on a guest room
BOOTH : Set to use the booth
phone
CHIN : Check-in
CHOUT : Check-out
HOTEL : Hotel
RB : Room bill
RSV : Room status view
SLOCAT : Hotel staff locater
WAKEUP : Set the morning call
time
XCHIN : quick check-in
Page 1-15
MMC
Program Description
Program No.
723
Set the button for each phone
<MCP2>
type
- New phone type is added
To Modify
and Add
MCP/MCP2
- 99 BTN SETS
- 38 BTN SETS
- 21 BTN SETS
- 14 BTN SETS
724
Change the dial number
<Number only added to MCP2>
MCP/MCP2
- VIRT SLT DIAL NO : 3501~

- VIRT DGP DIAL NO : 3401~
- MGI DIAL NO : 3801~
- IP STN DIAL NO : 3201~
- MOBILE DIAL NO : 3301~
- VOIP NET DIAL NO : 8301~
- H323 TRK DIAL NO : 8401~
- SIP TRK DIAL NO : 3501~
725
Set the display option for call
<MCP2 Hotel related item>
information
- HOTEL PAGE FEED
MCP/MCP2
- HOTEL START LINE

726
Set voicemail box/auto
N/A
attendant option
728
Enter the caller information
Number of caller information
conversion table
change
MCP/MCP2
<MCP> L : 1500, M : 400

<MCP2> L : 2000, M : 1000
730
Adjust the recording level of
N/A
built-in auto attendant

731
Erase the memory of built-in
N/A
auto attendant
732
Set the change mark of built-in
N/A
auto attendant
733
Set the option for built-in auto
N/A
attendant
735
Set the auto application option
N/A
for built-in auto attendant

736
Match the message of built-in
N/A
auto attendant
739
Set the hold message for built-
N/A
in auto attendant
Page 1-16
MMC
Program Description
Program No.
748
Enter the cost DP digit

<MCP>
To Modify
and Add
MCP/MCP2
- iDCS-M does not support this

749
Set the cost rate
<MCP>
MCP/MCP2

750
Reset the voicemail box card
N/A
751
Assign the voice mailbox
N/A
752
Set the auto recording option
N/A
for a voice mailbox

753
Set to receive an alarm ring of
N/A
voice mailbo
754
755
Stop the voice mailbox card
N/A
Set the alarm condition for a
N/A
voice mailbox
756
Set the hold tone for voice
N/A
mailbox
757
Set the voice mailbox for
N/A
receiving/sending
758
Set the ring mode change for
N/A
system/voice mailbox
760
Cost calculation
For MCP2
761
Set the tax rate
For MCP2
762
Cost rate for guest rooms
For MCP2
800
Set the engineer program
N/A
mode
801
Change the passcode of
N/A
engineer program
802
Set the operator program
N/A
scope
803
804
Set the tenant group
N/A
Set the variable for system
I/O port number
input port
<MCP>
MCP/MCP2
- LAN card is installed

[1],[2],[3],[4],[5-MODEM]
- LAN card in not installed
[1],[2],[3-MODEM]
<MCP2>
- [2],[3],[5-MODEM]
805
Display the program version
N/A
Page 1-17
MMC
Program No.
Program Description
806
Check if a new card is installed
N/A
807
Adjust the digital phone quality
<MCP2>
To Modify
and Add
MCP/MCP2
Add new phone items

- 12L
- 21D
- ITP
809
Adjust volume and sensitivity
<MCP2>
MCP/MCP2
- Add WLI from TSW gain control

810
Suspend the system use
N/A
811
Restart the system
<MCP2>
MCP/MCP2
- Add FAST RESTART

812
Change the programs national
N/A
version
813
Select the hotel operation
For MCP2
function
814
Set the system programming
N/A
language
815
Copy database
N/A
818
Download a program
Name of downloadable programs
MCP/MCP2
<MCP>
Ex : MCPLV100.PGM,
SCPV100.PGM,
LANV100.PGM, PRIV100.PGM
<MCP2>
Ex : MPPLV100.PGM,
SPPV100.PGM,
PRIV100.PGM
819
Display the SmartMedia
File names in SmartMedia
information
<MCP>
MCP/MCP2
Ex : STARTUP.SYS,
MCPLV100.PGM,
SCPV100.PGM, LANV100.PGM,
PRIV100.PGM, STARTUP.INI,
DATABASE.MCP
<MCP2>
Ex : STARTUP.PRE,
MPPLV100.PGM,
SPPV100.PGM, PRIV100.PGM,
STARTUP.INI , DATABASE.MPP
Page 1-18
MMC
Program Description
Program No.
820
Set the system link number

<MCP>
To Modify
and Add
MCP/MCP2

<MCP2>
- It is designed to enter IP address
for VoIP networking.
821
Set the networking C.O. line
- The MCP board-installed iDCSM does not support this.
823
Set the network service level
- The MCP board-installed iDCS-M
824
Change the expansion dial for
does not support this.

auto routing selection
825
Set networking option

826
Set the synchronization
N/A
standard for system clock

829
LAN printer parameter
- The MCP one can be used only

on the LAN-installed system.
830
Set the LAN parameter
- The MCP one can be used only
MCP/MCP2
on the LAN-installed system.

831
Set the MGI parameter(MCP2)
MCP/MCP2
/Set the VoIP parameter(MCP)

832
Set the VoIP access number
<MCP2>
MCP/MCP2
- The calling and receiving table

are separated.
833
Set the VoIP Internet address
834
Set H.323 general
N/A
MCP/MCP2
option(MCP2)
/VoIP general option(MCP)
835
Set the MGI DSP
MCP/MCP2
option(MCP2)
/VoIP DSP option(MCP)
836
Set the H.323 GK option
MCP/MCP2
(MCP2)
/VoIP GateKeeper option(MCP)
837
Set the SIP option
For MCP2
838
Assign Private IP
For MCP2
840
IP phone information
841
System IP inter-working
For MCP2
For MCP2
information
Page 1-19
MMC
Program Description
Program No.
To Modify
and Add
845
Set wireless parameters
For MCP2
846
Wireless terminal information
For MCP2
847
Restart wireless base station
For MCP2
848
Set wireless IP address/MAC
For MCP2
849
Wireless system information
For MCP2
850
Display the system resources
851
Display the system alarm
N/A
In case of MCP system, this
programming can be done only on
the system where the LAN board is
installed on the MCP card.
852
Display the alarm type and
setting

853
Set the maintenance busy
- In case of MCP2, MGI is added.
MCP/MCP2
status
854
Set the diagnostic time

855
Display the system option
N/A
installation status
856
Display the system
programming time

858
Set the system urgent alarm
key

Page 1-20
859
Display Hardware Version
860
Set ACD status service
890
Port initialization
900
Erase the system passcode
MCP/MCP2
N/A
For MCP2
N/A
4.2
Programmable MMC for Each User Level

The MMC program can be divided into programmable one and non-programmable
one. The programmable MMC is classified into 3 levels, such as engineer, operator,
and subscriber level. In this section, the programmable MMC for each user level will
be introduced.
4.2.1 Programmable MMC on the subscriber programming level

MMC Program No.
Program Description
100
Station Lock
101
Subscriber Passcode Change
102
Call Transfer (MCP/MCP2)
103
Phone Answering Mode
104
Station Name Change
105
Individual Speed Dial
106
Individual Speed Dial Name
107
Expansion Number for Subscriber Button (MCP/MCP2)
108
Phones Program Status Display
109
Date/Time Status Display Format
110
Subscriber Function On/Off (MCP/MCP2)
111
Ring Tone
112
Alarm Time
113
Display/Modify the Memo Content
114
Digital Phone Volume
115
Absent Message Setting (MCP/MCP2)
116
Alarm Time/Message Setting
117
Entering the Urgent Text Message (MCP2)
118
Conference Group Setting
119
Caller ID Display Method
120
Large LCD Option Setting (MCP2)
121
Language To Be Used on the Digital Phone
122
Spot Information Display Speed
125
Executive Status Setting (MCP2)
Page 1-21
4.2.2 Non-Programmable MMC on the Subscriber Programming Level

MMC
Program Description
Program No.
MMC
Program Description
Program No.
200
Operator Program Mode Setting
201
Operator Programs Passcode
202
Passcode Change For
203
Ring Receiving in Night Mode
205
Auxiliary Ring Match With
Change
Functions (MCP/MCP2)
204
Common Bell Control Method
Station Line
206
Barge-in Setting
207
Voice Mailbox/Auto Attendant

Port
208
Ring Type Setting for General
209
Phone Port
Add-on module Match with

Station Line (MCP/MCP2)
210
System On/Off (MCP/MCP2)
211
Door Phone Ring Receiving
214
DISA Alarm Receiving
215
Voice Dial Option
216
Voice Dial User Setting
217
ISDN Service
220
Station Match
221
Statistics Data Display Option

(MCP/MCP2)
222
Guest Room Type (MCP2)
224
Voice Alarm Message Setting
300
Function On/Off for Each
223
Fax Pair Setting (MCP2)
301
Station Service Level Setting
303
Executive/Secretary Setting
305
Compulsory Input Code Type
Station.
302
Call Pickup Group Setting

(MCP/MCP2)
304
Set the office line for each

station number (MCP)
Set the call group (MCP2)
306
Direct Call
308
Background Sound Source
309
Sound Source for Station Hold
310
Auto Routing Level
312
Caller ID Display
313
Copy the station/office lines

that can make a call (MCP)
Copy the call group setting
(MCP2)
314
Alarm/Limit on C.O. line Call
315
Branch Group
Time
316
Identifying Ring
317
Set the available stations for

each station (MCP)
Set available station call group
for each station call group
(MCP2)
Page 1-22
MMC
Program Description
Program No.
318
C.O. line setting for dialing each
MMC
Program Description
Program No.
319
C.O. line (MCP)
Automatic Phone Information

Exchange
C.O. call group setting for each

C.O. call group (MCP2)
320
System No Answering Transfer
321
Phone Setting To Use the Text

Message (MCP)
323
Caller ID Setting (MCP/MCP2)
400
Function On/Off for Each C.O.
401
C.O. line Type
403
Call Restriction Level of C.O.
line
402
Dialing Type of C.O. line
line
404
C.O. line Name
405
Enter the CO number of C.O.

line
406
C.O. line Destination
407
Hang up the C.O. line

Compulsorily
408
Sound Source for C.O. line
409
Program Status of C.O. line
Hold
410
DISA Service of C.O. line
411
E1 C.O. line Signaling Method
412
Private Line/DID Line Signaling
413
Service Type of C.O. line Voice
Method
414
Caller ID Providing C.O. line
Mailbox
415
To save or not the caller

abandoned call
416
Private line/DID lines Receiving
418
R2MFC Signal
420
PRS C.O. line Setting
422
Adjust the Standard Sensitivity
mode
419
Nighttime Group for Each C.O.

line.
421
Adjust the call sensitivity of C.O.

line.
of Each C.O. line
423
S/T Mode of BRI
424
ISDN Phone Connection Port
425
ISDN Card Reset
426
E1/PRI CRC4 Option Setting
427
PRI Option Setting
428
BRI Option Setting
429
MSN Receiving Mode
430
C.O. line Service Level
C.O. line Cost Rate Use
434
Connection Status Display
433
(MCP/MCP2)
436
Insert Digits When Transferring

the Called Number
500
Change the System Counter
501
System Time Variable

(MCP/MCP2)
Page 1-23
MMC
Program No.
502
Program Description
Change the Station Line Time
MMC
Program No.
503
Variable.
Program Description
Change the C.O. line Time
Variable
504
Dial Pulse Break Ratio
505
Date/Time of System
506
Change the System Tone Cycle
507
Automatic Change of Ring

Mode Time
509
Holidays Setting
510
Change the Ring Cycle on

General Phone
511
Set the Standby Lamp Cycle for
513
Hotel Time Variable (MCP2)
Message on General Phone

514
Set the external sound source

that replaces the system tone.
(MCP/MCP2)
600
Operator Attendant Group
601
Station Group Setting

(MCP/MCP2)
602
Station Group Name
603
C.O. line Group Setting

(MCP/MCP2)
604
Internal Paging
605
606
Allocate the Speed Dial Block
607
608
Allocate the Caller ID Log Block
609
(MCP/MCP2)
611
Text Message Station Line

Station/C.O. line Call Group
Automatic Call Distribution

Group Option
Allocate the Originating Call
Log Block (MCP/MCP2)
612
(MCP2)
614
External Paging
Station for Conference Call

(MCP2)
615
MGI Group Setting (MCP2)
(MCP2)
616
Set MGI Fixed User (MCP2)
700
Copy the Service Level
701
Service Level Setting
702
Limit on the C.O. line
703
Tolerance on C.O. line
Origination
Outgoing Call
704
Meta Character to Limit a Call.
705
Common Speed Dial
706
Common Speed Dial Name
707
Level Change Code

(MCP/MCP2)
708
Enter the Charge Code
709
(MCP/MCP2)
710
LCR Selection Digit
Exclusion Code for C.O. line

Origination Restriction
711
LCR Selection Time Table
713
LCR Selection Dial Conversion
(MCP/MCP2)
712
LCR Selection Routing Table

(MCP/MCP2)
Page 1-24
Table (MCP/MCP2)
MMC
Program Description
Program No.
714
Station Lines Direct Dial
MMC
Program No.
Program Description
715
Absent Message (MCP/MCP2)
718
Local Area Code Setting
720
Copy the Phone Button
722
Assign the Button for Each
Conversion Table (MCP/MCP2)

717
Agent Code For Automatic Call

Distribution (MCP/MCP2)
719
721
723
725
728
Screen Guide Data (MCP2)

Phone Button Save/Copy
Button for Each Phone Type
(MCP/MCP2)
Display Option for Call
Information (MCP/MCP2)
Caller Information Conversion
Station Line (MCP/MCP2)

724
726
730
Table (MCP/MCP2)
Change of Dial Numbers

(MCP/MCP2)
Voice Mailbox/Auto Attendant
Option
Adjust the Recording
Sensitivity of Built-in Auto
Attendant
731
Erase the Memory of Built-in
732
Auto Attendant
733
Set the Option for Built-in Auto
Auto Attendant
735
Attendant
736
Match the Message of Built-in

Enter the Cost DP Digit
Option Table for Built-in Auto

Attendant
739
Auto Attendant
748
Conversion Table for Built-in
Hold Message for Built-in Auto

Attendant
749
(MCP/MCP2)
Cost Rate Setting

(MCP/MCP2)
750
Voice Mailbox Card Reset
751
Voice Mailbox Tolerance Setting
752
Auto Recording Option of Voice
753
Receiving Mode of Voice
Mailbox
754
Stop the Voice Mailbox Card
Mailboxs Alarm Ring

755
Alarm Condition for Voice

Mailbox
756
Set the Hold Sound for Voice
757
Mailbox
758
Change of Ring Mode in
Receiving/Sending Mode of
Voice Mailbox
760
Cost Calculation (MCP2)
System/Voice Mailbox
761
Tax Rate Setting (MCP2)
762
Cost Rate for Guest Rooms

(MCP2)
Page 1-25
4.2.3 Programmable MMC on the Engineers Programming Level

MMC
Program No.
Program Description
MMC
Program No.
Program Description
800
Engineer Program Mode
801
Change the Passcode of
802
Operator Program Mode
803
Tenant Group Setting
804
System I/O Port Variable
805
Program Version Display
807
Adjust the Digital Phones Call
Engineer Program
(MCP/MCP2)
806
Installation of New Card
Quality (MCP/MCP2)
809
Adjust Volume & Sensitivity
810
(MCP/MCP2)
811
System Restart (MCP/MCP2)
Restrict the System Use

Temporarily
812
Change the Programs

National Version
813
Select the Hotel Function
814
(MCP2)
815
Database Copy
System Programming
Language
818
Program Download
(MCP/MCP2)
819
SmartMedia Information Display
820
(MCP/MCP2)
821
824
System Link Number

(MCP/MCP2)
Networking C.O. line Setting
823
Networking Service Level
Change the Expansion Dial for
825
Networking Option
829
LAN Printer Parameters

VoIP Parameters (MCP)
LCR Selection
826
System Clock Synchronization

Standard
830
LAN Parameters (MCP/MCP2)
831
832
VoIP Access Number
833
VOIP Internet Address
835
VoIP DSP Option (MCP)
MGI Parameters (MCP2)

(MCP/MCP2)
834
VoIP General Option (MCP)

H.323 General Option (MCP2)
836
VoIP GateKeeper Option (MCP)
MGI DSP Option (MCP2)

837
SIP Option Setting (MCP2)
H.323 GK Option (MCP2)

838
Assign Private IP (MCP2)
840
IP Phone Information (MCP2)
841
System IP Interworking
Information (MCP2)
845
Wireless Parameters (MCP2)
846
Wireless Terminal Information

(MCP2)
847
Restart Wireless Base Station

(MCP2)
Page 1-26
848
Wireless IP Address/MAC
(MCP2)
MMC
Program Description
Program No.
849
Wireless System Information
MMC
Program No.
Program Description
850
System Resource Display
852
Alarm Type&Acceptance
(MCP2)
851
System Alarm Display
Display
853
Compulsory Use for
854
System Diagnosis Time
System Option Status Display
856
Programming Time Display
Systems Urgent Alarm Key
859
Maintenance
855
858
Setting
860
ACD Status Service Setting
900
Erase the System Passcode
Hardware Version
(MCP/MCP2)
890
Port Initialization (MCP2)
Overview of Programming Procedure

Here, the order of programming will be discussed before explaining programming
method of each list. Please read the description carefully before programming.
The programming order is as follows :
1) Make the programmable state.
y Press the [Transfer] button at pause.
y Enter the program number, either 200 or 800.
y Enter either the operator passcode or the engineer passcode.
y Press [1] dial button to enable the programming mode.
y In case of Program 800 Engineer Program Mode Setting, enter the tenant
number to be programmed.
2) Make the program number selectable state.
If the [Speaker] button is pressed, the program selection mode appears.
Or, if the [Transfer] button is pressed, the programming state ends and the
pause state begin.
3) Select a program.
Enter the program number.
Or, select the program number with the [Volume] button and press the [Speaker]
button.
Or, Press [Transfer] in a pause state and enter the program number.
4) Start programming the corresponding program.
Page 1-27
This page intentionally left blank
Page 1-28
CHAPTER 2
MMC Programming
In this chapter, how to use each program will be discussed according to each program list.
First, the user sets the digital phone in the programmable state, then either set or
change the value according to the corresponding programming procedure. To set the
digital phone in the programmable state, see the overview of programming procedure in
this guide.
100 Station Lock

This program locks up each station when a user is not present and does not want
another person to use the phone.
Even if the digital phone is locked, programming is possible.
If station lock is not provided according to the station service level, the user cannot
lock the station but can unlock. Whenever the phone is either operator or engineer
programming mode, the user can lock the station or release station lock.
0. UNLOCKED : Unlock
1. LOCKED OUT : Lock to send a call to C.O. line
2. LOCKED ALL : Station Lock
Default
All station lock is unlocked : [UNLOCKED]
Programming Procedure
Display
1. Press [Transfer] and [100].
[201] STN LOCK

UNLOCKED
2. Press the station number.(e.g. 205)

Or, press [Volume] to select a station
and press the [Right] soft button to move a cursor.
Or, press either the [Message] button(DS-24SE) or
[ANS/RLS] button(DS-4028E) to set all stations.
[205] STN LOCK

UNLOCKED
Page 2-1
3. Press either [1] or [2] to set the station locked

Or, press [0] to unlock.
Or, use [Volume] to select the lock state.
and press the [Right] soft button
to start again from No.2 for another station.
[205] STN LOCK

LOCKED OUT
4. Press [Transfer] to exit the program.

Or, press [Speaker] to move on to the next program.
Related Program
Program 101
Program 301
Program 701
Page 2-2
Change Subscriber Passcode

Station Service Level
Service Level Table
101 Change Subscriber Passcode

The users of digital phone can set or change their individual passcode.
This passcode is used when a station level is temporarily changed or DISA is used.
Also, it is used to lock or unlock the station.
The subscriber passcode will not be changed while the phone is enabled for operator
programming mode or engineer programming mode.
Operator or engineer can erase the subscribers passcode and set 1234 as a default,
but they cannot see the current subscriber passcode.
If the phone passcode is set default, the default passcode cannot be used for
temporary level change or DISA.
Default
All Stations : 1234
Display
1. Press the [Transfer] button and [101].
2. Press a station number.(e.g.205)

[201] PASSCODE
PASSCODE:****
3. Press [Hold] to erase the passcode.
[205] PASSCODE
PASSCODE:****

[205] PASSCODE
PASSCODE:1234
Related Program
Program 100
Station Lock
Page 2-3
102 Call Forwarding (MCP/MCP2)

This program allows the user to set the station number to forward and where to
forward. Operator or engineer can set the call forward function separately for every
station. The call forward types for MCP and MCP2 are summarized below :
For MCP
0
FORWARD CANCEL
Call forwarding is cancelled.
FWD ALL
All calls are forwarded
BUSY
Call forward while busy
NO ANSWER
No answer forward
BUSY/NO ANSWER
Call forward while busy/ no answer forward
EXT
Call forward to outside
FWD DND
DND forward
CFU
All calls are forwarded to another networked system.
CFB
Call forward to another networked system while busy
CFNR
Call forward to another networked system while there is no

answer.
CFB/CFNR
Call forward to another networked system while busy or no

answer.
For MCP2
0
FORWARD CANCEL
Call forward is cancelled.
FWD ALL
All calls are forwarded
BUSY
Call forward while busy.
NO ANSWER
No answer call forward
BUSY/NO ANSWER
Call forward while busy/ no answer forward
FWD DND
DND forward
If BUSY/NO ANSWER is selected, a call will be forwarded to the assigned station

according to users choice under No. 2&3. Therefore, BUSY/NO ANSWER can be
assigned only when the station number is set under No. 2 & 3.
In MCP2, external numbers can be set as the number to be forwarded for all types of
call forwarding.
In Program 701 Service Level, if FORWARD is set OFF, the user cannot set a call
forward, but can cancel it.(The default is OFF
In Program 701 Service Level, the user can set a call forward to an outside number
only when both FORWARD and EXT FWD are set ON. If only FORWARD is
ON, the user can set a call forward to an station number.(The default is all OFF.)
Page 2-4
Default
All stations
0. [FORWARD CANCEL]
Display
[201] FORWARD
0:FORWARD CANCEL
2. Press an station number.(e.g.205)

[205] FORWARD
0:FORWARD CANCEL
3. To select the call forward type, press the digit number.

Or, press [Volume] to select a call forward type
4. Press the destination station or outside station.
(e.g.201)
Or, press [Volume] to select the destination station
(Or, select the C.O. line number or C.O. line group
number, press the [Right] soft button and then enter
the number. Finally, press the [Soft] button.)
5. Press [1](YES) or [0](NO).
Or, press [Volume] to select YES/NO.
After pressing the [Right] soft button, do
programming again for another station starting
from procedure No.2.
[205] FORWARD
1:FWD ALL:NONE
[205] FORWARD
1:FWD ALL:201
[205] FORWARD
CURENTLY SET:NO

Related Program
Program 301
Program 502
Program 701
Program 722
Program 723
Program 724

Change Station Time Variable
Service Level Table
Assign Station Button (MCP/MCP2)
Assign Phone Type Buttons (MCP/MCP2)
Change Dial Number (MCP/MCP2)
Page 2-5
103 Phone Answer Mode

This program allows the user to change the phone answer mode of digital phone or
add-on module(AOM).
The digital phone or add-on module will be assigned for one of the following answer
mode. Operator or engineer can assign all stations with different phone answer mode.
0
RING MODE
Ring with one of 8 ring tones. If a user picks up the

handset. Or, press the [Speaker] button, the phone
becomes the call state.
AUTO ANSWER MODE
After a short warning sound, the digital phones speaker

automatically opens up and becomes a call state.
If the user wants to forward C.O. line to the digital
phone, which is in auto answer mode, the auto answer
mode is set between the station to forward a call and
the station to receive a call. After the handset is placed
down and C.O. line is forwarded to the digital phone,
that phone keeps ringing until the user picks up the
handset or presses [Speaker] button.
VOICE ANNOUNCE
The digital phone does not ring, but after a short warning
sound, the speaker opens up to give a voice
announcement. The voice of yours will not be transmitted.
If the user picks up the handset or presses the [Speaker]
button, the phone becomes a call state.
The digital phone DS-12B does not have a microphone. If it is set to answer mode, the
voice announce mode starts. In order to answer a call, the user must use the handset.
Default
All stations : RING MODE
Page 2-6
Display
[201] ANS MODE

RING MODE
2. Press an station number(e.g.205).

Or, press either the [Message](DS-24SE) or
[ANS/RLS](DS-4028E) button to set all stations.
[205] ANS MODE

RING MODE
3. Press [0]-[2] to select answer mode.

Or, use [Volume] to select answer mode
and then press the [Right] soft button and do
programming again starting from No. 2 procedure.
[205] ANS MODE

VOICE ANNOUNCE
[ALL] ANS MODE

?

Related Program
Program 111
Ring Tone
Page 2-7
104 Change Station Name

This program allows the user to change the name of each station. The user can use
dial buttons to enter English characters.
If the user presses any dial number, the following characters corresponding to that dial
number will be displayed on LCD. If the user presses the same dial number second
time, the displayed character will be saved and the cursor will move to the next
character. If [A] is pressed, the capital letter mode and small letter mode will be
switched.
If the user presses the [Volume] button, the character will be saved and the cursor will
move one space forward or backward.
DS-4000 Series Phone/DS-5000 Series Phone

Dial
Dial
<
>
Space ?
1
2
If # is pressed, the following special characters will be displayed in order.

#, space, &, !, :, ?, ., ,, %, $, -, <, >, /, =, [, ], @, ^, (, ), _, +, {, }, |, ; , , ,
Default
N/A.
Programmable Button
A button : Selects capital letter or small letter
B button : Selects Korean or English
Page 2-8
Display
[201] STN NAME

[205] STN NAME
3. Enter the station name using the table in the left

and press the [Right] soft button to move to another
station. Do programming again starting from No. 2.
[205] STN NAME

SAM SMITH

Related Program
Program 404
C.O. line Name
Page 2-9
105 Speed Dial

This program allows the user to enter speed dials one by one. Each station has up to
50(00-49) buttons and can save up to the number assigned by Program 606 Speed
Dial Block. If a station does not have any speed dial block, the SPDBLK NOT
EXST message will appear and the user cannot enter any speed dial number.
The speed dial number will accept up to 24 characters and contain 0-9, *, and #.
The speed dial number can be assigned to C.O. line(group) also. When C.O. line
(group) is entered, its name will be automatically followed by - for separation.
OCC CODE is displayed when OCC CODE changes to (*) after sending any number
or inside number.
Default
All stations : N/A.
Programmable Button
B Button : Enters the C.O. line flash code F
C Button : Enters the pause code P
D Button : Enters the pulse / DTMF switch code C
E Button : Enters OCC code [,]
F Button : Saves input and moves to Program 106

Display
[201] SPEED DIAL
00:
[205] SPEED DIAL

00:
3. Enter the speed dial number(e.g.05).

[205]
Or, use [Volume] to select a speed dial
05:_
and press the [Right] soft button to move a cursor
Or, press the [Left] soft button to start again from No. 2
Page 2-10
SPEED DIAL
4. Enter the speed dial number and then press the

[Left] Soft button and start again from No. 3.
Or, press the [Right] soft button
and start again from No. 2.
[205] SPEED DIAL

05:9-P2153711
To erase the previous contents, press the [Hold] button.
5. Press F to move to Program 106 Speed Dial Name

Press [Transfer] to exit the program.
Related Program
Program 106
Program 606
Change Speed Dial Name

Assign Speed Dial Block
Page 2-11
106 Speed Dial Name

This program allows the user to enter each speed dial name(up to 11 characters).
This program can be used for selecting a certain speed dial number by searching the
corresponding speed dial name.
If a station does not have any speed dial assigned, the NO SPEED BLOCK message
will appear and the user cannot enter any speed dial name.
If the [F] button is pressed while selecting any speed dial number or entering any
speed dial name, the program will save input and move to Program 105 Speed Dial.
With dial buttons, the station name of English characters can be entered. If the user
presses any dial number, the following characters corresponding to that dial number
will be displayed on LCD. If the user presses the same dial number second time,
the displayed character will be saved and the cursor will move to the next character.
If [A] is pressed, the capital letter mode and small letter mode will be switched.
DS-4000 Series Phone/DS-5000 Series Phone

Dial
Dial
<
>
Space ?
1
2

#, space, &, !, :, ?, ., ,, %, $, -, <, >, /, =, [, ], @, ^, (, ), _, +, {, }, |, ; , , ,
Default
N/A.
Programmable Button
A Button : Selects capital letters or small letters
B Button : Selects Korean or English
Page 2-12
Display
[201] SPEED NAME

00:
2. Press an station number(e.g. 205).

Or, press the [Volume] button to select a station
[205] SPEED NAME

00:
[205]
3. Enter the speed dial number(e.g. 05).
05:_
Or, use [Volume] to select a speed dial
Or, press the [Left] soft button and start again from No. 2
4. Enter the speed dial number referring the table above

and then press the [Right] soft button and start
again from No. 2. Or, press the [Left] soft button
SPEED NAME
[205] SPEED NAME

05:SAM SMITH

Related Program
Program 105
Speed Dial
Page 2-13
107 Subscriber Button Extender (MCP/MCP2)

Each station can assign special function to the program button. This program allows
the user to give an extender to this special function button. The function buttons that
can have an extender are summarized below :
Function Buttons
Extenders
AB
Left/Absent(Station Number)
ACC
Account charging code(000~999)
BOOK
Booking function number(Stations Speed Dial Number : 00-49)
BOSS
Executive/Secretary Number(1-4)
CR
Call Recording(SVMi-8)
CS
Auto Call Distribution Group Standby(Auto Call Distribution Group)
DIR
Dial by name(1-3)
DP
Direct call pick-up(Station number or Station Group number)
DS
Direct station selection(Station number)
EP
Established call pick-up
FWRD
Forwarding Number(0-9, *)
GPIK
Call pick-up group number(01-99)
IG
Included or excluded station group(Station group number)
MMPG
Page Transfer Area Number(0-9, *)
MS
Sending a specific sound to the key destination.(MANUAL SIGNALING)
MW
Message waiting(Station number, station group number)
NIGHT
Nighttime group number(0-9, *)
PAGE
Paging zone number(0-9, *)
PARK
Call Park Number(0-9)
PMSG
Absent message number

<MCP> iDCS-M : 01-20, iDCS-L: 01-30 <MCP2> iDCS 500 : 01-20
RP
Ring Plan(1-6)
SG
Station Group Number

<MCP> iDCS-L : 500-549(5000-5049), iDCS-M : 500-529(5000-5029)
<MCP2> iDCS-L : 500-579(5000-5079), iDCS-M : 500-539(5000-5039)
Page 2-14
SP
Auto Call Distribution Statistics(Station Group Number)
SPD
SPD Speed Dial Number(00-49, 500-999)
VG
SVM-800 Voice Mailbox Group Message(Station Group)
VM
SVMi-8 Voice Mailbox Memo(Station, Station Group)
VT
Voice Mailbox Transfer(Station Group Number)
Default
Same as the default extender in Program 722 Station Button Programming.
Display

[205] EXT (MAST)

22:PAGE1
3. Press [Volume] to select MAST/AOM1-AOM4,

and press the [Right] soft button.
If the station from No. 2 is the button extender
or if it does not have a pair, this step is omitted.
[205] EXT (MAST)

01:CALL1
4. Enter the button number(e.g. 22).

Or, press the Programmable Button.
Or, use [Volume] to select a button
[205] EXT (MAST)

22:PAGE PAGE_
5. Enter the extender referring to the table above

If there is nothing to enter, press the
[Left] soft button and start again from No. 2.
[205] EXT (MAST)

01:CALL1
[201] EXT (MAST)
01:CALL1

Related Program
Program 209
Program 722
Program 723
Assign Station Pair for Add-on Module (MCP/MCP2)

Assign Station Button (MCP/MCP2)
Assign Phone Type Button (MCP/MCP2)
Page 2-15
108 Program Status of Station

This program displays the current program status of each station.
This program does not allow entering any contents but check the station status only.
0
PORT NO
Cabinet -Slot-Port Number
TYPE
Station Type
PICKUP GROUP
Call Pick-up Group Number
SGR
Station Group Number
BOSS-SECR
Executive/Secretary Status
PAGE
Paging Zone Number
COS 1, COS 2
Service Level of Ring Mode 1 & 2
COS 3, COS 4
COS 5, COS 6
TENANT GROUP
Tenant Number
Default
PORT NO
TYPE
PICKUP GROUP
SGR
BOSS-SECR
PAGE
COS 1~6
TENANT GROUP
: Follows the port location.

: Follows the connected phone.
: 01
: NONE(N/A)
: NONE(N/A)
: NONE(N/A)
: 01
:1
Display
[201] STN STATUS

PORT:C1-S3-P01

[205] STN STATUS

PORT:C1-S3-P01
3. Enter the number of program status type for

the phone([0]-[8]).
Or, press [Volume] to select the program
status type. Then press the [Right] soft button
Page 2-16
[205] STN STATUS

SGR:01

Related Program
Program 301
Program 302
Program 303
Program 601
Program 604

Call Pick-up Group
Executive/Secretary
Station Group (MCP/MCP2)
Internal Page (MCP/MCP2)
Page 2-17
109 Date/Time Display Format

This program allows the user to set the display format for date and time at the LCD
equipped phone.
0
COUNTRY : Oriental/Western Mode
0 = Oriental mo/dd Days of week Time(HH : MM)

1 = Western(Days of week, dd mo Time(HH : MM)
CLOCK : 12 hour/24 hour mode
0 = 12 CLOCK(12 hour mode)

1 = 24 CLOCK(24 hour mode)
DISPLAY : capital/small letter mode
0 = UPP CASE(capital letter mode)

1 = LOW CASE(small letter mode)
Default
COUNTRY : ORIENTAL(oriental mode)
CLOCK : 12 CLOCK(12 hour mode)
DISPLAY : LOW CASE(small letter mode)
Display
[201] DAY FORMAT

COUNTRY:ORIENTAL
2. Press a station number(e.g. 205).

Or, press the [Message](DS-24SE) or [ANS/RLS]
(DS-4028E) button to set all stations
[205] DAY FORMAT

COUNTRY:ORIENTAL
3. Enter the setting items number([0]-[2]).

Or, use [Volume] to select an item
[205] DAY FORMAT

CLOCK :12 CLOCK
4. Use [Volume] to select the type.

and press the [Right] soft button and start again
from No.2 for another station. Or, press the
[Left] soft button and start again from No.3.
[205] DAY FORMAT

CLOCK :24 CLOCK
[ALL] DAY FORMAT

COUNTRY: ORIENTAL

Related Program
Program 505
Page 2-18
System Date/Time
110 Subscriber Function On/Off (MCP/MCP2)

This program allows the user to set special functions to be used(1. ON) or not to be
used on each station(0. OFF).
In case the MCP board is installed in iDCS-M, the items below will not be supported.
07. CALL COST
08. AUTO CAMPON
11. DISP SPDNAME
12. CID REVW ALL
00
AUTO HOLD
01
AUTO TIMER
02
HEADSET USE
13. SECURE OHVA
If another C.O. line is selected while C.O. line is busy, that C.O. line
will be automatically put on hold.
When sending a call to C.O. line, the timer starts automatically after
a certain period of time.
This function selects either headset mode(ON) or handset mode
(OFF). If the headset mode is selected, the user has to press the
[Speaker] button to receive any incoming call.
03
HOT KEYPAD
Without picking up a handset or pressing the [Speaker] button,

the user can press a dial button in a pause state. Then, the phone
instantly starts operating. This is a hot keypad function.
04
KEY TONE
05
PAGE REJOIN
The phone makes key tone whenever the user presses a key.
If the station used for paging becomes a pause state, the station will
be automatically rejoined to hear other paging.
06
RING PREF
This is a ring preference service that if the handset is picked up

while ringing, the phone responses to the ring first. If OFF, the user
will hear a dial tone when picking up a handset. To response to the
ring, the user has to press the flash quickly.
07
CALL COST
This program sets to display the call cost on LCD, instead of the call
duration, when calling C.O. line.
08
AUTO CAMPON
If another C.O. line calls in while the station is calling C.O. line,
this function automatically makes that call camp on, instead of
giving a busy sound.(In case the MCP2 board is installed in
iDCS-M, this function is not supported. )
09
AME BGM
If this function is ON when AME starts, the caller may hear
10
AME PASSCODE
This function sets whether or not the passcode shall be entered to
11
DISP SPDNAME
If this function is ON when calling with a speed dial, the name of
12
CID REVW ALL
If the caller ID is received, it is saved at the buffer assigned from
background music, instead of voice mailbox message.

change the AME status.
speed dial will be displayed, instead of its number.
Program 608. If this function is ON, the buffer saves all calls and if
OFF, the buffer saves only not answered calls.
13
SECURE OHVA
If this function is ON while OHVA, the announcement is made

through the handset and if OFF, it is made through the speaker.
Page 2-19
14
NOT CONT.CID
In case the received C.O. line call has a caller ID, this function sets
whether to keep displaying the caller ID on LCD even after the call
is answered.
15
AUTO ANS CO
This function sets whether to answer C.O. line automatically if the

C.O. line calls in.
Default
AUTO HOLD
AUTO TIMER
HEADSET USE
HOT KEYPAD
KEY TONE
PAGE REJOIN
RING PREF
CALL COST
AUTO CAMPON
AME BGM
AME PASSCODE
DISP SPDNAME
CID REVW ALL
SECURE OHVA
NOT CONT.CID
AUTO ANS CO
: OFF
: ON
: OFF
: ON
: ON
: ON
: ON
: OFF
: OFF
: OFF
: OFF
: OFF
: ON
: ON
: ON
: OFF
Display
[201] STN ON/OFF

AUTO HOLD:OFF

Or, press [Message](DS-24SE) or [ANS/RLS]
(DS-4028E) to set all stations.
[205] STN ON/OFF

HOT KEYPAD:ON
3. Enter the function number([00]-[15]) (e.g. 03).

Or, use [Volume] to select a function
number and press the [Right] soft button
to move a cursor.
[205] STN ON/OFF

HOT KEYPAD:OFF
Page 2-20
[ALL] STN ON/OFF

AUTO HOLD:OFF
4. To use special functions (ON), press [1], or

press [0] if you dont want to use them(OFF).
Or, press [Volume] to select whether
to use special functions(ON) or not to use them
(OFF). Then, press the [Right] soft button
[205] STN ON/OFF

AUTO HOLD:OFF

Related Program
Program 301
Program 701

Service Level Table
Page 2-21
111 Ring Tone

This program allows the user to set the ring tone for each station.
There are 8 ring tones, and if each station has a different type of ring tone, the phones
that are adjacent to each other will be prevented from confusion by called rings.
Default
SELECTION : 5
Display
[201] RING TONE

SELECTION 5

Or, press the [Message] (DS-24SE) or [ANS/RLS]
(DS-4028E) button to set all stations.
[205] RING TONE

SELECTION 5
3. Enter the ring tone number([1]-[8]).

Or, use [Volume] to select a ring tone
and then press the [Right] soft button and
start again from No. 2 for another station.
[205] RING TONE

SELECTION 3
[ALL] RING TONE

SELECTION ?

Related Program
Program 114
Program 316
Page 2-22
Digital Phone Volume

Identifier Ring
112 Alarm Time

This program allows the user to set 3 alarm times for each station or change the
setting. The alarm time will be based on 24-hour mode. The user does not have to set
an alarm every hour. The following table shows alarm mode(0, 1, 2) that can be set
conveniently. Each station can be set to 3 alarm modes as shown below :
0
NOTSET
No alarm
TODAY
Alarm only once.
DAILY
Alarm daily at the set time
Default
Set Time : N/A.
Alarm Mode : NOTSET
Display
[201] ALM CLK(1)

HHMM: NOTSET

Or, use [Volume] to select a station
Or, press the [Message] button(DS-24SE) or
[ANS/RLS] (DS-4028E) button to set all stations.
[205] ALM CLK(1)

HHMM: NOTSET
3. Enter the alarm number([1]-[3]) (e.g. 2).

Or, use [Volume] to select an alarm number
and then press the [Right] soft button to move
a cursor. Or, press the [Left] soft button
[205] ALM CLK(2)

HHMM: NOTSET
4. Enter time with 24-hour mode.

(e.g. If it is 4 p.m., enter 1600)
[205] ALM CLK(2)

HHMM: 1600 NOTSET
5. Enter the alarm mode number([0]-[2]).

Or, press [Volume] to select an alarm mode
and then press the [Right] soft button and
start again from No. 2.
[205] ALM CLK(2)

HHMM: 1300 DAILY
Page 2-23

Related Program
Program 116
Page 2-24
Alarm Time/Message
113 Display/Modify Memo Contents

This program allows the user to view or modify the memo contents that are left while
each station was busy. The user can enter up to 13 characters in the memo. With dial
buttons, the station name of English characters can be entered. If the user presses any
dial number, the following characters corresponding to that dial number will be
displayed on LCD. If the user presses the same dial number second time, the displayed
character will be saved and the cursor will move to the next character. If [A] is pressed,
the capital letter mode and small letter mode will be switched.
DS-4000 Series Phone / DS-5000 Series Phone

Dial
Dial
<
>
Space ?
1
2

#, space, &, !, :, ?, ., ,, %, $, -, <, >, /, =, [, ], @, ^, (, ), _, +, {, }, |, ; , , ,
Default
N/A.
Page 2-25
Display
[201] VIEW MEMO

1:

and then press the [Right] soft button to
move a cursor.
[205] VIEW MEMO

1:SEC-027450084
3. Enter the memo number([1]-[2]) (e.g. 2).

Or, press [Volume] to select
an alarm number and then press the [Right] soft
button to move a cursor.
[205] VIEW MEMO

1:
4. Modify the memo contents following the table

above and press the [Right] soft button.
Then, start again from No. 2 for another station.
[205] VIEW MEMO

1:

Related Program
N/A.
Page 2-26
114 Volume of Digital Phone

This program allows the user to set volume for each digital phone.
0
RING VOLUME
Ring volume in a pause state(1-8)
OFF-RING VOL
Ring volume while the handset is picked up(1-8)
HANDSET VOL
Handset volume(1-8)
SPEAKER VOL
Speaker volume(1-16)
BGM VOLUME
Background music volume(1-16)
PAGE VOLUME
Page volume that can be heard through a speaker(1-16)
Default
RING VOLUME
OFF-RING VOL
HANDSET VOL
SPEAKER VOL
BGM VOLUME
PAGE VOLUME
:4
:4
:4
: 13
: 13
: 13
Display
[201] STN VOLUME

RING VOLUME 4

and then press the [Right] soft button
to move a cursor.
[ANS/RSL] button(DS-4028E) to set all stations.
[205] STN VOLUME

RING VOLUME 4
3. Enter the volume type number([0]-[5]).

a volume type and then press the [Right]
soft button to move a cursor.
4. Enter the volume number([1]-[8] or [01]-[16]).
Or, use [Volume] to select a volume
Then, start again from No. 2.
[ALL] STN VOLUME

RING VOLUME 4
[205] STN VOLUME

RING VOLUME 4
[205] STN VOLUME

RING VOLUME 8
Page 2-27

Related Program
Program 111
Page 2-28
Ring Tone
115 Absent Message (MCP/MCP2)

This program allows the user to select one of the absent messages saved in Program
715 Enter Absent Message whenever he/she would leave the seat.
The MCP board-installed iDCS-M has 20 messages([01]-[20]) while iDCS-L has 30
messages([01]-[30]). For the MCP2 board-installed system, the last 5 messages
([16]-[20]) from 20 can be assigned differently by each station.
When an absent message is selected, this message will be displayed on LCD in a
pause state. When another station calls in, the absent message will be displayed on
that phone so the other party can find out your station is absent, along with the reason.
When Program 701 Service Level does not allow setting absent messages, the user cannot
set any absent message but can cancel it. The default is not to set absent messages.
Default
00. (CANCEL PGM MSG) : Cancel Absent Message Setting
Display
[201] PGMMSG(00)
CANCEL PGM MSG

Or, press the [Message] button to set all stations.
[205] PGMMSG(00)
CANCEL PGM MSG
3. Enter the absent message number([01]-[30]) (e.g. 01).

Or, use [Volume] to select a message
Then, start again from No. 2.
(In case the absent message is [16]-[20]
when the MCP2 board is used,
this program allows the user to enter
a different absent message for each station.)
[205] PGMMSG(01)
GIVE ME THE CALL
[ALL] PGMMSG(??)
CANCEL PGM MSG

Related Program
Program 715
Enter Absent Message (MCP/MCP2)
Page 2-29
116 Alarm Time/Message

This program sets/changes 3 alarm times and messages(up to 16 characters) for each
station.
This function can be used only on the digital phone where LCD display is on. When
the set time arrives, the alarm rings and the message will be displayed on LCD,
so the user can check his/her schedule.
The alarm time is entered in 24-hour mode. The user does not have to enter it every
time, but can use the following alarm setting methods(1, 2, 3).
Each station can be set for an alarm in the following 3 methods :
1
NOTSET
No alarm is set.
TODAY
Alarm once in every 24 hours.
DAILY
Alarm daily at the set time.
The user can enter the alarm message of up to 16 characters following the description
below :
With dial buttons, the station name of English characters can be entered. If the user
presses any dial number, the following characters corresponding to that dial number
will be displayed on LCD. If the user presses the same dial number second time,
the displayed character will be saved and the cursor will move to the next character.
If [A] is pressed, the capital letter mode and small letter mode will be switched.
Default
Set Time
: N/A.
Alarm Mode : NOTSET
Message : N/A.
Programmable Button
A Button : Selects either capital letters or small letters
B Button : Selects either Korean or English
Page 2-30
Display
[201] ALM REM(1)

HHMM: NOTSET

[ANS/RLS] button(DS-4028E) to set all stations.
[205] ALM REM(1)

HHMM: NOTSET
[ALL] ALM REM(1)

HHMM: NOTSET
3. Enter the alarm number([1]-[3]) (e.g. 2).

Or, use [Volume] to select an alarm number
and press the [Right] soft button to move a cursor
Or, press the [Left] soft button
and then start again No. 2.
[205] ALM REM(2)

HHMM: NOTSET
4. Enter time in 24-hour mode.

(e.g. If it is 4 p.m., enter 1600)
[205] ALM REM(2)

HHMM:1600 NOTSET
5. Press [Volume] to select an alarm mode

number([1]-[3]) and press the [Right] soft button
to move a cursor.
[205] ALM REM(2)
6. Enter the message using the table above.

Press the [Right] soft button
and then start again from No. 2.
[205] ALM REM(2)

HHMM:1600 DAILY

Related Program
Program 112
Alarm Time
Page 2-31
117 Emergency Text Message (For MCP2)

This program allows the user to modify/enter an emergency text message.
Only the station set to use the text message in Program 611 can set and use an
emergency text message. One station can use up to 10 emergency text messages.
With dial buttons, the emergency message of English characters can be entered.
switched.

Dial
Dial
<
>
Space ?
1
2

#, space, &, !, :, ?, ., ,, %, $, -, <, >, /, =, [, ], @, ^, (, ), _, +, {, }, |, ; , , ,
Default
Blank Message
Page 2-32
Display
[201] TXTMSG (01)

Blank Message

[205] TXTMSG (01)

Blank Message
3. Press the message number([01]~[10]). (e.g. 03)

a message number and press the [Right]
[205] TXTMSG (03)

Blank Message
4. Enter a message using the table above.

Press the [Right] soft button to save data.
[205] TXTMSG (03)

GIVE ME THE CALL

Related Program
Program 611
Text Message Station (MCP2)
Page 2-33
118 Conference Group (For MCP2)

This program sets a conference group. Only the station that is set to use a conference
group in Program 612 can set and use the conference group. One station can set up to
5 conference groups. The maximum number of members for one conference group
will be 4, excluding the station itself.
When the user calls the preset conference group using the GCONF button, the dial
tone is heard until a member of the conference group answers the call. The member
who answers the call is automatically entered into the conference mode. Since the
caller cannot verify whether the recipient has answered the call when the call is made
through the common analog C.O. line, the call is considered ansewered and entered
into the conference mode when the SMDR START TIME is elapsed. And since the
user cannot verify if the call is disconnected when calling through the common C.O.
line, the host of the conference shall remove the member from the conference
manually.
With dial buttons, the conference group name of English characters can be entered.
switched.

Dial
Dial
<
>
Space ?
1
2

#, space, &, !, :, ?, ., ,, %, $, -, <, >, /, =, [, ], @, ^, (, ), _, +, {, }, |, ; , , ,
Page 2-34
Default
N/A

to move a cursor.
3. Press the conference group number([1]~[5]). (e.g. 2)
Or, press [Volume] to select a group number
4. Press [0] to select a conference group name
Or, press [1]~[4] to enter the number of
conference group member.
the desired sub menu and press the [Right]
Soft button to move a cursor.
Display
[201] GRP(1)NAME
[205] GRP(1)NAME
[205] GRP(2)NAME
[205] GRP(2)NAME
_
5. Enter a conference group name.

Press the [Right] soft button to save data.
[205] GRP(2)NAME
A CONF GRP
6. Enter the number of conference group member

and press the [Right] soft button to save data.
[205] GRP(2)MBR2
9-2134455

Related Program
Program 612
Conference Call Station (MCP2)
Page 2-35
119 Assign Caller ID Display Method

This program sets the caller ID of the station that the user wants to show. When a call
is received on the R2MFC, CID or ISDN C.O. lines, this caller ID of the station will
be displayed. That is, this program sets not to display the caller ID(0) or to display
the called number(1) or to display the called name(2).
0
NO DISPLAY
No callers information is displayed
NUMBER FIRST
Displays the called number
NAME FIRST
Displays the called name
Default
NUMBER FIRST
Display
[201] CID DISP

NUMBER FIRST
2. Enter an station number(e.g. 205).

and press [Right] soft button to move a cursor.
Or, press the [Message] button
to set all stations.
[205] CID DISP

NUMBER FIRST
3. Enter the setting item number([0]-[2]).

Or, use [Volume] to select an item
[ALL] CID DISP

?
[205] CID DISP

NAME FIRST

Page 2-36
Related Program
Program 312
Program 402
Program 415
Program 423
Program 425
Program 428
Program 429
Program 501
Program 608
Program 701
Program 722
Program 723
Program 724
Program 725
Program 728
Display Caller ID
Dialing Type of C.O. line
Log Abandoned Call Information
S/T Mode of BRI
ISDN Card Reset
BRI Option
MSN Receiving
Change System Time Variables (MCP/MCP2)
Assign Caller ID Log Block (MCP/MCP2)
Service Level Table
Station Button Programming (MCP/MCP2)
Phone Type Button Programming (MCP/MCP2)
Call Information Display Option (MCP/MCP2)
Enter Caller ID Conversion Table (MCP/MCP2)
Page 2-37
120 Large LCD Option (For MCP2)

This program sets an option needed for a phone having a large LCD.
0
IDLE DISPLAY
DS KEY DISPLAY
DIAL MODE
Sets whether to display CALENDAR or INFORMATION on LCD

in an idle state.
Sets whether to display phone number or station name for DS
key on LCD.
Sets dial mode of phone.(ENBLOCK/OVERLAB)
Default
0. IDLE DISPLAY : CALENDER
1. DS KEY DISPLAY : TEL NUMBER
2. DIAL MODE : ENBLOCK

to move a cursor.
Display
[201] IDLE DISP
CALENDER
[205] IDLE DISP
CALENDER
3. Press [0]~[2] to select the desired item.

Or, use [Volume] to select
the desired item and press the [Right]
[205] IDLE DISP

CALENDER
4. Select the desired option.

the desired option and press the [Right]
[205] IDLE DISP

INFORMATION

Related Program
Program 719
Page 2-38
Screen Guide Data (MCP2)
121 Digital Phone Language

This program sets the language that will be displayed on LCD of the digital phone.
00.
01.
02.
03.
04.
05.
06.
07.
08.
09.
10.
11.
ENGLISH
GERMAN
PORTUGAL
NORSK
DANISH
DUTCH
ITALY
SPANISH
SWEDISH
SPANISH/USA
FRENCH/CANADA
KOREAN
(only for DS-4028E, DS-4018E, DS-5038D, DS-5021D, and DS-5014D)
As soon as the programming language is changed, LCD will display the changed
language.
In case the subscriber level programming is to be carried out on the phone that can
display Korean letters, only the program title will be displayed in Korean and the rest will
be English even if KOREAN is selected.
Default
Phone that can display Korean letters : KOREAN
Phone that cannot display Korean letters : ENGLISH
Display
[201] LANGUAGE
ENGLISH
2. Enter a station number.

to move a cursor.
Or, press the [Message] button(DS-24SE)
or [ANS/RLS] button(DS-4028E)
[205] LANGUAGE
ENGLISH
[ALL] LANGUAGE
?
Page 2-39
3. Enter the language number([0]-[9]).

Or, press [Volume] to select a language
[8602]REGISTERED
NO

Related Program
N/A.
Page 2-40
122 SPOT Information Display Speed

Related with the spot view function, this program sets the information display speed
to be displayed on LCD.
CALL SPEED : Sets the information display speed to be displayed on LCD when
using the SPOT CALL PLUS function.
Default
CALL SPEED : 03
Display
[201] CALL SPEED

03
2. Enter a station number.

to move a cursor.
[ANS/RLS] button (DS-4028E)
[205] CALL SPEED

03 _
3. Set the call speed ([03]-[10]).
[205] CALL SPEED

03 04
[ALL] CALL SPEED

03 _

Related Program
N/A.
Page 2-41
125 Executive Present State (For MCP2)

When inter-working with EASYSET, the state of executive station can be displayed.
This program sets the present state of executive that the user wants to show. Also, this
program allows the executive/secretary function so the user can set the answer mode
for when an executive calls up.
With dial buttons, the executive present state can be entered in English characters.
switched.

Dial
Dial
<
>
Space ?
1
2

#, space, &, !, :, ?, ., ,, %, $, -, <, >, /, =, [, ], @, ^, (, ), _, +, {, }, |, ; , , ,
Default
N/A
Page 2-42

to move a cursor.
Display
[201] EXEC STATE
IN THE ROOM
[205] EXEC STATE

IN THE ROOM
3. Press [0]~[3] to select the desired sub menu.

the desired sub menu and press the [Right]
[205] EXEC STATE

IN THE ROOM
4. Select the desired executive state from [0]~[9].

the desired executive state and press the [Right]
[205] EXEC STATE

IN A MEETING
5. If there is more information to show,

enter the contents in STATE (IN) and STATE
(OUT) and press the [Right] soft button
to move a cursor.
[205] STATE(IN)
WEEKLY MEETING
6. If the executives answer mode is wanted,

set the desired answer mode at ANS MODE.
[205] ANS MODE

AUTO ANSWER MODE

Related Program
N/A.
Page 2-43
200 Operator Program Mode

This program allows the user to set the system as either the disabled operator
programming mode or disabled operator programming mode. If the operator tries to
program the system under the disabled operator programming mode, the NOT
PERMIT message will appear.
0
DISABLE
Disabled Operator Programming Mode
ENABLE
Enabled Operator Programming Mode
In order to start programming, the user must enter 4 digits, which should be between
[0]-[9], as the passcode. The default passcode is 1234.
Under the enabled operator programming mode, the operator can program every
program set within Program 802 Operator Program Range.
Default
DISABLE
Display

ENABLE CUS.PROG.
PASSCODE:_
2. Enter the passcode of operator system program.

If the passcode is not valid,
the PASSCODE ERROR message appears.
3. Press [1] for programming enabled mode
(ENABLE) and press [0] for programming
disabled mode(DISABLE).
Or, use [Volume] to select either the programmable
mode(ENABLE) or programmable disabled mode
(DISABLE). Then, press the [Right] soft button.
ENABLE CUS.PROG.
DISABLE
ENABLE CUS.PROG.
ENABLE
4. Press [Speaker] to move to another mode

where the user can select another program.
Use [Volume] to select a program
and then press [Speaker] again
to execute the program.
Or, press [Speaker] and then enter the number
to execute the program right away.
5. Press [Transfer] to exit the program mode.
Page 2-44
Related Program
Program 201
Program 501
Program 802
Change Operator Program Passcode

Change System Time Variables (MCP/MCP2)
Operator Program Scope
Page 2-45
201 Change Operator Program Passcode

This program changes the passcode for setting operator program mode in Program 200.
This passcode is 4 digits and contains digits between [0]-[9]. To do this program, the
user must know the current passcode.
Default
1234
Display
CUST. PASSCODE
NEW CODE:_
2. Enter new passcode of 4 digits.
CUST. PASSCODE
VERIFY:
3. Reenter new passcode of these 4 digits.

If two entered passcodes are different
from each other, the FAILURE message appears
for about 2 seconds. Then, execute from No. 2 again.
CUST. PASSCODE
VERIFY:SUCCESS

Related Program
Program 200
Page 2-46
Operator Program Mode
202 Change Function Passcode (MCP/MCP2)

There are some functions that require special passcode. This program allows the user
to change passcode for this purpose. The functions that require specific passcodes are
summarized below :
For MCP
0
RING PLAN
Changes mode
DISA ALARM
Clears DISA alarm
ALARM CLR
Clears an alarm
AA RECORD
Records the built-in auto attendant.
For MCP2
0
RING PLAN
Changes mode
DISA ALARM
Clears DISA alarm
ALARM CLR
Clears an alarm
AA RECORD
Records the built-in auto attendant.
DELETE
Passcode used for deleting hotel billing.
WLI REGIST
Passcode used for registering wireless phone.
This passcode is 4 digits and contains digits between [0]-[9]. To do this program, the
user must know the current passcode.
Default
RING PLAN
DISA ALARM
ALARM CLR
AA RECORD
DELETE
WLI REGIST
: 0000
: 5678
: 8765
: 4321
: 9999
: 0000
Page 2-47
Display
CHANGE PASSCODE
RING PLAN:0000
2. Enter the type number of function passcode([0]-[6]).

Or, use [Volume] to select a function
passcode and press the [Right] soft button
to move a cursor.
CHANGE PASSCODE
DISA ALARM:5678
3. Enter new passcode of 4 digits.

Press the [Right] soft button and
start again from No.2.
CHANGE PASSCODE
DISA ALARM:9999

Related Program
Program 214
Program 410
Program 507
Page 2-48
DISA Alarm Destination

DISA Service of C.O. line
Change Ring Mode Time for Auto Conversion
203 Assign Nighttime Ring

This program allows the user to set the subscriber whose station will receive a ring in
specific condition like nighttime mode.
If the user presses the UA code of Program 724 while the subscribers station set in
this program is ringing, the user can respond to this incoming ring right away.
This function provides a convenient use.
As described below, the user can set the station, as well as station group, common
bell, and external page speaker.
NONE-NO UA
No phone number
STATION
Station number
STN GROUP
Station group
RING PAGE
External speaker
COMMON BELL
Common Bell
Default
NONE-NO UA
Display
ASSIGN UA PORT
NONE-NO UA
2. Enter the phone number to receive a

nighttime ring(e.g. 205).
Or, use [Volume] to select a receivable
number and then press the [Right] soft button
and start from No. 2 again.
ASSIGN UA PORT
205 -STATION
3. Press [Transfer] to exit the program

Related Program
Program 204
Program 601
Program 605
Common Bell Control Method

External Page
Page 2-49
204 Common Bell Control

This program allows the user to set the common bell to be either continuous
(0. CONTINUOUS) or interrupted(1. INTERRUPTED).
The common bell shall be set to the station group when it is not used as the nighttime
ring. That is, only when the common bell, not as the nighttime ring, is set to the
station group, the station will operate like other station members under the same
condition.
Default
CONTINUOUS
Display
[3801] COM. BELL

CONTINUOUS
2. Enter the common bell phone number(e.g. 362).

Or, press the [Right] soft button
to move a cursor.
[3802] COM. BELL

CONTINUOUS
3. To set a continuous ring, press [0], and

press [1] to set an interrupted ring
either a continuous or interrupted ring.
Press the [Right] soft button to move a cursor.
[3802] COM. BELL

INTERRUPTED

Related Program
Program 203
Program 601
Page 2-50
Nighttime Ring Destination

205 Assign Pair Station of Loud Bell

This program assigns stations that pair up with each loud bell. The loud ring shall be
paired up with a station. So, the loud bell can ring together whenever the pair station
rings.
The station group in place of a station cannot be assigned for a loud bell.
Default
N/A.
Display
[3901] LOUD BELL

RING PAIR:NONS
2. Enter the phone number of loud bell(e.g. 362).

Or, use [Volume] to select a loud
bell phone number and press the [Right]
[3902] LOUD BELL

RING PAIR:NONS
3. Enter the phone number of pair station(e.g. 201).

Or, use [Volume] to select a station.
[3902] LOUD BELL

RING PAIR:201

Related Program
N/A.
Page 2-51
206 Assign Barge-in Type

This program sets the type of barge-in while busy.
0
NO BARGE-IN
No barge-in is allowed while busy.
WITH TONE
Gives a warning tone to the barged-in-on subscriber before
WITHOUT TONE
barging in.
Does not give a warning tone to the barged-in-on subscriber
before barging in.
Default
NO BARGE IN
Display
BARGE IN TYPE
NO BARGE IN
2. Enter the barge-in type number([0]-[2]).

Or, use [Volume] to select a barge-in type
BARGE IN TYPE
WITH TONE

Related Program
Program 301
Program 701
Page 2-52

Service Level Table
207 Voice Mailbox/Auto Attendant Port

This program allows the user to use a normal phone port as either a voice mailbox/
auto attendant port(1. VMAA PORT) or a normal phone port(0. NORMAL PORT).
The normal phone port can link to other normal phones, voice mailbox/auto attendant
device, etc. The connecting terminal type should be set in order to provide an
appropriate service.
Default
NORMAL PORT
Display
[207] VMAA PORT

NORMAL PORT
2. Enter a station number of general phone(e.g. 209).

[ANS/RLS] button(DS-4028E)
to set all stations of general phone.
[209] VMAA PORT

NORMAL PORT
3. Enter [1] or [0](1=VMAA, 0=NORMAL).

Or, press [Volume]
to select a port type
[209] VMAA PORT

VMAA PORT
[ALL] VMAA PORT

?

Related Program
Program 726
Voice Mailbox/Auto Attendant Option
Page 2-53
208 Assign Ring Type for General Phone Port

This program assigns the ring type for each port of general phone.
0
ICM RING
General station ring(0.4 sec ring/0.2 sec off/2 sec ring/3 sec off )
CO RING
General C.O. line ring(1 sec ring/2 sec off)
DATA RING
Same as the C.O. line ring(1 sec ring/2 sec off), but the off-hook ring
is not available.
Default
ICM RING
Display
[208] RING TYPE

ICM RING
2. Enter a station number of general phone(e.g. 209).

Or, press [Volume] to select a station and press
the [Right] soft button to move a cursor.
to set a station for all general phones.
[209] RING TYPE

ICM RING
3. Enter a ring type number([0]-[2]).

Or, use [Volume] to select a ring type
[ALL] RING TYPE

?
[209] RING TYPE

DATA RING

Related Program
N/A.
Page 2-54
209 Assign Add-On Module (MCP/MCP2)

This program assigns the master station for each add-on module(AOM).
The MCP board-installed iDCS-M can assign one digital phone to a maximum of 2
AOMs while the MCP board-installed iDCS-L, as well as the MCP2 board-installed
iDCS-L, can assign up to 4 AOMs as a pair. AOM cannot be assigned as a master
station, and if there is no AOM within Tenant, the AOM NOT EXIST message will
appear.
If the first AOM is assigned to the master station, the user should use AOM to set
whether to utilize the off-hook paging function. This is not relevant to DS-24SE AOM.
0
OHVAED OFF
Does not announce OHVAED to corresponding AOM.
OHVAED ON
Announces OHCAED to corresponding AOM.
Default
MASTER : NONE(N/A)
OHVAED : OFF
(The first add-on module number appears.)
2. Enter the phone number of an add-on module
(e.g. 301). Or, use [Volume] to select an add-on
module number and press the [Right] soft button
to move a cursor.
3. Enter a station number for the AOM master(e.g. 201).
Or, use [Volume] to select a station number for
the AOM master and press the [Right] soft button.
4. To turn OHVAED on, press [1], and press [0]
to turn OHVAED off.
Or, use [Volume] to select OHVAED
Display
[301] AOM MASTER
MASTER : NONE
[301] AOM MASTER

MASTER : NONE
[301] AOM MASTER

OHVAED:OFF
[301] AOM MASTER

MASTER:201
Page 2-55

Related Program
N/A.
Page 2-56
210 System On/Off (MCP/MCP2)

This program separately describes how to use the system installed with either MCP
or MCP2 board.
For MCP
This program sets the MCP system on(1. ON) or off(0. OFF) to use each function.
- The items below will be supported only for the MCP board-installed iDCS-L.
27. SVM/ALM SMDR
37. BEGN DGT DSP
38. ONE TCH FACC
40. CHAIN FWD
- The items below will be supported only for the MCP board-installed iDCS-M.
07. DSP SPDNAME
00
DISA PSWD
Sets the station to enter the password in order to answer the DISA
C.O. line call.
01
LCR ENABLE
03
PERI UCD RPT
Enables the LCR selection function.

Sets to periodically display statistics data of auto call distribution
group.
04
CID CODE INS
Sets to automatically save the country code in addition to the
05
DISA MOH
Sends the hold tone instead of ringing tone when the station
06
TRANSFER MOH
07
DSP SPDNAME
received caller ID.

answers the DISA C.O. line call.
Sets to send the hold tone instead of ringing tone when transferring
a call.
Sets to display the station name instead of number when dialing a
common speed dial number.
08
DID BSY ROUT
When the DID connected station is busy, this function sets whether
to re-route to the C.O. line receiving station.
09
ALARM MOH
Sets whether to release MOH when answering an alarm.
11
CALL PICK UP
Sets the call pick up function not concerning the call pick up group.
13
RECALL PIKUP
Sets the recalled ring to be picked up from another station. If the

recalling ring is rerouted to the attendant consol, that recall can be
picked up anyhow.
14
ICM EXT FWD
Call forward external is allowed when intercom calls are placed to

a station. When OFF, only the C.O. line call is forwarded outside,
and when ON, an intercom call is also forwarded outside.
15
SEC 2 BOS AA
Sets an auto answer when the secretary calls the boss. When ON,
the call from the boss is auto answered, and when OFF, the call
Page 2-57
will be ringing.
Page 2-58
16
DID ERR TONE
When an invalid DID number is received, this function sets whether

to provide an error tone or to forward to the attendant console.
When ON, error tone is provided, and when OFF, the call will be
rerouted to the attendant console following DID BSY ROUT or the
station set by Program 406.
17
TRKGRP 2 MBR
Sets whether to expand the members up to 198 as iDCS-L pairs

two members from 43~50th C.O. line Groups(the first 841~848),
and iDCS-M pairs two members from 23-30th C.O. line Groups
(the first 821-828 ). When ON, the odd number group automatically
picks up the member of even number group.
18
KTS DISC ALM
Generates a system alarm to I/O port of the system when

DLI-connected digital phone plugs out or in.
19
OFF HOOK ALM
20
SL SELF RING
Generates an alarm when the handset maintains off hook condition

more than the set time.
Sets whether to ring if a single line phone dials its own number and
hangs up. When ON, generates ring for 10 seconds.
21
SGR INC BUSY
Sets whether to generate a ringing tone or to keep a busy tone if all

station group members are busy when a call is received from C.O.
line(to the station group). In case of general C.O. line, the system
answers first and then generates a busy tone, so the user should
be careful on toll.
22
119 ANI/ALI
Optional for the fire department to interoperate with the caller

positioning system. It works only when this function is ON.
Please call the sales department of our company to ask for more
information about this service.
24
TRSF CANCEL
When a single line phone without LCD transfers the second call,
pressing the hook switch will toggle between the original call and the
second call.
This option is programmed not to use this switching call function.
When ON, pressing the hook switch will disconnect the second call
and reconnect the original call.
25
SLT RCL RING
This option is used to generate no-answer announcement when a

single line phone, which is connected to the voice mailbox or auto
attendant, reroutes the forwarded call to the external device because
the call is not answered. A different ring tone than other general ring
can be generated. Please call our sales department to ask for more
information.
26
RECALL DISC
If the transferred call is not answered more than the set time,
the system disconnects the call. Because this disconnects the call
without giving any notice to the counter party, we recommend not
using this function.
Page 2-59
27
SVM ALM/SMDR
This option allows the system to inter-work with the call statistics
system, which provides statistics from using multi SVM-800s for
the auto trunk function and with trunk calls. It works only when this
option is ON. Please call our sales department for more information.
28
SMDR TRK STS
system, which provides trunk call statistics data by using SMDR
data. It works only when this option is ON.
Please call our sales department for more information.
29
ARD TONE CHK
Sets whether to use time or busy tone to check if the destination

station is busy when auto redialing.
31
IN TOLL CHK
Sets the system not to restrict toll for an incoming call to the C.O. line.
32
ISDN PROGCON
Sets whether to progress the ISDN PROGRESS message.
34
LCR DIALTONE
This option connects a stations dial tone with another dial tone
when using LCR function. When ON, the continuous tone like C.O.
lines dial tone will be connected.
36
DSS KEY DPU
When ON, the DS key flashes whenever the DS key-assigned

station receives a call. Pressing the ringing DS key can pick up a
call(call pick-up).
37
BEGN DGT DSP
When using a redial or speed dial, this option sets whether to display
38
ONE TCH FACC
Sets whether the user can use one touch account code key or not
the number(if more than 12 digits) from the first set.

in forced account mode.
(The MCP board-installed iDCS-M does not support this option)
39
SGR ALL OUT
Sets to exclude all members of the station group temporarily.
40
CHAIN FWD
Sets the station to send whether the first forwarded call or the last
forwarded call to the voice mailbox.
41
TRK MONITER
When using the monitor-in function while C.O. line is busy, this
option sets whether to disconnect right after the original caller hangs
up or to connect the listening-in station.
42
VOIP MFRALOC
Sets whether to assign the DTMF receiver in order to detect DTMT

signal coming from the connected C.O. line when VOIP connected
C.O. line directly tries to send a call.
43
NTWK AUTOTMR
When OFF, a call duration timer is disabled via networking

intercom call. - Available in Networking enabled only .
45
NO STAFF COD
Sets whether to omit the verifying step for the staff code input when
hotel related key is pressed.(Available in HOTEL operation only.)
46
PERI UCD SIO
Sets whether to send the PERI UCD data to the UCD port type of
SIO port service types, instead of the PERI UCD port type.
Page 2-60
47
AUTO CLEANED
Sets to send the NEED CLEAN state or AVAILABLE state

message when someone is checking out the guest room
(Available in HOTEL operation only.)
48
REDIAL REVW
When the [LNR] key is pressed, this option sets whether to redial
right away or to show the called number first and decide later to
redial.
49
TEMP RB TONE
When dialing the R2 C.O. line, the ring back tone is sometimes
delayed from network. This option provides a virtual ring back tone
temporarily in order to help the caller to know that the call is being
progressed.
50
BUSY FWD GRP
When the called station is busy, this option sets the called station
to forward a call to the first normal station group member.
Default
DISA PAWD
LCR ENABLE
PERI UCD RPT
CID CODE INS
DISA MOH
TRANSFER MOH
DID BSY ROUT
ALARM MOH
ALL PICK UP
RECALL PIKUP
ICM EXT FWD
SEC 2 BOS AA
DID ERR TONE
TRKGRP 2 MBR
KTS DISC ALM
OFF HOOK ALM
SL SELF RING
SGR INC BUSY
119 ANI/ALI
TRSF CANCEL
SLT RCL RING
RECALL DISC
: OFF
: OFF
: OFF
: OFF
: OFF
: OFF
: OFF
: OFF
: OFF
: ON
: ON
: OFF
: ON
: OFF
: OFF
: OFF
: OFF
: ON
: OFF
: OFF
: OFF
: OFF
SVM ALM/SMDR
SMDR TRK STS
ARD TONE CHK
IN TOLL CHK
ISDN PROGCON
LCR DIALTONE
DSS KEY DPU
BEGN DGT DSP
ONE TCH FACC
SGR ALL OUT
CHAIN FWD
TRK MONITER
VOIP MFRALOC
NTWK AUTOTMR
NO STAFF COD
PERI UCD SIO
AUTO CLEANED
REDIAL REVW
TEMP RB TONE
BUSY FWD GRP
: OFF
: OFF
: ON
: ON
: OFF
: OFF
: OFF
: OFF
: OFF
: OFF
: ON
: OFF
: OFF
: ON
: OFF
: OFF
: OFF
: OFF
: OFF
: OFF
Page 2-61
Display
TEN. ON AND OFF

DISA PSWD :OFF
2. Enter the function number([00]-[50]).

Or, press [Volume] to select a function
number and press the [Right] soft button
to move a cursor.
TEN. ON AND OFF

DISA PSWD :OFF
3. To use the special function(ON), press [1], and

press [0] to not to use the function(OFF).
Or, use [Volume] to set to use
the special function(ON) or not(OFF).
TEN. ON AND OFF

DISA PSWD :OFF
TEN. ON AND OFF

LCR ENABLE :ON

Related Program
N/A.
Page 2-62
For MCP2
This program sets the MCP2 system on (1. ON) or off (0. OFF) to use each function.
52. CHK SPV TRK will be supported only for the MCP2 system.
00
DISA PSWD
Sets the station to enter the password in order to answer the DISA
C.O. line call.
01
LCR ENABLE
Enables the LCR selection function.
03
PERI UCD RPT
Sets to periodically display statistics data of auto call distribution

group.
04
CID CODE INS
Sets to automatically save the country code in addition to the

received caller ID.
05
DISA MOH
Sends the hold tone instead of ringing tone when the station
answers the DISA C.O. line call.
06
TRANSFER MOH
07
DSP SPDNAME
Sets to send the hold tone instead of ringing tone when transferring
a call.
Sets to display the station name instead of number when dialing a
common speed dial number.
08
DID BSY ROUT
When the DID connected station is busy, this function sets whether
to re-route to the C.O. line receiving station.
09
ALARM MOH
Sets whether to release MOH when answering an alarm.
11
ALL PICK UP
Sets the call pick up function not concerning the call pick up group.
13
RECALL PIKUP
Sets the recalled ring to be picked up from another station. If the

recalling ring is rerouted to the attendant consol, that recall can be
picked up anyhow.
14
ICM EXT FWD
Call forward external is allowed when intercom calls are placed to

a station. When OFF, only the C.O. line call is forwarded outside,
and when ON, an intercom call is also forwarded outside.
15
SEC 2 BOS AA
Sets an auto answer when the secretary calls the boss. When ON,
the call from the boss is auto answered, and when OFF, the call
will be ringing.
16
DID ERR TONE
When an invalid DID number is received, this function sets whether

to provide an error tone or to forward to the attendant console.
When ON, error tone is provided, and when OFF, the call will be
rerouted to the attendant console following DID BSY ROUT or the
station set by Program406.
Page 2-63
17
TRKGRP 2 MBR
Sets whether to expand the members up to 198 as iDCS-L pairs

two members from 43~50th C.O. line Groups(the first 841~848),
and iDCS-M pairs two members from 23-30th C.O. line Groups
(the first 821-828). When ON, the odd number group
automatically picks up the member of even number group.
18
KTS DISC ALM
Generates a system alarm to I/O port of the system when

DLI-connected digital phone plugs out or in.
19
OFF HOOK ALM
Generates an alarm when the handset maintains off hook condition

more than the set time.
20
SL SELF RING
Sets whether to ring if a single line phone dials its own number and
hangs up. When ON, generates ring for 10 seconds.
21
SGR INC BUSY
Sets whether to generate a ringing tone or to keep a busy tone if

all station group members are busy when a call is received from
C.O. line(to the station group). In case of general C.O. line,
the system answers first and then generates a busy tone, so the
user should be careful on toll.
22
119 ANI/ALI
Optional for the fire department to interoperate with the caller

positioning system. It works only when this function is ON.
Please call the sales department of our company to ask for more
information about this service.
24
TRSF CANCEL
When a single line phone without LCD transfers the second call,
pressing the hook switch will toggle between the original call and the
second call.
This option is programmed not to use this switching call function.
When ON, pressing the hook switch will disconnect the second call
and reconnect the original call.
25
SLT RCL RING
This option is used to generate no-answer announcement when a

single line phone, which is connected to the voice mailbox or auto
attendant, reroutes the forwarded call to the external device
because the call is not answered. A different ring tone than other
general ring can be generated. Please call our sales department to
ask for more information.
26
RECALL DISC
If the transferred call is not answered more than the set time,
the system disconnects the call. Because this disconnects the call
without giving any notice to the counter party, we recommend not
using this function.
27
SVM ALM/SMDR
system, which provides statistics from using multi SVM-800s for the
auto trunk function and with trunk calls. It works only when this
option is ON. Please call our sales department for more information.
Page 2-64
28
SMDR TRK STS
This option allows the system to interwork with the call statistics
system, which provides trunk call statistics data by using SMDR
data. It works only when this option is ON.
Please call our sales department for more information.
29
ARD TONE CHK
Sets whether to use time or busy tone to check if the destination

station is busy when auto redialing.
31
IN TOLL CHK
Sets the system not to restrict toll for an incoming call to the C.O.
line.
32
ISDN PROGCON
Sets whether to progress the ISDN PROGRESS message.
34
LCR DIALTONE
This option connects a stations dial tone with another dial tone
when using LCR function. When ON, the continuous tone like
C.O. lines dial tone will be connected.
36
DSS KEY DPU
When ON, the DS key flashes whenever the DS key-assigned

station receives a call. Pressing the ringing DS key can pick up a
call(call pick-up).
37
BEGN DGT DSP
When using a redial or speed dial, this option sets whether to

display the number(if more than 12 digits) from the first set.
38
ONE TCH FACC
Sets whether the user can use one touch account code key or not
in forced account mode.
39
SGR ALL OUT
40
CHAIN FWD
Sets to exclude all members of the station group temporarily.

Sets the station to send whether the first forwarded call or the last
forwarded call to the voice mailbox.
41
TRK MONITER
When using the monitor-in function while C.O. line is busy, this
option sets whether to disconnect right after the original caller
hangs up or to connect the listening-in station.
42
VOIP MFRALOC
Sets whether to assign the DTMF receiver in order to detect

DTMT signal coming from the connected C.O. line when VOIP
connected C.O. line directly tries to send a call.
43
NTWK AUTOTMR
When OFF, a call duration timer is disabled via networking

intercom call. - Available in enabled Networking only.
45
NO STAFF COD
Sets whether to omit the verifying step for the staff code input
when hotel related key is pressed.
(Available in HOTEL operation only. )
46
PERI UCD SIO
Sets whether to send the PERI UCD data to the UCD port type of
SIO port service types, instead of the PERI UCD port type.
47
AUTO CLEANED
Sets to send the NEED CLEAN state or AVAILABLE state

message when someone is checking out the guest room
(Available in HOTEL operation only.)
48
REDIAL REVW
When the [LNR] key is pressed, this option sets whether to redial
right away or to show the called number first and decide later to
redial.
Page 2-65
49
TEMP RB TONE
When dialing the R2 C.O. line, the ring back tone is sometimes
delayed from network. This option provides a virtual ring back tone
temporarily in order to help the caller to know that the call is being
progressed.
50
BUSY FWD GRP
When the called station is busy, this option sets the called station
to forward a call to the first normal station group member.
52
CHK SPV TRK
For transferring a trunk call to another trunk, this option sets

whether to allow a call transfer even if both trunks cannot detect
a call disconnection of the other party.
Default
DISA PAWD
LCR ENABLE
PERI UCD RPT
CID CODE INS
DISA MOH
TRANSFER MOH
DID BSY ROUT
ALARM MOH
ALL PICK UP
RECALL PIKUP
ICM EXT FWD
SEC 2 BOS AA
DID ERR TONE
TRKGRP 2 MBR
KTS DISC ALM
OFF HOOK ALM
SL SELF RING
SGR INC BUSY
119 ANI/ALI
TRSF CANCEL
SLT RCL RING
RECALL DISC
Page 2-66
: OFF
: OFF
: OFF
: OFF
: OFF
: OFF
: OFF
: OFF
: OFF
: ON
: ON
: OFF
: ON
: OFF
: OFF
: OFF
: OFF
: ON
: OFF
: OFF
: OFF
: OFF
SVM ALM/SMDR
SMDR TRK STS
ARD TONE CHK
IN TOLL CHK
ISDN PROGCON
LCR DIALTONE
DSS KEY DPU
BEGN DGT DSP
ONE TCH FACC
SGR ALL OUT
CHAIN FWD
TRK MONITER
VOIP MFRALOC
NTWK AUTOTMR
NO STAFF COD
PERI UCD SIO
AUTO CLEANED
REDIAL REVW
TEMP RB TONE
BUSY FWD GRP
CHK SPV TRK
: OFF
: OFF
: ON
: ON
: OFF
: OFF
: OFF
: OFF
: OFF
: OFF
: ON
: OFF
: OFF
: ON
: OFF
: OFF
: OFF
: OFF
: OFF
: OFF
: OFF
Display
TEN. ON AND OFF

DISA PSWD :OFF

the function number and press the [Right]
TEN. ON AND OFF

DISA PSWD :OFF
3. To use the special function(ON), press [1], and

press [0] to not to use the function(OFF).
Or, use [Volume] to set to use
the special function(ON) or not(OFF).
TEN. ON AND OFF

DISA PSWD :OFF
TEN. ON AND OFF
LCR ENABLE :ON

Related Program
N/A.
Page 2-67
211 Door Phone Ring Assignment

This program assigns the station that will receive a ring from a door phone.
The door phone will be programmed to ring at a station(group), and the door ring
mode will be assigned separately. If the system does not have any interface module to
the door phone, the DOOR NOT EXIST message will appear.
The Door Phone Interface Module(DPIM) can connect the door phone to any digital
phone port.
Default
1-6 : 500
Display
[301] DOOR RING

1:500
2:500
2. Enter the number of door phone(e.g. 301).

Or, use [Volume] to select the door
phone number and press the [Right] soft button
to move a cursor.
to set all door phones.
[301] DOOR RING

2:500
1:500
3. When ring mode is 1, enter the phone number of

subscriber who will receive a ring.(e.g. 510)
Or, use [Volume] to select the phone
number of subscriber
[301] DOOR RING

1:510 2:500
4. When ring mode is 2-6, enter the phone number of

subscriber who will receive a ring.(e.g. 201)
number of subscriber
[341] DOOR RING

1:510 2:201
[ALL] DOOR RING

1:500
2:500

Related Program
Program 601
Page 2-68
214 DISA Alarm Ringing Station

This program allows the user to select the station that will receive the DISA alarm ring.
The DISA alarm ring will be programmed to ring at a station(group), and it will be
assigned for each ring mode.
Default
1-6 : 500
2. When ring mode is 1, enter the phone

number of ringing station.(e.g.510)
Or, use [Volume] to select the ringing
station and press the [Right] soft button
3. When ring mode is 2-6, enter the phone
number of ringing station(e.g. 201).
Or, use the [Volume] button
to select the ringing station and press the
[Right] soft button.
Display
DISA ALARM RING
2:500
1:500
DISA ALARM RING
1:510
2:500
DISA ALARM RING

1:510
2:201

Related Program
Program 202
Program 601
Change Function Passcode (MCP/MCP2)

Page 2-69
215 Voice Dial Option

This program assigns the maximum number of users for the voice dial card.
This program allows the users to set the voice dial option for the first phone number
of every voice dial card.
0
2CH-7USER-20BIN
One voice dial card can use two ports, and the maximum number
of users for one port is 7 subscribers, and each subscriber can
select 20 names.
1CH-5USER-40BIN
One voice dial card can use 1 port, and the maximum number of
users for one port is 5 subscribers, and each subscriber can log
40 names.
Default
2CH-7USER-20BIN
Display
[3551]VDIAL OPTN
2CH-7USER-20BIN
2. Enter the phone number of the first port of

voice mailbox card.
number of voice mailbox port
to move a cursor.
[3551]VDIAL OPTN
2CH-7USER-20BIN
3. Enter the option number of voice mailbox card

([0]-[1]).
Or, use the [Volume] button to select the option number
[3551]VDIAL OPTN
1CH-5USER-40BIN
4. Enter the option number to clear RAM of voice

mailbox.
Or, use [Volume] to select the clear RAM
option and press the [Right] soft button
to save data.
[3551]VDIAL OPTN
CLEAR RAM ?NO CLEAR

Related Program
Program 216
Page 2-70
Assign Voice Dialler
216 Voice Dialler

This program sets the voice dialler for each port of voice dial device.
The voice dial card has two ports and can be mounted on any slot.
Default
2CH-7USER-20BIN
Display
[3551]VOICE DIAL
USER 1:NONE
2. Enter the phone number of voice mailbox port.

number of voice mailbox port
[3551]VOICE DIAL
USER 1:NONE
3. Enter the voice dialer([1]-[7]).

the phone number of voice dialler
[3551]VOICE DIAL
USER 1:NONE
4. Enter the phone number of voice dialler.

Or, use [Volume] to select the RAM clear
option and press the [Right] soft button
to save data.
[3551]VOICE DIAL
USER 1:201

Related Program
Program 215
Voice Dial Option
Page 2-71
217 ISDN Service

This program sets the service types for general phones when ISDN is in use.
There are 4 types of ISDN services as shown in the table below :
0
VOICE
Services for general phones
FAX 3
Services for G3 FAX.
AUDIO 3.1
Services for the voice phone of 3.1 KHz.
MODEM
Services for the modem-connected data communication.
Default
VOICE
Display
[217] ISDN SRV

VOICE
2. Enter the phone number of general phones.

Or, use the [Volume] button to select the
phone number of general phones and press
the [Right] soft button to move a cursor.
[221] ISDN SRV

VOICE
3. Enter the service type([0]-[3]).

the service type and then press the [Right]
soft button and start again from No. 2.
[221] ISDN SRV

FAX 3

Related Program
N/A.
Page 2-72
220 Assign Station Pair

This program assigns the station pair that operate like two phones linked to the same port.
If one of the stations changes data, such as call forwarding, service level, auto route
selection level, DND, and station lock, the other station may change its information
as well.
Default
All stations : N/A

to move a cursor.
3. Select the secondary station to pair up with
the primary station.
Or, press [Volume] to select the station
Display
[201] PRIMARY
SECONDARY:NONE
[305] PRIMARY
SECONDARY:NONE
[305] PRIMARY
SECONDARY:205

Related Program
Program 100
Program 102
Program 300
Program 310
Station Lock
Call Forward (MCP/MCP2)
Auto Route Selection Level
Page 2-73
221 Statistics Data Print Option (MCP/MCP2)

This program sets the manual/auto print options for statistics data.
In case of the MCP board-installed system, the LAN card shall be mounted on the
system to set this option.
There are 4 types of auto print modes as summarized below :

0
AUTO PRINT OFF
Does not use auto print option.
DAILY
Prints daily at the same time.
EVERY HOUR
Prints every hour.
THREE TIME SHIFT
Print 3 times a day in a shift.(Set more than one time period.
(the time and minute to print shall be set.)

(the minute to print shall be set.)
The user must enter the start/end time as well as minute.)
For auto print, erase the previous data after printing data and start logging new data.
Default
AUTO PRINT OFF
Display
TRAFFIC REPORT
MANUAL PRINTOUT
2. Select either the manual printout([0]) or auto

print([1]).
Or, use [Volume] to select either the
manual printout or auto print. Then, press the
[Right] soft button to move a cursor.
TRAFFIC REPORT
AUTO PRINT OPTN
3. Enter the auto print mode([0]-[3]).

Or, use [Volume] to select the auto
print mode. Press the [Right] soft button to
move a cursor.
TRAFFIC REPORT
DAILY HHMM:
4. For daily print mode, enter the time and minute

(HHMM).
TRAFFIC REPORT
EVERY HOUR MM:59
Page 2-74
For every hour mode, enter the minute to print

(MM).
For 3-time shift mode, enter the time period
number([1]-[3]).
TRAFFIC REPORT
1S:S:0800 E:0959

the time period and press the [Right]
5. Enter the start time and minute(HHMM),
TRAFFIC REPORT
DAILY HHMM:2359
as well as the end time and minute(HHMM).
Select another time period and enter
the start time(HHMM) and end time(HHMM) accordingly
Related Program
N/A.
Page 2-75
222 Assign Hotel Guest Room Type (For MCP2)

This program will be applied for setting the hotel function only.
This program assigns the guest room types to each corresponding station when using
the hotel function.
The guest room types that can be assigned are summarized below :
0
NORMAL STATION
It is a default value, and like before, this is assigned for

general phones in places like hotel offices but not guest
rooms.
GUEST SMOKING
Assigned for phones of smoking guest rooms in a hotel.

In this case, the phone change corresponding to this phone
will be included in the room fee.
GUEST NO SMOKING
Assigned for phones of non-smoking guest rooms in a hotel.

In this case, the phone change corresponding to this phone
will be included in the room fee.
MEETING ROOM
ADMINISTRATOR
Assigned for phones of every meeting rooms.

Assigned for phones that can perform unique hotel function,
such as check-in and check-out, by using every hotel-related
buttons.
FAX STATION
Assigned for the Fax station, which is additionally installed in

a hotel guest room. Each guest room can have an additional
line. In this case, MMC Program 223 shall be used to
separately assign a specific guest room to be charged.
Default
All stations : NORMAL STATION.
Page 2-76
Display
[205] PHONE USE

GUEST SMOKING

to move a cursor.
[205] PHONE USE

NORMAL STATION
3. Press [0]~[5] to select the guest room type.

the desired guest room type
[201] PHONE USE

NORMAL STATION

Related Program
Program 223
Fax Pair (MCP2)
Page 2-77
223 Fax Pair (For MCP2)

This program will be applied for setting the hotel function only.
This program assigns the guest room to be charged as the Fax station.
Default
N/A.
Display
[201] FAX PAIR

NONE

(Only smoking guest and non-smoking guest
can be selected.)
[205] FAX PAIR

NONE
[205] FAX PAIR
305
3. Enter the desired Fax station number.

the desired Fax station number and
press the [Right] soft button.
Related Program
Program 222
Page 2-78
Guest Room Type (MCP2)
224 Voice Alarm Message (MCP/MCP2)

This program sets the announcement comments, which are recorded at the auto
attendant(AA), to be heard when the user responses to an alarm.
This program is not supported for the MCP board-installed iDCS-M.
AA GROUP
Assigns the AA group number to be linked when an alarm is

responded.
MESSAGE NO
Assigns the AA announce comments that will be released when an
GROUP BUSY
Assigns the background music that will be used when all AA groups are
alarm is responded.
busy. If NONE, gives a dial tone, and if TONE, gives the hold tone.
Default
N/A.
Display
WAKE-UP ANNOUNCE
AA GROUP:NONE
2. Enter the AA group number([0]).

Or, use [Volume] to select the
AA group number. Press the [Right]
WAKE-UP ANNOUNCE
AA GROUP:NONE
3. Enter the AA group number.

the AA group number and press the [Right]
WAKE-UP ANNOUNCE
AA GROUP:548
4. Set the AA message number([1]).

the AA message number and press the [Right]
WAKE-UP ANNOUNCE
MESSAGE NO.:NONE
Page 2-79
5. Enter the AA message number.(01~64)

the AA message number and press the
[Right] soft button to move a cursor.
WAKE-UP ANNOUNCE
MESSAGE NO.:10
6. Set the GROUP BUSY ([2]).

the GROUP BUSY and press the [Right]
WAKE-UP ANNOUNCE
GROUP BUSY:NONE
7. Enter the background music source number.

Or, use the [Volume] button to select the desired
background music source and press the [Right]
WAKE-UP ANNOUNCE
GROUP BUSY:372
If [NONE] is set, Press [Hold].

Related Program
N/A
Page 2-80
300 Set Station Function ON/OFF

This program allows the user to enable(1.ON) or disable(0.OFF) specific functions.
00
ACCESS DIAL
Selects directly the C.O. line or C.O. line group by dialing for auto
route selection.
01
MICROPHONE
Uses the microphone.
02
OFFHOOK RING
Uses the off hook ring.
03
SMDR PRINT
Prints the call information.
04
TGR ADV. TONE
The tone that indicates the C.O. line group of the next stage is
selected for auto route selection.
05
VMAA FORWARD
Forwards the incoming call to Voice Mail/AA.
07
NGT PASSCODE
Selects whether to use password when changing the ring answer

mode.
08
INTRCOM SMDR
Displays calls between stations on SMDR.
Default
ACCESS DIAL
MICROPHONE
OFFHOOK RING
SMDR PRINT
TGR ADV. TONE
VMAA FORWARD
NGT PASSCODE
INTRCOM SMDR
: ON
: ON
: OFF
: ON
: ON
: ON
: ON
: OFF
2. Dial the station number(e.g. 205). Or, press

[Volume] to select the station and press the
[Right] Soft button to move the cursor.
Or, press [Message] to select all stations.
3. Enter the function number([00]-[09]) (e.g. 03).

Or, press [Volume] to select the function number,
and press the [Right] Soft button to move the
cursor.
Display
[201] CUS.ON/OFF
ACCESS DIAL :ON
[205] CUS.ON/OFF
ACCESS DIAL :ON
[ALL] CUS.ON/OFF
ACCESS DIAL :ON
[205] CUS.ON/OFF
SMDR PRINT :ON
Page 2-81
4. Press(ON) or [1] to set the specific function

to be available, Or, press(OFF) or [0] to set
the specific function to be unavailable.
Or, press [Volume] to select(ON) to set the
specific function to be available or(OFF)
to set the specific function to be unavailable,
and press the [Right] Soft button.
[205] CUS.ON/OFF
SMDR PRINT :OFF
5. Press [Transfer] to exit the program. Or, press

[Speaker] to move on to the next program.
Related Program
Program 207
Program 712
Program 725
Program 726
Page 2-82
Voice Mailbox/Auto Attendant Port

Enter the Route Table for Auto Route Selection (MCP/MCP2)
Options of Printing System Message Detail Recording (MCP/MCP2)
Voice Mail/Auto Attendant Options
301 Set Station Service Level

This program allows the user to set the service level of the ring answer mode of each
station. There are thirty service levels ([01]-[30]) as shown in Program 701 Service
Level Table.
Default
01
Display
[201] STN COS

1:01 2:01 3:01
2. Dial the station number(ex, 205).

Or, press [Volume] to select the station and
press the [Right] Soft button to move the cursor.
[205] STN COS

1:01 2:01 3:01
3. Enter the service level([01]-[30]) when the ring

mode is 1. Or, press [Volume] to select the service
level and press the [Right] Soft button.
[205] STN COS

1:02 2:01 3:01
4. Enter the service level([01]-[30]) when

the ring mode is 2-6. Or, press [Volume] to select
the service level, and press the [Right] Soft button.
[205] STN COS

1:02 2:02 3:02
[ALL] STN COS

1:01 2:01 3:01

Related Program
Program 701
Service Level Table
Page 2-83
302 Set Call Pick-up Group

This program allows the user to specify the call pick-up group for each station.
The user can pick up the call incoming to another station by setting the call pick-up
group for each station. There are ninety nine call pick-up group numbers([01]-[99]).
Default
PICKUP GRP : 01
Display
[201] PICKUP GRP

PICKUP GRP:01
2. Dial the station number(e.g. 205).

Or, press [Volume] to select the station, and
Or, press [Message](DS-24SE) or the [ANS/RLS]
(DS-4028E) to select all stations.
[205] PICKUP GRP

PICKUP GRP:01
3. Enter the call pick-up group number([01]-[99]).

Or, press [Volume] to select the group number,
and press the [Right] Soft button to repeat this
procedure from step 2.
[ALL] PICKUP GRP

PICKUP GRP:??
[205] PICKUP GRP

PICKUP GRP:10

Related Program
Program 107
Program 722
Program 723
Page 2-84
Subscriber Button Extender (MCP/MCP2)

Set a Button for Each Station (MCP/MCP2)
Set a Button for Each Type of a Phone (MCP/MCP2)
303 Set Executive/Secretary

This program allows the user to set Executive or Secretary. Up to four Secretaries can
be set for each Executive, and the station set as Executive may not be set as the
Secretary of another Executive. The ALREADY SECR STN message is displayed
when setting the Secretary station as Executive.
Press [F] to switch between the modes for entering Executive and entering Secretary.
Default
N/A
Programmable Button
The [F] button : selects Executive/Secretary mode.
2. Enter the phone number of the executive(e.g. 205).

Or, press [Volume] to select the executive
and press the [Right] Soft button to move the cursor.
Display
BOSS STN:NONE
SECR 1:NONE
BOSS STN:205
SECR 1:NONE
3. Enter the number([1]-[4]) of the secretary member.

Or, press [Volume] to select the number of the
member and press the [Right] Soft button to move
the cursor.
BOSS STN:[205]
SECR 1:NONE
4. Enter the phone number of the secretary.

Or, press [Volume] to select the phone number
of the secretary. Press the [Right] Soft button to
repeat this step 4.
BOSS STN:[205]
SECR 2:NONE
5. Press the [Left] Soft button to repeat the procedure from step 2.
Or, press [Transfer] to exit the program.
Related Program
Program 722
Page 2-85
304 Set Available C.O. Line for Each Station (MCP)

This program allows the user to enable (1. YES) or disable (0. NO) making calls
through the C.O. line or using call pickup for the C.O. line.
When Yes is selected, the user can receive or transfer the call . However, when No is
selected, the user can only answer calls incoming through the specific C.O. line.
Default
DIAL : YES
ANS : YES
Display
[201] USE [701]

DIAL:YES ANS:YES

[Volume] to select the station and press the
[205] USE [701]

DIAL:YES ANS:YES
3. Dial the C.O. line number(e.g. 704). Or, press

[Volume] to select C.O. line and press the [Right]
Soft button to move the cursor.
Or, press [Message] to select all C.O. lines.
[205] USE [704]

DIAL:YES ANS:YES
4. For the outgoing, enter [1](YES) or [0](NO).

Or, press [Volume] to select YES or NO and
press the [Right] Soft button.
[205] USE [704]

DIAL:NO ANS:YES
5. For the call pick-up, enter [1](YES) or [0](NO).

Or, press [Volume] to select YES or NO
[205] USE [704]

DIAL:NO ANS:NO
[ALL] USE [701]

DIAL:YES ANS:YES
[205] USE [ALL]

DIAL:YES ANS:YES

Related Program
Program 313
Program 317
Program 318
Page 2-86
Copy Available Station/C.O. line(MCP)

Set Available Station for Each Station(MCP)
Set Available C.O. line for each C.O. line (MCP)
304 Set Availability for Each Calling Group (MCP2)

This program allows the user to enable (1.YES) or disable (0.NO) call pickup or calls
to specific C.O. calling group for each station call group. Stations are set within the
call group numbers 001~300 and C.O. lines are set within 301~500 at Program 614
Set Station/C.O. Line Call Group.
When Yes is selected, the user can receive or transfer the call. However, when No is
selected, the user can only answer calls incoming through the specific C.O. line.
Default
DIAL : YES
ANS : YES
Display
(001) USE (001)

DIAL:YES ANS:YES
2. Press the station calling group number(e.g. 005).

Or, press [Volume] to select the station calling
group number and press the [Right] Soft button
to move the cursor. Or, press [Message] to select
all station calling groups.
(005) USE (001)

DIAL:YES ANS:YES
3. Press the C.O. line calling group number(e.g. 304).

Or, press [Volume] to select the C.O. line calling
group numer and press the [Right] Soft button
to move the cursor. Or, press [Message] to select
all C.O. line calling groups.
(005) USE (004)

DIAL:YES ANS:YES
4. For the outgoing, enter [1](YES) or [0](NO).

Or, press [Volume] to select [1](YES) or
[0](NO) and press the [Right] Soft button.
(005) USE (004)

DIAL:NO ANS:YES
5. For the call pick-up, enter [1](YES) or [0](NO).

Or, press [Volume] to select [1](YES) or [0](NO)
(005) USE (004)

DIAL:NO ANS:NO
(ALL) USE (001)

DIAL:YES ANS:YES
(005) USE (ALL)

DIAL:YES ANS:YES

Page 2-87
Related Program
Program 313
Program 614
Page 2-88
Copy set Availability for Each Calling Group (MCP2)

Set a Station/C.O. Line Call Group (MCP2)
305 Set Force Code Type

This program allows the user to set the code type that shall be entered for C.O. calls.
0
NONE
No code entered
AUTHORIZE CODE
Enters the registered class modification code
ACCT VERIFIED
Enters the registered cost code
ACCT NO VERIFIED
Enters the cost code(registration not verified)
Default
N/A
Display
[201] FORCD CODE

NONE
2. Dial the station number(ex, 205). Or, press

[Volume] to select the station and press
the [Right] Soft button to move the cursor.
[205] FORCD CODE

NONE
3. Enter the code type number([0]-[3])(e.g. 2).

Or, press [Volume] to select the code type and
press the [Right] Soft button to repeat this
4.
[ALL] FORCD CODE

?
[205] FORCD CODE

ACCT VERIFIED

Related Program
Program 707
Program 708
Enter a Class Change Code (MCP/MCP2)

Enter an Account Code (MCP/MCP2)
Page 2-89
306 Set Hot line

This program allows the user to set the internal or external hot line for each station.
When the user lifts the handset of the phone set as hot line, the phone dials the
defined phone number after the defined time(Hot Line Wait Time).
Enter the C.O. number and dial number as in entering the speed dial to enable C.O.
calls or to set automatic external call.
Default
N/A
Display
[201] HOT LINE

NONE

[205] HOT LINE

NONE
3. Enter the station number to be set as the hot line.

Or, press the [Volume] to select the station
number and press the [Right] Soft button.
Or, enter the off-hook C.O. line selection
dial and press the [Right] Soft button.
[205] HOT LINE

201
[205] HOT LINE
701-P03312809783

Related Program
Program 502
Page 2-90
Change Station Time Variable(OFFHK SEL.)
308 Set Background Music Source.

This program allows the user to set the background music source(BGM) for each
station.
The system music source has one internal source and two MISC card-supported
external sources, and the phone number is 371-379. Connect the MISC card-supported
external source to the corresponding port of the terminal box. If NONE is set as the
background music source or the source is not connected to the external music source
port set as the background music source, the user cannot listen to the music.
Default
N/A
Display
[201] BGM SOURCE

BGM SOURCE:NONE

Or, press [Volume] to select the station
and press the [Right] Soft button to move the
cursor. Or, press [Message] to select all stations.
[205] BGM SOURCE

BGM SOURCE:NONE
3. Press the phone number of the background

music source(e.g. 371). Or, press [Volume]
to select the phone number and press the [Right]
Soft button to repeat this procedure from step 2.
[ALL] BGM SOURCE

BGM SOURCE:?
[205] BGM SOURCE
BGM SOURCE:371

Related Program
Program 309
Program 408
Set Station Music On Hold(MOH)

Set C.O. line Music On Hold(MOH)
Page 2-91
309 Set Station Music On Hold (MOH)

This program allows the user to set the Music On Hold (MOH) that is heard when the
station is on hold. The system music source has one internal source and two MISC
card-supported external sources, and the phone number is 371-379. Connect the
MISC card-supported external source to the corresponding card of the terminal box.
If Tone is set as MOH, the tone can be heard. If None is set as MOH, no sound is
audible when the station is on hold.
Default
371
Display
[201] STN MOH

MOH SOURCE:TONE

[205] STN MOH

MOH SOURCE:TONE
3. Dial the phone number of MOH(e.g. 371).

Or, press [Volume] to select the phone number and
press the [Right] Soft button to repeat
this procedure from step 2. Or, press [Message]
to set the tone Or, press [Hold] to delete MOH.
[ALL] STN MOH

MOH SOURCE:?
[205] STN MOH

MOH SOURCE:371
[205] STN MOH
MOH SOURCE:TONE

Related Program
Program 308
Program 408
Page 2-92
Set Background Music Source

Set C.O. line Music On Hold(MOH)
310 Set Auto Route Selection Class

This program allows the user to set the class([1]-[8]) of Auto Route Selection to limit
the range of C.O. line group selection .
Default
LCR CLASS : 1
Display
[201] LCR CLASS

LCR CLASS 1

[Volume] to select the station and press the [Right]
[205] LCR CLASS

LCR CLASS 1
Soft button to move the cursor. Or, press [Message]

to select all stations.
3. Enter the Auto Route Selection class([1]-[8]).
Or, press [Volume] to select the class and
[ALL] LCR CLASS

LCR CLASS ?
[205] LCR CLASS
LCR CLASS 5

Related Program
Program 710
Program 711
Program 712
Program 713
Enter a Digit for Auto Route Selection (MCP/MCP2)

Enter a Timetable for Auto Route Selection
Enter a Dial Conversion Table for Auto Route Selection (MCP/MCP2)
Page 2-93
312 Set Caller ID

This program allows the user to select whether the caller ID should be displayed.
RCV
Selects whether the received caller ID should be displayed
SEND
Selects whether to send the caller ID for ISDN calls
Default
RCV : YES
SEND : YES
Display
[201] CID/ANI
RCV:YES SND:YES
2. Enter the station number(e.g. 205). Or, press

[Volume] to select the station and press the [Right]
Soft button to move the cursor. Or, press [Message]
to select all stations.
[205] CID/ANI
RCV:YES SND:YES
3. Enter the number([0], [1]) to select whether to

receive the caller ID. Or, press [Volume] to select
whether to receive the caller ID and press the
[Right] Soft button.
4. Enter the number([0], [1]) to select whether the
caller ID should be sent. Or, press [Volume] to
select whether the caller ID CID should be sent
or not, and press the [Right] Soft button.
[ALL] CID/ANI
RCV:YES SND:YES
[205] CID/ANI
RCV:YES SND:YES
[205] CID/ANI
RCV:YES SND:YES

Related Program
Program 119
Program 415
Program 608
Program 725
Page 2-94
Assign Caller ID Display Method

Set Abandoned Call Save Status
Assign a Caller Information Saving Block (MCP/MCP2)
313 Copy Available Station/C.O. Line (MCP)

This program allows the user to copy the available station/C.O. line number to
another phone.
Default
N/A
Display
[201] CPY USABLE
FROM:NONE
2. Enter the station number of the digital phone.

Or, press [Volume] to select the phone
number and press the [Right] Soft button
to move the cursor. Or, press [Message] to
select all digital phones.
[202] CPY USABLE

FROM:NONE
3. Enter the station number to be copied.

Or, press [Volume] to select the station number
to be copied and press the [Right] Soft button
to move the cursor.
[202] CPY USABLE

FROM:201
[ALL] CPY USABLE

FROM:NONE

Related Program
Program 304
Program 317
Program 318
Set Available C.O. line for Each Station (MCP)

Set Available Station for Each Station (MCP)
Set Available C.O. line for Each C.O. line (MCP)
Page 2-95
313 Copy Availability for Each Calling Group (MCP2)

This program allows the user to copy the availability settings of each calling group to
another calling group.
Default
N/A
Display
(001) CPY USABLE

FROM:
2. Enter the desired calling group number.

Or, press [Volume] to select the phone number,
(002) CPY USABLE

FROM:_

Or, press [Message] to select all calling groups.
(ALL) CPY USABLE

FROM:_
3. Enter the original calling group number to be copied.

Or, press [Volume] to select the station number to
be copied, and press the [Right] Soft button to
move the cursor.
(002) CPY USABLE

FROM:001

Related Program
Program 304
Program 614
Page 2-96
Set Availability for Each Calling Group (MCP2)

314 Set C.O. Call Alarm/Restriction

This program allows the user to generate an audible alarm or to disconnect the call
when a C.O. call is maintained for a certain amount of time.
0
NONE
There is no restriction.
CONFIRM TONE
Alarms during calling.
DISCONNECT
Disconnects the call.
Default
N/A
Display
[201] CO CONFIRM
NONE

Or, press [Volume] to select the station, and press
[205] CO CONFIRM
NONE
[ALL] CO CONFIRM
NONE
3. Enter(TONE) [1] to set the alarm to be audible,

[205] CO CONFIRM
enter(DISC) [2] to set the call to be disconnected,
CONFIRM TONE
and enter(NONE) [0] not to set the call to be
restricted. Or, press [Volume] to select
TONE/DISC/NONE, and press the [Right]
Soft button to repeat this procedure from the second process.
Related Program
Program 501
Set System Time Variable (MCP/MCP2)
Page 2-97
315 Set Branch Group

This program allows the user to set the branch group for each station.
Each station has its own branch group, enabling the user to pick up the incoming call
of another station in the same branch just by lifting the handset.
There are ninety-nine branch group numbers([01]-[99]).
Default
BRANCH GRP : NONE
Display
1. [Transfer] and [315].
[201] BRANCH GRP

BRANCH GRP:NONE
2. Press the station number(e.g. 205). Or, press

[Volume] to select the station, and press the
[Right] Soft button to move the cursor. Or, press
[Message] to set the entire stations.
[205] BRANCH GRP

BRANCH GRP:NONE
3. Enter the branch group number([01]-[99])

Or, press [Volume] to select the pick-up group
number, and press the [Right] Soft button to
repeat this procedure from step 2.
[205] BRANCH GRP

BRANCH GRP:10
[ALL] BRANCH GRP

BRANCH GRP:??

Related Program
N/A
Page 2-98
316 Set Identification Ring

This program allows the user to set the ring tone(T) and the cadence(C) to identify
the call received by a specific station or C.O. line.
The digital phone identifies rings through the ring tone. When the ring tone of the
sending station/C.O. line is set as F-STN, the bell rings according to the program 111 of
the receiving station. However, when the ring tone of the sending station/C.O. line is set
as 1-8, the bell rings according to the defined ring tone.
The normal station identifies rings through the cadence. When the cadence of the
sending station/C.O. line is set as F-STN, the bell rings according to each sending
party type in the cycle as shown in the program 510. However, when the cadence of
the sending station/C.O. line is set as 1-5, the bell rings in the cycle as shown below
without considering the types of the sending station/C.O. line. In this case, the cycle
is defined in the program 510.
CADENCE(C)
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
STN RING
TRK RING
DOOR RING
ALM RING
CBK RING
: (Station ring)
: (C.O. line ring)
: (Door ring)
: (Alarm ring)
: (Callback ring)
Default
T : F-STN
C : F-STN
Display
[201] DIST.RING
T:F-STN C:F-STN
2. Dial the station or C.O. line number(e.g. 202).

Or, press [Volume] to select the station or C.O. line
[202] DIST.RING
T:F-STN C:F-STN
3. Enter the ring tone([0]-[8]). When [0] is entered,

F-STN will be set. Or, press [Volume] to select the
ring tone and press the [Right] Soft button.
[202] DIST.RING
T:2
C:F-STN
4. Enter the cadence([0]-[5]). When [0] is entered,

F-STN will be set. Or, press [Volume] to select the
cadence and press the [Right] Soft button.
[202] DIST.RING
C:3
T:2
Page 2-99

Related Program
Program 111
Page 2-100
Ring Tone
317 Set Available Station for Each Station (MCP)

This program allows the user to enable(1. YES) or disable(0. NO) each station to call
other stations.
Default
DIAL : YES

Or, press [Volume] to select the station and press

4. For C.O. calls, enter [1](YES) or [0](NO).

Or, press [Volume] to select whether to send or
not(YES/NO) and press the [Right] Soft button.
Display
[201] USE [202]
DIAL:YES
[205] USE [202]

DIAL:YES
[ALL] USE [202]
DIAL:YES
[205] USE [210]

DIAL:YES
[205] USE [ALL]
DIAL:YES
[205] USE [210]

DIAL:NO

Related Program
Program 304
Program 313
Program 318

Copy Available Station/C.O. line (MCP)
Page 2-101
317 Set Available Station Call Group for Each Station

Call Group (MCP2)
This program allows the user to enable (1.YES) or disable (0.NO) each station call
group to call other station call groups.
Default
DIAL : YES
Display
(001) USE (001)

DIAL:YES
2. Press the station call group number. (e.g. 002)

Or, press [Volume] to select the station call group
Or, press [Message] to select all station call groups.
(002) USE (001)

DIAL:YES
3. Enter the station call group number. (e.g. 005)

Or, press [Volume] to select the station call group
Or, press [Message] to select all station call groups.
(002) USE (005)

DIAL:YES
4. Enter [1](YES) or [0](NO) for the call.

Or, press [Volume] to select whether to call
(YES/NO) and press the [Right] Soft button.
[205] USE [210]

DIAL:NO
(ALL) USE (001)

DIAL:YES
[205] USE [ALL]

DIAL:YES

Related Program
Program 614
Page 2-102
318 Set Available C.O. Line for Each C.O. Line (MCP)
This program allows the user to enable(1. YES) or disable(0. NO) each C.O. line to
call other C.O. lines.
Default
DIAL : YES
Display
[701] USE [702]

DIAL:YES

[Volume] to select the C.O. line and press the
[Message](DS-24SE) or [ANS/RLS](DS-4028E) to
select all C.O. lines.
[705] USE [702]

DIAL:YES
3. Dial the C.O. line number(e.g. 710).

Or, press [Volume] to select the C.O.
line and press the [Right] Soft button to
move the cursor. Or, press [Message] to
select all C.O. lines.
[705] USE [710]

DIAL:YES
4. For C.O calls, enter [1](YES) or [0](NO).

Or, press [Volume] to select whether to send or
not(YES/NO) and press the [Right] Soft button.
[705] USE [710]

DIAL:NO
[ALL] USE [702]

DIAL:YES
[705] USE [ALL]

DIAL:YES

Related Program
Program 304
Program 313
Program 317

Copy Available Station/C.O. line (MCP)
Page 2-103
318 Set Available C.O. Call Group for Each C.O. Call
Group (MCP2)
This program allows the user to enable (1.YES) or disable (0.NO) each C.O. call
group to call other C.O. call groups.
Default
DIAL : YES
Display
(301) USE (301)

DIAL:YES
2. Enter the C.O. call group number. (e.g. 305)

Or, press [Volume] to select the C.O. call group and
Or, press [Message] (DS-24SE) or [ANS/RLS]
(DS-4028E) to select all C.O call groups.
(305) USE (301)

DIAL:YES
3. Enter the C.O. call group number. (e.g. 310)

Or, press [Volume] to select the C.O. call group and
Or, press [Message] to select all C.O call groups.
(305) USE (310)

DIAL:YES
4. Enter [1](YES) or [0](NO) for the call.

Or, press [Volume] to select whether to call
(YES/NO) and press the [Right] Soft button.
(ALL) USE (301)

DIAL:YES
(305) USE (ALL)

DIAL:YES
(305) USE (310)

DIAL:NO

Related Program
Program 614
Page 2-104
319 Exchange Phone Information

This program allows each station to exchange information with other stations.
Default
N/A
Display
SET RELOCATION
EXT_
EXT
2. Dial the digital phone number. Or, press [Volume]

to select the digital phone number and press the
SET RELOCATION
EXT201 EXT_
3. Enter another digital phone number. Or, press

[Volume] to select the digital phone number and
SET RELOCATION
EXT201 EXT202

Related Program
N/A
Page 2-105
320 Set System Forward No Answer

This program allows the user to assign the station or station group to which the call
should be forwarded when the station assigned for Forward No Answer does not
answer the incoming call.
Forward no answer can be assigned respectively for each type of calls.
0
INT
Forward No Answer applies only to station calls.
EXT
Forward No Answer applies only to C.O. calls.
BOTH
Forward No Answer applies to both station and C.O. calls.
Default
N/A
OPT : BOTH
Display
[201] PRESET FNA

NONE
OPT:BOTH
2. Dial the station number. Or, press [Volume] to select

the phone number and press the [Right] Soft button to
move the cursor. Or, press [Message](DS-24SE) or
[ANS/RLS] button(DS-4028E) to select all stations.
[202] PRESET FNA

OPT:BOTH
NONE
3. Enter the desired station number for Forward No Answer.

Or, press [Volume] to select the station number and
[202] PRESET FNA

OPT:BOTH
201
4. Enter [0]~[2] to select whether to execute the

function according to the call type.
Or, press [Volume] to select the desired call type and
[202] PRESET FNA

201
OPT:EXT
[ALL] PRESET FNA

OPT:BOTH
NONE

Related Program
Program 102
Page 2-106
Call Forwarding (MCP/MCP2)
321 Set Text Message Available Phone (MCP)

This program allows the user to identify if the digital phone can display text messages .
This program is available only for the iDCS-L system including the MCP board.
Default
NON DISPLAY
Display
[201] KTS TYPE

NON DISPLAY
2. Enter the station number. Or, press [Volume] to

select phone number and press the [Right] Soft
button to move the cursor. Or, press [Message]
(DS-24SE) or [ANS/RLS](DS-4028E) to
select all stations.
[202] KTS TYPE

NON DISPLAY
3. Select text message display status. Or, press

[Volume] to select whether to display text
messages and press the [Right] Soft button to
move the cursor.
[ALL] KTS TYPE

NON DISPLAY
[202] KTS TYPE

DISPLAY

Related Program
N/A
Page 2-107
323 Set Caller ID (MCP/MCP2)

This program allows the user to specify the caller ID(CID) that is sent when the call
is sent from each station/C.O. line through the ISDN C.O. line.
The user can specify four CIDs for each station/C.O. line in the system including the
MCP2 board. The iDCS-M system including the MCP board can have two specified
CIDs for each station, and the iDCS-L system can have four specified CIDs for each
station.
When sending the call through R2MFC, the first CID is used and the user can enter
up to sixteen digits for one CID.
Default
N/A
Display
[201] SEND CLIP

1:
2. Enter the station number(or C.O. line number).

Or, press [Volume] to select the phone number and
[202] SEND CLIP

1:
3. Enter the number([1]-[4]) of the CID list.

Or, press [Volume] to select the number of the
CID list and press the [Right] Soft button to
move the cursor.
[202] SEND CLIP

1:
4. Enter the CID and press the [Right] Soft button to

save the data.
[202] SEND CLIP

1:0312187449

Related Program
Program 312
Program 427
Program 428
Program 834
Page 2-108
Set Caller ID
Set PRI Option
Set BRI Option
Set VoIP General Option (MCP)
Set H.323 General Option (MCP2)
400 Set C.O. Function ON/OFF

This program allows the user to enable(1. ON) or disable(0. OFF) C.O. line specific
functions.
0
1A2 EMULATE
Interrupt C.O. calls.
TRK INC.DND
C.O. line DND(Do Not Disturb)
TRK FORWARD
C.O. line call forward
EFWD EXT CLI
Uses station CID when forwarding external C.O. lines
Default
1A2 EMULATE
TRK INC. DND
TRK FORWARD
EFWD EXT CLI
: OFF
: OFF
: ON
: ON
Display
[701] TRK ON/OFF

1A2 EMULATE :OFF

[Message] to select all C.O. lines.
[702] TRK ON/OFF

1A2 EMULATE :OFF
[ALL] TRK ON/OFF
1A2 EMULATE :OFF
3. Enter the function number([0]-[2], [6]).

Or, press [Volume] to select the function number
[702] TRK ON/OFF

1A2 EMULATE :OFF
4. Press [Volume] to set the specific function to be

available(ON), or not(OFF) and press the [Right]
Soft button. Or, press(ON) [1] to use the specific
function Or, press(OFF) [0] not to use the specific
function.
[702] TRK ON/OFF

1A2 EMULATE :ON

Related Program
N/A
Page 2-109
401 Set C.O. Line Type

This program allows the user to set the C.O. line type as the general C.O. line or the
station of a private branch exchange(PBX).
0
CO LINE
The general C.O. line
PBX LINE
The station of PBX.
Default
All C.O. lines : CO LINE

line and press the [Right] Soft button to move
the cursor. Or, press [Message](DS-24SE) or
[ANS/RLS](DS-4028E) to select all C.O. lines.
3. Enter the C.O. line type([0]-[1]).
line type and press the [Right] Soft button
to repeat this procedure from step 2.
Display
[701] PBX LINE
CO LINE
[702] PBX LINE

CO LINE
[ALL] PBX LINE
?
[702] PBX LINE

PBX LINE

Related Program
N/A
Page 2-110
402 Set C.O. Line Dial Type

This program allows the user to set the C.O. line dial type. There are three C.O. line
dial types as shown below.
0
DTMF TYPE
Dual tone multifrequency type
DIAL PULSE TYPE
Dial pulse type
R2MFC TYPE
R2MFC type
Default
All C.O. lines : DTMF TYPE
Display
[701] DIAL TYPE

DTMF TYPE

[Message] to select all C.O. lines.
[702] DIAL TYPE

DTMF TYPE
3. Enter the C.O. line dial mode([0]-[2]).

Or, press [Volume] to select the dial mode and
procedure from step
[702] DIAL TYPE

DIAL PLUSE TYPE
[ALL] DIAL TYPE

?

Related Program
Program 501
Program 503
Change System Time Variable (MCP/MCP2)

Change C.O. line Time Variable
Page 2-111
403 Set Call Restriction Class of C.O. Line

This program allows the user to select whether to restrict calls by standardizing the
station using the C.O. line, or by classifying the C.O. line when restricting calls for
each C.O. line. The call restriction class is specified for each ring mode, and the
classes are as shown below.
0
F-STN
Follows the call restriction class of the station.
CLS-A
Follows the call restriction class A.(No restrictions)
CLS-B
Follows the call restriction class B.
CLS-C
Follows the call restriction class C.
CLS-D
Follows the call restriction class D.
CLS-E
Follows the call restriction class E.
CLS-F
Follows the call restriction class F.
CLS-G
Follows the call restriction class G.
CLS-H
Follows the call restriction class H.

(Outgoing C.O. calls are disabled)
Default
1 : F-STN
3 : F-STN
5 : F-STN
2 : F-STN
4 : F-STN
6 : F-STN

[Message](DS-24SE) or [ANS/RLS](DS-4028E) to
set all C.O. lines.
3. Enter the class([0]-[8]) of the day mode. Or, press
[Volume] to select the class and press the [Right]
Page 2-112
Display
[701] TOLL CLASS
1:F-STN 2:F-STN
[702] TOLL CLASS

1:F-STN 2:F-STN
[ALL] TOLL CLASS
1:F-STN 2:F-STN
[702] TOLL CLASS

1:CLS-A 2:F-STN
4. Enter the class([0]-[8]) of the night mode. Or, press

[Volume] to select the class and press the [Right]
[702] TOLL CLASS

1:CLS-A 2:CLS-A

Related Program
Program 202
Program 301
Program 507
Program 701

Set Station Service Level
Set Ring Mode Auto Conversion Time
Service Level Table
Page 2-113
404 Enter C.O. Line Name

This program allows the user to enter the name of each C.O. line.
The user can enter the name in English by using the dial button. The characters
shown below are displayed on the LCD panel according to the number of times the
same dial button is pressed. When another dial button is pressed, the displayed
character is saved and the cursor moves to the next space. Press the [A] button to
switch between capital and small letters.
[Volume]is used to move the cursor backward or forward after saving the current
character.

Dial Count
Dial Count
<
>
Space ?
1
2
Special characters are displayed in the order shown below when the dial button # is
pressed :
#, space, &, !, :, ?, ., ,, %, $, -, <, >, /, =, [, ], @, ^, (, ), _, +, {, }, |, ; , , ,
Default
N/A
Programmable Button
A button : Selects capital/small letters.
B button : Selects Korean/English.
Page 2-114
Display
[701] TRUNK NAME

Or, press [Volume] to select the C.O. line and
[702] TRUNK NAME

_
3. Use the table above to enter the C.O. line name

[702] TRUNK NAME

SAMSUNG

Related Program
Program 104
Program 405
Change Station Name

Enter C.O. Line Phone Number
Page 2-115
405 Enter C.O. Line Phone Number

This program allows the user to enter the C.O. phone number of the C.O. line.
The user can enter the name in English and the C.O. phone number by using the dial
button. The characters shown below are displayed on the LCD panel according to the
number of times the same dial button is pressed. When another dial button is pressed,
the displayed character is saved and the cursor moves to the next space. Press the [A]
button to switch between capital and small letters.
[Volume]is used to move the cursor backward or forward after saving the current
character.

Dial Count
Dial Count
<
>
Space ?
1
2
pressed :
#, space, &, !, :, ?, ., ,, %, $, -, <, >, /, =, [, ], @, ^, (, ), _, +, {, }, |, ; , , ,
Default
N/A
Programmable Button
A button : Selects capital/small letters.
B button : Selects Korean/English.
Page 2-116
Display
[701] CO TEL NO.

the cursor.
[702] CO TEL NO.

_
3. Use the table above to enter the CO phone

number and press the [Right] Soft button to
repeat this procedure from step 2.
[702] CO TEL NO.

3054264100

Related Program
Program 404
Enter C.O. line Name
Page 2-117
406 Set C.O. Line Ring Mode

This program allows the user to set the recipient of an incoming C.O. call.
The C.O. line ring is sent to the station(group), and is set separately for each ring mode.
Default
1-6 : 5000(or 500)
Display
[701] TRK RING

1:500 2:500
2. Dial the C.O. line number. Or, press [Volume]

to select the C.O. line and press the [Right]
Or, press [Message] to select all C.O. lines.
[702] TRK RING

1:500 2:500
[ALL] TRK RING
1:500 2:500
3. Enter the receiving station(group) when the ring

mode is 1. Or, press [Volume] to select the phone
number and press the [Right] Soft button.
[702] TRK RING

1:510 2:500
4. Enter the receiving station(group) when the ring

mode is 2-6. Or, press [Volume] to select the
phone number and press the [Right] Soft button.
[702] TRK RING

1:510 2:201

Related Program
Program 202
Program 507
Program 601
Page 2-118

407 Disconnect C.O. Line

This program allows the user to disconnect the busy C.O. line of a specific C.O. line
or all C.O. lines.
Default
N/A
Display
[701] TRK RELS.

RELEASE? Y:1,N:0

[Volume] to select the C.O. line and press
(DS-4028E) to select all C.O. lines.
[702] TRK RELS.

RELEASE? Y:1,N:0
3. Press [1] to disconnect the busy C.O. line,

Or, press [0] not to disconnect the busy C.O. line.
[702] TRK RELS.

RELEASE? Y:1,N:0
[ALL] TRK RELS.

RELEASE? Y:1,N:0

Related Program
N/A
Page 2-119
408 Set C.O. Line MOH

This program allows the user to set the Music On Hold(MOH) when holding the C.O.
line. The system music source has one internal source and two MISC card-supported
external sources, and the phone number is 371-379. Connect the MISC card-supported
external source to the corresponding card of the terminal box. If the NONE is set as
the background music source or the source is not connected to the external music
source port set as the background music source, the user cannot listen to the music.
Default
371
Display
1. [Transfer] and [408].
[702] TRK MOH

MOH SOURCE:371

Or, press [Message](DS-24SE) or
[701] TRK MOH

MOH SOURCE:371
3. Dial the phone number of MOH(e.g. 372).

procedure from step 2. Or, press [Message]
(DS-24SE) or [ANS/RLS](DS-4028E) to set the
tone Or, press [Hold] to delete MOH.
[702] TRK MOH

MOH SOURCE:372
[ALL] TRK MOH

MOH SOURCE:?
[702] TRK MOH

MOH SOURCE:TONE

Related Program
Program 308
Program 309
Page 2-120

Set Station Music On Hold(MOH)
409 Display Program Status of C.O. Line

This program displays the current programmed status for each C.O. line. The user
can only review the status but cannot enter the details.
00
PORT
Cabinet-slot-port number
01
TYPE
C.O. line type
02
1A2 EMULATE
Emulates the call
03
TRK FORWARD
C.O. line call forward
04
LINE
C.O. line type
05
DIAL
Dial mode
06-11
TOLL TYPE 1-6
The call class of the ring mode 1-6
12-17
RING PLAN 1-6
Ring answer station of the ring mode 1-6
18
MOH SOURCE
MOH
19
DISA LINE
DISA setting status
Default
PORT
TYPE
1A2 EMULATE
TRK FORWARD
LINE
DIAL
TOLL TYPE 1-6
RING PLAN 1-6
MOH SOURCE
DISA
: Inherent C.O. line port number

: Inherent C.O. line type
: OFF
: ON
: CO LINE
: DTMF TYPE
: F-STN
: 500
: 371
: 000000
Display
[701] TRK STATUS

PORT:C1-S5-P01

[702] TRK STATUS

PORT:C1-S5-P02
3. Enter the program status type number([0]-[19])

of the C.O. line. Or, press [Volume] to select
the program status type and press the [Right]
Soft button.
[702] TRK STATUS

LINE:CO LINE
Page 2-121

Related Program
Program 400
Program 401
Program 402
Program 403
Program 406
Program 408
Program 410
Page 2-122
Set C.O Function ON/OFF

Set C.O. line Type
Set C.O. line Dial Mode
Set Call Restriction Class of C.O. line
Set C.O. line Ring Mode
Set C.O. line MOH
Set C.O. line DISA Service
410 Set C.O. Line DISA Service

This program allows the user to select whether to use the DISA service for each C.O. line.
If the station is busy, press * to try another call and press # to disconnect the DISA call.
Default
000000
Display
[701]
123456
DISA LINE:000000

[702]
123456
DISA LINE:000000
3. Select whether to use the DISA service for each

ring mode.
[702]
123456
DISA LINE:011110
[ALL]
123456
DISA LINE:000000

Related Program
Program 500
Change System Counter
Page 2-123
411 Set E1 C.O. Line Signal Mode

This program allows the user to set the service mode and the signal mode.
When there is no E1 card, the NO E1 TRUNK CARD message is displayed.
There are four E1 C.O. line service modes
0. LOOP START
1. E&M
2. DID
3. UNUSE
The signal mode shall be set as follows when
0. IMMEDIATE
E1 C.O. line is used as DID or E&M.
1. DELAYED
2. ITU_WINK
Default
UNUSE
Display
[701] E1 SIGNAL
UNUSE
2. Dial the E1 C.O. line number(e.g. 702).

Or, press [Volume] to select the E1 C.O.
the cursor. Or, press [Message](DS-24SE)
or [ANS/RLS](DS-4028E) to select all E1 C.O. lines.
[702] E1 SIGNAL
UNUSE
[ALL] E1 SIGNAL
?
3. Enter the E1 C.O. line service mode([0]-[3]).

Or, press [Volume] to select the service mode and
[702] E1 SIGNAL
DID:IMMEDIATE
4. Enter the Signal mode([0]-[2]) in case of DID

or E&M. Or, press [Volume] to select the signal
mode and press the [Right] Soft button to move
the cursor.
[702] E1 SIGNAL
DID:ITU_WINK

Related Program
Program 416
Program 714
Page 2-124
Set Private Line/DND Answering Mode

Enter the Conversion Table of Dialing a Station Directly (MCP/MCP2)
412 Set Private Line/DID C.O. Line Signal Mode

This program allows the user to set the signal mode for each E&M C.O. line.
When there is no E&M C.O. line, the NO E&M/DID TRUNK message is displayed.
There are five E&M C.O. line signal modes of as shown below.
0. IMMEDIATE START
1. DELAYED START
2. WINK START
3. NO ANSWER BACK
4. DIRECT BACK
Default
IMMEDIATE START
Display
[701] TRK SIGNAL

IMMEDIATE START
2. Dial the E&M C.O. line number(e.g. 702).

Or, press [Volume] to select the C.O. line and press
the [Right]/[Left] Soft button to move the cursor.
Or, press [Message] to select all E&M C.O. lines.
[702] TRK SIGNAL

IMMEDIATE START
3. Enter the E&M C.O. line signal mode([0]-[4]).

Press [Volume] to select the signal mode and press
[702] TRK SIGNAL

DELAYED START
[ALL] TRK SIGNAL

?

Related Program
N/A
Page 2-125
413 Set C.O. Line Voice Mail Service Type

This program allows the user to set the voice mail service type for the C.O. line as
shown below.
AP : Answering phone
AT : Information announcing and answering phone(AUDIO TEX)
AA : Auto attendant
VM : Voice mailbox service(VOICE MAIL)
This program is required only when a dedicated voice mail/AA (SVM-800) is used.
Default
AP : NO
AT : NO
AA : YES
VM : NO
Display
[701] CTYPE AP:N

AT:N AA:Y VM:N
2. Enter the C.O. line phone number(e.g. 702).

[702] CTYPE AP:N

AT:N AA:Y VM:N
3. Enter [1](YES) or [0](NO) for each item.

Or, press [Volume] to select YES/NO and
[702] CTYPE AP:N

AT:N AA:Y VM:N

Related Program
N/A
Page 2-126
414 Set Caller ID Provided C.O. Line

This program allows the user to set the analog C.O. line providing the caller ID.
The circuit detecting the caller ID shall be built in, and the service provider should be
the C.O. line providing the caller ID.
Default
NORMAL TRUNK
Display
[701] CID TRUNKS

NORMAL TRUNK
2. Enter the analog loop C.O. line number(e.g. 702).

[702] CID TRUNKS

NORMAL TRUNK
3. Set the C.O. line to offer CID([1]) or not([0]).

Or, press [Volume] to select whether to offer CID
[702] CID TRUNKS

CID TRUNK
[ALL] CID TRUNKS

NORMAL TRUNK

Related Program
Program 119
Program 312
Program 608
Program 728

Set Caller ID
Enter a Name to the Transfer Table of Caller Information (MCP/MCP2)
Page 2-127
415 Set Abandoned Call Save Status

This program allows the user to select whether to save the information of a
disconnected call due to no answer.
0
REPORT
NO The caller ID is not saved in SMDR and the abandoned call

save list.
REPORT
YES The caller ID is saved in SMDR and the caller-abandoned call

save list.
Default
REPORT : YES
Display
[701] TRK ABNDN

REPORT:YES
2. Enter the C.O. line number(e.g. 705).

[705] TRK ABNDN

REPORT:YES
3. Enter the specified item number([0]-[1]).

Or, press [Volume] to select the specified item
[705] TRK ABNDN

REPORT:YES
[ALL] TRK ABNDN

REPORT:YES

Related Program
Program 119
Program 312
Program 501
Program 608
Program 725
Program 728
Page 2-128

Set Caller ID
Enter a Name to the Transfer Table of Caller Information (MCP/MCP2)
416 Set Private Line/DID Answering Mode

This program allows the user to set the received number-processing mode when the
call is received in the private line or DID C.O. line.
In the case of the R2MFC C.O. line, only the [0] FOLLOW INCOM DGT mode and
the [1] FOLLOW DID TRANS mode are supported.
FOLLOW INCOM DGT
When receiving the call, the station(group) having the same

phone number as the received number receives the call.
FOLLOW DID TRANS
The call is answered according to the Program 714

Station Direct Dial Translation Table.
FOLLOW TRK RING
The call is answered according to the program 406 Set

C.O. Line Ring Mode. In this case, set how many phone
numbers shall be received to be provided with the call
answering service.
Default
FOLLOW INCOM DGT
Display
[701] EM/DD RING

FOLLOW INCOM DGT
2. Enter the private C.O. line number(e.g. 702).

[702] EM/DD RING

FOLLOW INCOM DGT
3. Enter the call answering service mode([0]-[2]).

Or, press [Volume] to select the service mode and
[ALL] EM/DD RING

FOLLOW INCOM DGT
[702] EM/DD RING

FOLLOW DID TRANS

Related Program
Program 406
Program 714
Set C.O. Line Ring Mode

Page 2-129
418 R2MFC Signal

This program allows the user to set the signal mode of the R2MFC signal procedure
for the C.O. line using the R2MFC dial type.
0
CLG CLS REQ
Selects whether to request the caller class to the calling party.
CLG NUM REQ
Selects whether to request the CID to the calling party.
CLD STS RESP
Selects whether the receiving party should send the receiving

party status information to the calling party.
CLG CLS RESP
Selects whether the calling party should send the class

information to the receiving party.
CLG NUM RESP
Selects whether the calling party should respond to the CID

request from the receiving party.
CLD STS REQ
CLG EXT RESP
Select whether the calling party should request the receiving

party status.
Select whether to send the station number or the C.O. line
number when CID is requested.
(OFF : C.O. line number ON : the station number)
Default
CLG CLS REQ
CLG NUM REQ
CLD STS RESP
CLG CLS RESP
CLG NUM RESP
CLD STS REQ
CLG EXT RESP
: OFF
: OFF
: OFF
: OFF
: OFF
: OFF
: OFF
Display
[701] R2MFC SIG.

CLG CLS REQ:OFF

the cursor. Or, press [Message](DS-24SE) or
[ANS/RLS](DS-4028E) to select all C.O. lines
[702] R2MFC SIG.

CLG CLS REQ:OFF
3. Press [Volume] to select the option and press the

Page 2-130
[ALL] R2MFC SIG.

CLG CLS REQ:OFF
[702] R2MFC SIG.

CLG CLS REQ:ON
4. Press (ON)[1] to use the option Or, press(OFF)[0]

not to use the option. Or, press [Volume] to select
whether to use the option(ON) or not(OFF) and
procedure from the third process.
[702] R2MFC SIG.

CLG CLS REQ:OFF

Related Program
Program 402
Program 501
Program 809
Set C.O. Line Dial Mode

Adjust Volume and Sensitivity (MCP/MCP2)
Page 2-131
419 Set Night Group for Each C.O. Line

This program allows the user to set the night group for each C.O. line. The digits
from 0 to 9(0~9) are assigned for the night group setting.
If the user uses this program, only the C.O. line included in the set night group
operates in RTO mode until the ring mode is changed or until the night group mode is
cancelled.
Default
N/A
Display
[701] NIGHT GRP

NIGHT GRP:NONE

[702] NIGHT GRP

NIGHT GRP:NONE
3. Enter the night group([0]-[9]).

Or, press [Volume] to select the night group and
[702] NIGHT GRP

NIGHT GRP:1
[ALL] NIGHT GRP

NIGHT GRP:?

Related Program
Program 406
Page 2-132
Set C.O. Line Ring Mode
420 Set PRS C.O. Line

This program allows the user to select whether the C.O. line should service PRS for
each C.O. line.
0
PRS1
Sets C.O. line to service PRS.
NONE
Sets C.O. line not to service PRS.
A C.O. line card that can detect PRS shall be used, and the C.O. line generating the
PRS signal shall be connected.
Default
N/A
Display
[701] TRK PRS
NONE

[702] TRK PRS

NONE
3. Enter the C.O. line mode([0]-[1]).

[702] TRK PRS

PRS1
[ALL] TRK PRS

NONE

Related Program
N/A
Page 2-133
421 Adjust C.O. Line Sensitivity

This program allows the user to adjust the call sensitivity of each C.O. line.
There are four modes as below to adjust the call sensitivity.
0
+0.0
No adjustment.
+1.9
Up 1. 9 dB
-6.0
Down 6. 0 dB
-2.5
Down 2. 5 dB
Default
RX : +0.0
TX : +0.0
Display
[701] TRUNK GAIN

RX:+0.0 TX:+0.0

Or, press [Message](DS-24SE)
or [ANS/RLS](DS-4028E) to select all C.O. lines.
[702] TRUNK GAIN

RX:+0.0 TX:+0.0
3. Enter the received call sensitivity([0]-[3]).

Or, press [Volume] to select the received call
sensitivity and press the [Right] Soft button to
move the cursor.
[702] TRUNK GAIN

RX:+1.9 TX:+0.0
4. Enter the sent call sensitivity([0]-[3]).

Or, press [Volume] to select the sent call sensitivity
[702] TRUNK GAIN

RX:+1.9 TX:+1.9
[ALL] TRUNK GAIN

RX:+0.0 TX:+0.0

Related Program
N/A
Page 2-134
422 Set Standard Sensitivity for Each C.O. Line (MCP2)

This program allows the user to adjust the standard sensitivity for each C.O. line.
The range is from -10 DB to +20 dB
Default
R : +0 dB
T : +0 dBDICKINSON
Display
[701] TMC GAIN

R:+0 dB T:+0 dB

line and press the [Right] Soft button to
move the cursor. Or, press [Message](DS-24SE) or
[702] TMC GAIN

R:+0 dB T:+0 dB
3. Enter the received call standard sensitivity

([00]-[30] : -10dB ~ +20dB).
Or, press [Volume] to select the received call
standard sensitivity and press the [Right]
[702] TMC GAIN

R:+1 dB T:+0 dB
4. Enter the sent call standard sensitivity

([00]-[30] : -10dB ~ +20dB).
Or, press [Volume] to select the sent call
standard sensitivity and press the
[702] TMC GAIN

R:+1 dB T:+1 dB
[ALL] TMC GAIN

R:+0 dB T:+0 dB

Related Program
N/A
Page 2-135
423 BRI S/T Mode

This program allows the user to select whether each BRI port should be used as the
station or the C.O. line.
0
TRUNK
Used as the C.O. line
STATION
Used as the station
The NO BRI CARD message is displayed when there is no BRI card. Since the
selected BRI station/C.O. line operates in pairs, the same value is saved.
Default
TRUNK
Display
[701] S/T MODE

TRUNK
2. Dial the BRI phone number(e.g. 703).

Or, press [Volume] to select the BRI port and
(DS-4028E) to select all BRI ports.
[703] S/T MODE

TRUNK
3. Enter the C.O. line/station([0], [1]).

line/station and press the [Right] Soft
button to repeat this procedure from step 2.
[703] S/T MODE

STATION
[ALL] S/T MODE

TRUNK

Related Program
Program 424
Program 425
Program 428
Page 2-136
Set ISDN Phone Connection Port

Reset ISDN Card
Set BRI Option
424 Set ISDN Phone Connection Port

This program allows the user to set the BRI station number connected to each ISDN
phone.
Default
N/A
Display
[8701] S0 MAPPING
NONE
2. Dial the ISDN phone number.

Or, press [Volume] to select the IDSN phone
[8702] S0 MAPPING
NONE
3. Dial the BRI station phone number.

Or, press [Volume] to select the BRI station
and press the [Right] Soft button to repeat
this procedure from step 2.
[8702] S0 MAPPING
703

Related Program
Program 423
Program 428
BRI S/T Mode

Set BRI Option
Page 2-137
425 Reset ISDN Card

This program allows the user to reset the IDSN card of iDCS 500 such as the TEPRI
card, PRI card or the BRI card. The NO BRI/PRI CARD message is displayed
when there is no ISDN card.
Default
N/A
Display
[701] RESTART
CARD RESTART?NO
2. Dial the first C.O. line number in the ISDN card.

Or, press [Volume] to select the card and press
the [Right] Soft button.
[701] RESTART
CARD RESTART?NO
3. Enter NO[0], or YES[1].

Or, press [Volume] to select YES/NO and press
the [Right] Soft button. When NO is selected,
this procedure from step 2 is restarted.
[701] RESTART
ARE YOU SURE?NO
4. Enter NO[0], or YES[1] again.

When YES is selected, the card is reset.
[701] RESTART
CARD RESTART?NO

Related Program
Program 423
Program 426
Program 427
Program 428
Page 2-138
BRI S/T Mode

Set E1/PRI CRC4 Option
Set PRI Option
Set BRI Option
426 Set E1/PRI CRC4 Option

This program allows the user to select whether to create and detect CRC4 during the
E1 or PRI service. This program is available on networks offering the CRC4 frame
service.
After changing this program, execute Program 425 Reset ISDN Card to make the
settings effective.
Default
N/A
Display
[701] E1/PRI CRC

ON
2. Enter the first C.O. line number of the PRI card.

Or, press [Volume] to select the C.O. line number,
[701] E1/PRI CRC

ON
3. Enter ON or OFF.
Or, press [Volume] to select ON or OFF,
[701] E1/PRI CRC

OFF

Related Program
Program 425
Reset ISDN Card
Page 2-139
427 Set PRI Option

This program allows the user to set the option for each PRI C.O. line. There are five
PRI C.O. line modes as shown below.
CHANNEL ANY
Sets 0 as YES and 1 as NO.
PRI MODE
Sets 0 as NORMAL and 1 as DDI.
DLSEND
Sets 0 as ENBLOCK and 1 as OVERLAP.
CLIP TABLE
Sets the number of the CID list in the program 321 that will be used
for sending.
NB TYPE
Sets the CID type as 0(UNKNOWN ) or as 1(INT NAT).
Default
CHANNEL ANY
PRI MODE
DLSEND
CLIP TABLE
NB TYPE
: YES
: DDI
: OVERLAP
: NONE
: UNKNOWN
2. Enter the PRI C.O. line number.

Display
[704] PRI OPTION
CHANNEL ANY:YES
[704] PRI OPTION

CHANNEL ANY:YES
[704] PRI OPTION
DLSEND :OVERLAP
3. Press [Volume] to select the DLSEND mode.

Press [Volume] to move the cursor on
ENBLOCK/OVERLAP, and select
ENBLOCK/OVERLAP, and then press
[704] PRI OPTION

DLSEND :ENBLOCK
4. Press [Volume] to select the PRI MODE.

Press [Volume] to move the cursor on DDI/NORMAL
and select DDI/NORMAL, and then press the
[704] PRI OPTION

PRI MODE:DDI
[704] PRI OPTION

PRI MODE:DDI

Page 2-140
Related Program
Program 425
Program 714
Reset ISDN Card

Enter the Conversion Table of Dialing a Station Directly
Page 2-141
428 Set BRI Option

This program allows the user to set the option for each BRI C.O. line. The NO BRI
CARD message is displayed when there is no BRI card.
Since the selected station/C.O. line operates in pairs, the same value is saved.
There are five BRI C.O. line modes.
0
CHANNEL ANY
Sets 1 as YES and 0 as NO
BRI MODE
Sets 0 as P-P NOR, 1 as P-P DDI, 2 as P-M NOR, and 3 as
DLSEND
Sets 0 as ENBLOCK and 1 as OVERLAP
CLIP TABLE
Sets the number of the CID list in the program 323 that will be
NB TYPE
P-M MSN.
used for sending.

Sets the CID type as 0(Unknown) or 1(INT NAT).
There are two BRI station types.

0
CHANNEL ANY
POWER FEED
Default
CHANNEL ANY : YES
BRI MODE
: P-P DDI
DLSEND
: OVERLAP
CLIP TABLE
: NONE
NB TYPE
: UNKNOWN
POWER FEED : NO
Page 2-142
1.
Press [Transfer] and [428].
Display
[701] BRI-TRK
CHANNEL ANY:YES

[702] BRI-TRK
CHANNEL AN:YES
3. Enter the option item number([0]-[4]).

Or, press [Volume] to select the option item and
[702] BRI-TRK
BRI MODE:P-P DDI
4. Enter the option value.

Or, press [Volume] to select the option value and
[702] BRI-TRK
BRI MODE:P-P NOR

Related Program
Program 423
Program 425
Program 714
BRI S/T Mode

Reset ISDN Card
Enter the Conversion Table of Dialing a Station Directly
Page 2-143
429 Set MSN Mode

This program allows the user to set the switch table to be used when using the BRI
C.O. line as the MSN mode.
The NO BRI CARD message is displayed when there is no BRI card.
Since the selected BRI C.O. line operates in pairs, the same value is saved.
Default
1-6 : NONE
CW : YES
OPT : ACCEPT
Display
[701] MSN DGT(1)

DGT:

[701] MSN DGT(1)

DGT:Or press [Volume] to
3. Enter the MSN block number ([1]-[8]).

Or, press [Volume] to select the block number and
[701] MSN DGT(2)

1:201 2:201
4. Enter the details of the connected dial and press

[701] MSN DGT(2)

DGT:12345201
5. Enter the connected station number for each ring mode.

Or, press [Volume] to select the station number
[701] MSN DGT(2)

1:NONE 2:NONE
6. Enter the camp on option while calling.

Or, press [Volume] to select the option and press
[701] MSN DGT(2)

CW:YES OPT:ACEPT
7. Select whether to receive the corresponding number.

Or, press [Volume] to select ACEPT/REJECT and
[701] MSN DGT(2)

CW:NO OPT:ACEPT

Page 2-144
Related Program
Program 425
Program 428
Reset ISDN Card

Set BRI Option
Page 2-145
430 Set C.O. Line Service Level

This program allows the user to set the service level when the ring mode for each
C.O. line is 1-6.
There are thirty service levels ([01]-[30]) as described in Program 701 Service Level
Table.
Default
1-6 : 01
1.
Press [Transfer] and [430].
Display
[701] TRK COS
1:01 2:01 3:01

[705] TRK COS

1:01 2:01 3:01

mode is 1.
Or, press [Volume] to select thes ervice level and
[705] TRK COS

1:01 2:01 3:01

mode is 2-6.
Or, press [Volume] to select the service level and
[705] TRK COS

1:02 2:01 3:01
[ALL] TRK COS

1:01 2:01 3:01

Related Program
Program 701
Page 2-146
Service Level Table
433 Set C.O. Line Billing Table (MCP/MCP2)

This program allows the user to select whether to use the billing rate table for each
C.O. line.
This program is not applicable to iDCS-M systems equipped with the MCP board.
Default
00000000
Display
[701] :12345678
CR
:00000000

[702] :12345678
CR
:00000000
3. Select whether to use the billing rate table

([0]-[1]) for each billing rate table number,
and press the [Right] Soft button to save the data.
[ALL] :12345678
CR
:00000000
[702] :12345678
CR
:11100000

Related Program
Program 748
Program 749
Enter a Number Ticket for Billing (MCP/MCP2)

Charge Rate (MCP/MCP2)
Page 2-147
434 Display Connection Status

This program allows the user to review the connection status of the station or the C.O.
line. The user can review the status but cannot enter the details.
The status is displayed during the call, and all conference members are displayed
during conference. BUSY is displayed when dialing or when the connection status
is not displayed.
Default
N/A
Display
DISPLAY STATUS
701 IDLE
2. Enter the C.O. line or the station number.

Or press [Volume] to select the C.O. line or
the station number.
DISPLAY STATUS
702 IDLE
In the pause status.
In the busy line status.
DISPLAY STATUS
703 203
In the conference call status.
DISPLAY STATUS
211 212 705
In the case that it is not in the pause status and

there is no counterpart to call with.
DISPLAY STATUS
221 BUSY
In the case that the maintenance status is set.
Page 2-148
DISPLAY STATUS
702 IDLE
DISPLAY STATUS
721 MADE BUSY

Related Program
N/A
Page 2-149
436 Set Insertion Digit for Conversion

This program allows the user to enter the insertion digit when the user converts the
received number from the dedicated line or the DID C.O. line to answer the call or to
offer the TANDEM service(C.O. to C.O., C.O. to dedicated line, and dedicated line to
C.O.)
Default
N/A
Display
[701] INSERT DGT

NONE
2. Enter the number.

Or, press [Message](DS-24SE)or [ANS/RLS]
[702] INSERT DGT

NONE
3. Enter up to four digits and press the [Right] Soft

button to save it.
[702] INSERT DGT

67
[ALL] INSERT DGT

NONE

Related Program
Program 714
Page 2-150
500 Change System Counter

This program allows the user to change the system counter. Press [Hold] while
entering data to delete the entered data.
0
ALARM REM. CNTER
The number of times the alarm is regenerated when
(01-99)
the station alarm is not answered.

1
AUTO RDL COUNTER
DISA CALL CNTER
The number of redials enabled by a single operation
(01-99)
during auto redial.

The number of station calls that can be made when
(01-99)
using DISA.
3
DISA LOCK CNTER
The number of retries to lock the port when the DISA
(01-99)
user enters the wrong passcode.

4
NEW CALL COUNTER
The number of times a C.O. line can be reused when
(01-99)
calling through the C.O. line.

5
UCDS VISUAL ALAM
The number of queues that generates alarms to LED
(01-25)
and LCD during auto call distribution. This function is

disabled when the value is set as 0.
6
UCDS AUDIO ALARM
The number of queues that generates alarm rings
(01-25)
during auto call distribution. This function is disabled

when the value is set as 0.
7
UCD CS LEVEL 1
The number of level 1 calls that notifies the queue
(01-25)
status to LED during auto call distribution. This function

is disabled when the value is set as 0.
8
UCD CS LEVEL 2
The number of level 2 calls that notifies the queue
(01-25)
status to LED during auto call distribution. This function

is disabled when the value is set as 0.
Default
ALARM REM. CNTER
AUTO RDL COUNTER
DISA CALL CNTER
DISA LOCK CNTER
NEW CALL COUNTER
UCDS VISUAL ALAM
UCDS AUDIO ALARM
UCD CS LEVEL 1
UCD CS LEVEL 2
: 05
: 03
: 99
: 03
: 99
: 00
: 00
: 00
: 00
Page 2-151
Display
ALARM REM.CNTER
05
2. Enter the counter number([0]-[8]).

Or, press [Volume] to select the counter number
ALARM REM.CNTER
05 _
3. Enter the count.
ALARM REM.CNTER
02

Related Program
Program 501
Page 2-152
501 Change System Time Variable (MCP/MCP2)

This program is described respectively for systems with the MCP and MCP2 board.
MCP
This program allows the user to change the system time variables of each system.
The system variables are listed below, and the content in ( ) represents the range of
the data and the time variable unit.
System Time Variables
00. AA INT DGT TIME
Description
Maximum duration time for dialing the next number
Data Range
& Unit
(1-25 sec)
when using AA
01. AA NO ACT TIME
Maximum duration time for dialing the first number
(1-25 sec)
when using AA
02. AA TRANS TIME
The time the digit entered is transferred after being
(0-25 sec)
analyzed to check if the digit matches the digit in
Program 732 when using AA.

03. ALARM TIME
The time when the system alarm is regenerated
(0-2500 min)
when the alarm is not deleted after response.

(iDCS-L system only)
04. ALERT TONE TIME
Alarm ring duration time.
(100-2500
msec)
05. ALM REM.INTERVAL
The alarm generation cycle for the alarm set in
(1-250 sec)
Program 112/116.
06. ALM REM.RING OFF
Ring disable time when there is no response for
(1-25 sec)
the alarm set in Program 112/116.

07. ATT RECALL TIME
The attendant recall time when there is no response
(0-250 sec)
for the recall. Exits without recall when set as 0 sec .

08. AUTO REDIAL INT.
Redial attempt interval in auto redial mode.
(1-250 sec)
09. AUTO REDIAL RLS.
Redial release time when there is no response
(1-250 sec)
while the auto redial was successful.

11. BOOKING INT TIME
Call attempt interval through a new C.O. line during
(1-255 sec)
Booking.
12
BOOKING DELAY TM
Time until the tone receiver is attached to detect the
(1~25 sec)
busy tone after calling through C.O. line during

Booking.
13. BOOKING DET TIME
Duration time for detecting the busy tone after
(2~255 sec)
attaching the tone receiver during Booking. If busy

tone is not detected within this time, the call is
considered as connected.
Page 2-153

15. CALLBACK NO ANS
16. CAMP ON RECALL
Data Range
Description
& Unit
The Callback cancel time when there is no answer.
(1-250 sec)
The recall time when there is no answer while
(0-250 sec)
camp on is set.
17. CID DISPLAY TM
CID display duration time
(1-25 sec)
18. CID MSG RECEIVE
CID retrieve time on analog C.O. line
(1-25 sec)
20. CO CONFIRM TIME
Time to generate alarms or restrict calls during
(0-250 min)
C.O. line calls.

21. CO-CO DISCONNECT
Maximum connection time for calls between C.O.
(1-250 min)
lines
23. CONFIRM TONE TM
Time to generate confirm tone.
(100-2500 msec)
(Entered on 100ms basis)

24. CRD TONE INT TM
Tone interval while recording call with the SVMi-8
(0-250 sec)
card.
27. DIAL PASS TIME
Delay time until the C.O. line call is connected to
(0-25 sec)
the channel after dialing.

28. DISA DISCONNECT
Call duration time for a single call when received
(1-250 min)
through DISA.
30. DISA LOCK OUT TM
DISA lock duration time.
(1-250 min)
31. DISA NOANS DISC.
Time to disconnect DISA call when there is no answer
(0-250 sec)
32. DISA PASS CHECK
A certain number of errors during this time will lock
(1-250 min)
DISA.
33. DISPLAY DELAY TM
LCD message display duration time.
(1-250 sec)
34. DOOR LOCK RELES.
Door open time.(Entered on 100ms basis)
(100-2500
msec)
35. DOOR RING DETECT
Door phone ring detect time(Entered on 10ms basis)
(10-250 msec)
36. DOOR RING OFF TM
Time to release ring when there is no answer for
(1-250 sec)
the door phone.

37. E-HOLD RECALL TM
Recall time during station hold.
(0-250 sec)
39. FIRST DIGIT TIME
The time for which the first digit should be pressed.
(1-250 sec)
40. HOK FLASH MAX TM
Maximum hook-flash time of normal stations
(20-2500 msec)

41. HOK FLASH MIN TM
Minimum hook-flash time of normal stations
(20-2500 msec)

42. HOOK OFF TIME
Minimum hook off detection time of normal
(20-2500 msec)
stations.
Page 2-154

43. HOOK ON TIME
Description
Minimum hook on detection time of normal
Data Range
& Unit
(20-2500 msec)
stations.
44. INQUIRY RELEASE
Time to exit message inquiry due to no input.
(1-250 sec)
45. INTER DIGIT TIME
Maximum time between digits.
(1-250 sec)
Maximum duration time until dialing next number
(1-15 sec)
46. ISDN INT DGT TM
when calling through ISDN C.O. line(BRI or PRI).

47. KMMC LOCK OUT TM
MMC disable time when there is no operation.
(10-250 sec)
48. LCR ADVANCE TIME
Time to advance to next C.O. group for LCR
(1-250 sec)
49. LCR INTER DIGIT
Maximum time between digits for LCR.
(1-250 sec)
51. MS LED ON TIME
The RED ON time of the other partys phone when
(0-10 sec)
the MS key is pressed.(iDCS-L system only)

52. OFF HOK RING INT
Off hook ring interval.
(1-250 sec)
54. OHVA ANSWER TIME
Time to disconnect when there is no answer for
(1-250 sec)
OHVA.
55. PAGE TIME OUT
Maximum external page time.
(1-250 sec)
56. PAGE TONE TIME
Time to generate confirmation tone when listening
(100-2500 msec)
to page.(Entered on 100ms basis)

57. PARK RECALL TIME
The recall time of parked call.
(0-250 sec)
58. PC-MMC LOCK TIME
Time to disconnect call due to no operation during
(1-60 min)
PCMMC.
59. PERI UCD REPORT
Cycle for the UCD statistic data to be sent to IO.
(3-99 sec)
60. POWER DOWN TIME
Power Down duration time when disconnecting
(100-9900 msec)
SLI.(Entered on 100ms basis)

61. R/D RING ON
Maximum response time for Ring Down C.O. calls
(1-60 sec)
62. R/D SIGNAL ON
Duration time of actual ring of calls incoming
(1-30 sec)
through Ring Down C.O. line

63. R2MFC INCOM TIME
Maximum incoming time of all signals for R2MFC
(10-30 sec)
signaling.
64. R2MFC INTER TIME
Maximum incoming time of a single signal for
(2000-7000 msec)
R2MFC signaling.(Entered on 100ms basis)

65. R2MFC OUTGO TIME
Maximum outgoing time of all signals for R2MFC
(10-30 sec)
signaling
66. RECALL
DISCONNECT
67. RECALL WAIT TIME
Time to disconnect calls recalled to attendant when
(1-250 min)
there is no answer
Wait time until the call is recalled to attendant when the
(0-250 sec)
station is busy. Exits without recall when set as 0 sec.
Page 2-155
Data Range
Description
& Unit
68. SMDR START /DP
SMDR start time of Dial Pulse C.O. line.
(1-250 sec)
69. SMDR START /DTMF
SMDR start time of DTMF C.O. line.
(1-250 sec)
70. ROUTE OPTIMISE
Duration time until connecting to optimal route after
(0-250 sec)
Q-Sig connection.
71. SYS HOLD RECALL
Recall time for commonly hold calls
(0-250 sec)
72. TEMP RBACK TONE
Time to generate virtual ringback tone for R2
(200-9900 MS)
outgoing calls.
73. TRANSFER RECALL
Recall time when there is no answer for the
(0-250 sec)
transferred call.
74. TSW CONN. DELAY
Duration time until channel is provided to the
(0-10 sec)
incoming C.O. line when the incoming C.O. call is

forwarded to another C.O. line.
75. UCDS AUDIO ALARM
Alarm ring is generated when the wait time at UCD
(0-990 sec)
group exceeds this time.(Entered on 10sec basis)

76. UCDS VISUAL ALAM
Alarm message is displayed when the wait time at
(0-990 sec)
UCD group exceeds this time.

78. VOICE DIAL DELAY
Maximum time required when searching for the
(05-15 sec)
identical voice during voice dial.
Default
00.
01.
02.
03.
04.
05.
06.
07.
08.
09.
11.
12.
13.
15.
16.
17.
18.
20.
21.
Page 2-156
AA INT DGT TIME

AA NO ACT TIME
AA TRANS TIME
ALARM TIME
ALERT TONE TIME
ALM REM.INTERVAL
ALM REM.RING OFF
ATT RECALL TIME
AUTO REDIAL INT.
AUTO REDIAL RLS.
BOOKING INT TIME
BOOKING DELAY TM
BOOKING DET TIME
CALLBACK NO ANS
CAMP ON RECALL
CID DISPLAY TM
CID MSG RECEIVE
CO CONFIRM TIME
CO-CO DISCONNECT
: 5 sec
: 10 sec
: 2 sec
: 100 min
: 1000sec
: 25 sec
: 10 sec
: 30 sec
: 30 sec
: 45 sec
: 2 sec
: 2 sec
: 3 sec
: 30 sec
: 30 sec
: 5 sec
: 6 sec
: 3 min
: 20 min
23.
24.
27.
28.
30.
31.
32.
33.
34.
35.
36.
37.
39.
40.
41.
42.
43.
44.
45.
46.
47.
48.
49.
51.
52.
54.
55.
56.
57.
58.
59.
60.
61.
62.
63.
64.
65.
66.
67.
68.
69.
70.
71.
CONFIRM TONE TM
CRD TONE INT TM
DIAL PASS TIME
DISA DISCONNECT
DISA LOCK OUT TM
DISA NOANS DISC.
DISA PASS CHECK
DISPLAY DELAY TM
DOOR LOCK RELES.
DOOR RING DETECT
DOOR RING OFF TM
E-HOLD RECALL TM
FIRST DIGIT TIME
HOK FLASH MAX TM
HOK FLASH MIN TM
HOOK OFF TIME
HOOK ON TIME
INQUIRY RELEASE
INTER DIGIT TIME
ISDN INT DGT TM
KMMC LOCK OUT TM
LCR ADVANCE TIME
LCR INTER DIGIT
MS LED ON TIME
OFF HOK RING INT
OHVA ANSWER TIME
PAGE TIME OUT
PAGE TONE TIME
PARK RECALL TIME
PC-MMC LOCK TIME
PERI UCD REPORT
POWER DOWN TIME
R/D RING ON
R/D SIGNAL ON
R2MFC INCOM TIME
R2MFC INTER TIME
R2MFC OUTGO TIME
RECALL DISCONNECT
RECALL WAIT TIME
SMDR START /DP
SMDR START /DTMF
ROUTE OPTIMISE
SYS HOLD RECALL
: 1000 msec
: 30 sec
: 3 sec
: 30 min
: 30 min
: 30 sec
: 30 min
: 2 sec
: 500 msec
: 50 msec
: 30 sec
: 45 sec
: 10 sec
: 800 msec
: 350 msec
: 100 msec
: 1000 msec
: 30 sec
: 10 sec
: 7 sec
: 60 sec
: 5 sec
: 5 sec
: 5 sec
: 15 sec
: 10 sec
: 20 sec
: 500 msec
: 45 sec
: 5 min
: 5 sec
: 2000 msec
: 15 sec
: 2 sec
: 14 sec
: 2500 msec
: 14 sec
: 2 min
: 15 sec
: 30 sec
: 15 sec
: 10 sec
: 45 sec
Page 2-157
72.
73.
74.
75.
76.
78.
TEMP RBACK TONE

TRANSFER RECALL
TSW CONN.DELAY
UCDS AUDIO ALARM
UCDS VISUAL ALAM
VOICE DIAL DELAY
: 1000 msec
: 20 sec
: 0 sec
: 0 sec
: 0 sec
: 8 sec
Display
AA INT DGT TIME

05 sec
2. Enter the time variable number([00]-[78]).

Or, press [Volume] to select the time variable and
TRANSFER RECALL
20 sec _
3. Enter the system time variable as a value within

the range.
TRANSFER RECALL
10 sec

Related Program
Program 101
Program 301
Program 701
Page 2-158
Change Subscriber Password

Service Level Table
MCP2
This program allows the user to change the system time variables of each system.
The system variables are listed below, and the content in ( ) represents the range of
00. AA INT DGT TIME
Description
Maximum duration time for dialing the next number
Data Range
& Unit
(1-25 sec)
when using AA
01. AA NO ACT TIME
Maximum duration time for dialing the first number
(1-25 sec)
when using AA
02. AA TRANS TIME
The time the digit entered is transferred after being
(0-25 sec)
analyzed to check if the digit matches the digit in
Program 732 when using AA.

03. ALARM TIME
The time when the system alarm is regenerated
(0-2500 min)
when the alarm is not deleted after response.

(iDCS-L system only)
04. ALERT TONE TIME
Alarm ring duration time.
(100-2500 msec)
05. ALM REM.INTERVAL
The alarm generation cycle for the alarm set in
(1-250 sec)
Program 112/116.
06. ALM REM.RING OFF
Ring disable time when there is no response for
(1-25 sec)
the alarm set in Program 112/116.

07. ATT RECALL TIME
The attendant recall time when there is no response
(0-250 sec)
for the recall. Exits without recall when set as 0 sec .

08. AUTO REDIAL INT.
Redial attempt interval in auto redial mode.
(1-250 sec)
09. AUTO REDIAL RLS.
Redial release time when there is no response
(1-250 sec)
while the auto redial was successful.

11. BOOKING INT TIME
Call attempt interval through a new C.O. line during
(1-255 sec)
Booking.
12
BOOKING DELAY TM
Time until the tone receiver is attached to detect the
(1~25 sec)
busy tone after calling through C.O. line during

Booking.
13. BOOKING DET TIME
Duration time for detecting the busy tone after
(2~255 sec)
attaching the tone receiver during Booking. If busy

tone is not detected within this time, the call is
considered as connected.
15. CALLBACK NO ANS
The Callback cancel time when there is no answer.
(1-250 sec)
16. CAMP ON RECALL
The recall time when there is no answer while camp
(0-250 sec)
on is set.
Page 2-159
Data Range
Description
& Unit
17. CID DISPLAY TM
CID display duration time
(1-25 sec)
18. CID MSG RECEIVE
CID retrieve time on analog C.O. line
(1-25 sec)
20. CO CONFIRM TIME
Time to generate alarms or restrict calls during
(0-250 min)
C.O. line calls.

21. CO-CO DISCONNECT
Maximum connection time for calls between C.O.
(1-250 min)
lines
23. CONFIRM TONE TM
24. CRD TONE INT TM
Time to generate confirm tone.
(100-2500
msec)
Tone interval while recording call with the SVMi-8
(0-250 sec)
card.
27. DIAL PASS TIME
Delay time until the C.O. line call is connected to
(0-25 sec)
the channel after dialing.

28. DISA DISCONNECT
Call duration time for a single call when received
(1-250 min)
through DISA.
30. DISA LOCK OUT TM
DISA lock duration time.
(1-250 min)
31. DISA NOANS DISC.
Time to disconnect DISA call when there is no
(0-250 sec)
answer
32. DISA PASS CHECK
A certain number of errors during this time will lock
(1-250 min)
DISA.
33. DISPLAY DELAY TM
LCD message display duration time.
(1-250 sec)
34. DOOR LOCK RELES.
Door open time.(Entered on 100ms basis)
(100-2500 msec)
35. DOOR RING DETECT
Door phone ring detect time(Entered on 10ms basis)
(10-250 msec)
36. DOOR RING OFF TM
Time to release ring when there is no answer for
(1-250 sec)
the door phone.

37. E-HOLD RECALL TM
Recall time during station hold.
(0-250 sec)
39. FIRST DIGIT TIME
The time for which the first digit should be
(1-250 sec)
pressed.
40. HOK FLASH MAX TM
Maximum hook-flash time of normal stations
(20-2500 msec)

41. HOK FLASH MIN TM
Minimum hook-flash time of normal stations
(20-2500 msec)

42. HOOK OFF TIME
Minimum hook off detection time of normal stations.
(20-2500 msec)
43. HOOK ON TIME
Minimum hook on detection time of normal stations.
(20-2500 msec)
44. INQUIRY RELEASE
Time to exit message inquiry due to no input.
(1-250 sec)
45. INTER DIGIT TIME
Maximum time between digits.
(1-250 sec)
46. ISDN INT DGT TM
Maximum duration time until dialing next number
(1-15 sec)
when calling through ISDN C.O. line(BRI or PRI).

47. KMMC LOCK OUT TM
Page 2-160
MMC disable time when there is no operation.
(10-250 sec)
Description
Data Range
& Unit
48. LCR ADVANCE TIME
Time to advance to next C.O. group for LCR
(1-250 sec)
49. LCR INTER DIGIT
Maximum time between digits for LCR.
(1-250 sec)
50. LONG KEY DETECT
Time criteria for detecting Long Key
(0-1200 msec)
51. LONG KEY REPEAT
The time interval processing the pressed key as a
(0-1200 msec)
new entry when the key is still pressed after Long

Key detection.
53. MS LED ON TIME
The RED ON time of the other partys phone when
(0-10 sec)
the MS key is pressed.(iDCS-L system only)

54. OFF HOK RING INT
Off hook ring interval.
(1-250 sec)
56. OHVA ANSWER TIME
Time to disconnect when there is no answer for
(1-250 sec)
OHVA.
57. PAGE TIME OUT
Maximum external page time.
(1-250 sec)
58. PAGE TONE TIME
Time to generate confirmation tone when listening
(100-2500 msec)
59. PARK RECALL TIME
The recall time of parked call.
(0-250 sec)
60. PC-MMC LOCK TIME
Time to disconnect call due to no operation during
(1-60 min)
61. PERI UCD REPORT
Cycle for the UCD statistic data to be sent to IO.
(3-99 sec)
62. POWER DOWN TIME
Power Down duration time when disconnecting
(100-9900 msec)
to page.(Entered on 100ms basis)
PCMMC.
SLI.(Entered on 100ms basis)

63. R/D RING ON
Maximum response time for Ring Down C.O. calls
(1-60 sec)
64. R/D SIGNAL ON
Duration time of actual ring of calls incoming
(1-30 sec)
through Ring Down C.O. line

65. R2MFC INCOM TIME
Maximum incoming time of all signals for R2MFC
(10-30 sec)
signaling.
66. R2MFC INTER TIME
Maximum incoming time of a single signal for
(2000-7000 msec)
R2MFC signaling.(Entered on 100ms basis)

67. R2MFC OUTGO TIME
Maximum outgoing time of all signals for R2MFC
(10-30 sec)
signaling
68. RECALL
DISCONNECT
69. RECALL WAIT TIME
Time to disconnect calls recalled to attendant when
(1-250 min)
there is no answer
Wait time until the call is recalled to attendant
(0-250 sec)
when the station is busy. Exits without recall when

set as 0 sec.
70. SMDR START /DP
SMDR start time of Dial Pulse C.O. line.
(1-250 sec)
71. SMDR START /DTMF
SMDR start time of DTMF C.O. line.
(1-250 sec)
Page 2-161

72. ROUTE OPTIMISE
Data Range
Description
& Unit
Duration time until connecting to optimal route
(0-250 sec)
after Q-Sig connection.

73. SYS HOLD RECALL
Recall time for commonly hold calls
(0-250 sec)
74. TEMP RBACK TONE
Time to generate virtual ringback tone for R2
(200-9900 MS)
outgoing calls.
75. TRANSFER RECALL
Recall time when there is no answer for the
(0-250 sec)
transferred call.
76. TSW CONN. DELAY
Duration time until channel is provided to the
(0-10 sec)
incoming C.O. line when the incoming C.O. call is

forwarded to another C.O. line.
77. UCDS AUDIO ALARM
Alarm ring is generated when the wait time at
(0-990 sec)

(Entered on 10sec basis)
78. UCDS VISUAL ALAM
Alarm message is displayed when the wait time at
(0-990 sec)

80. VOICE DIAL DELAY
Maximum time required when searching for the
(05-15 sec)
identical voice during voice dial.
Default
00.
01.
02.
03.
04.
05.
06.
07.
08.
09.
11.
12.
13.
15.
16.
17.
18.
20.
21.
23.
Page 2-162
AA INT DGT TIME

AA NO ACT TIME
AA TRANS TIME
ALARM TIME
ALERT TONE TIME
ALM REM.INTERVAL
ALM REM.RING OFF
ATT RECALL TIME
AUTO REDIAL INT.
AUTO REDIAL RLS.
BOOKING INT TIME
BOOKING DELAY TM
BOOKING DET TIME
CALLBACK NO ANS
CAMP ON RECALL
CID DISPLAY TM
CID MSG RECEIVE
CO CONFIRM TIME
CO-CO DISCONNECT
CONFIRM TONE TM
: 5 sec
: 10 sec
: 2 sec
: 100 min
: 1000sec
: 25 sec
: 10 sec
: 30 sec
: 30 sec
: 45 sec
: 2 sec
: 2 sec
: 3 sec
: 30 sec
: 30 sec
: 5 sec
: 6 sec
: 3 min
: 20 min
: 1000 msec
24.
27.
28.
30.
31.
32.
33.
34.
35.
36.
37.
39.
40.
41.
42.
43.
44.
45.
46.
47.
48.
49.
50.
51.
53.
54.
56.
57.
58.
59.
60.
61.
62.
63.
64.
65.
66.
67.
68.
69.
70.
71.
72.
CRD TONE INT TM

DIAL PASS TIME
DISA DISCONNECT
DISA LOCK OUT TM
DISA NOANS DISC.
DISA PASS CHECK
DISPLAY DELAY TM
DOOR LOCK RELES.
DOOR RING DETECT
DOOR RING OFF TM
E-HOLD RECALL TM
FIRST DIGIT TIME
HOK FLASH MAX TM
HOK FLASH MIN TM
HOOK OFF TIME
HOOK ON TIME
INQUIRY RELEASE
INTER DIGIT TIME
ISDN INT DGT TM
KMMC LOCK OUT TM
LCR ADVANCE TIME
LCR INTER DIGIT
LONG KEY DETECT
LONG KEY REPEAT
MS LED ON TIME
OFF HOK RING INT
OHVA ANSWER TIME
PAGE TIME OUT
PAGE TONE TIME
PARK RECALL TIME
PC-MMC LOCK TIME
PERI UCD REPORT
POWER DOWN TIME
R/D RING ON
R/D SIGNAL ON
R2MFC INCOM TIME
R2MFC INTER TIME
R2MFC OUTGO TIME
RECALL DISCONNECT
RECALL WAIT TIME
SMDR START /DP
SMDR START /DTMF
ROUTE OPTIMISE
: 30 sec
: 3 sec
: 30 min
: 30 min
: 30 sec
: 30 min
: 2 sec
: 500 msec
: 50 msec
: 30 sec
: 45 sec
: 10 sec
: 800 msec
: 350 msec
: 100 msec
: 1000 msec
: 30 sec
: 10 sec
: 7 sec
: 60 sec
: 5 sec
: 5 sec
: 600 msec
: 300 msec
: 5 sec
: 15 sec
: 10 sec
: 20 sec
: 500 msec
: 45 sec
: 5 min
: 5 sec
: 2000 msec
: 15 sec
: 2 sec
: 14 sec
: 2500 msec
: 14 sec
: 2 min
: 15 sec
: 30 sec
: 15 sec
: 10 sec
Page 2-163
73.
74.
75.
76.
77.
78.
80.
SYS HOLD RECALL

TEMP RBACK TONE
TRANSFER RECALL
TSW CONN.DELAY
UCDS AUDIO ALARM
UCDS VISUAL ALAM
VOICE DIAL DELAY
: 45 sec
: 1000 msec
: 20 sec
: 0 sec
: 0 sec
: 0 sec
: 8 sec
Display
AA INT DGT TIME

05 sec

Or, press [Volume] to select the time variable
number and press the [Right] Soft button to
move the cursor.
TRANSFER RECALL
20 sec _
3. Enter the system time variable as a value

within the range.
TRANSFER RECALL
10 sec

Related Program
Program 101
Program 301
Program 701
Page 2-164
Change Subscriber Password

Service Level Table
502 Change Station Time Variable

This program allows the user to change the time variables of each station.
The station time variables are listed below, and the content in ( ) represents the range
of the data and the time variable unit.
Station Time
Data Range
Description
Variables
& Unit
0. NO ANS FWD
Time to determine no answer for No Answer Call Forward
(0-250 sec)
1. DTMF DUR.
DTMF tone generation time(Entered on 100ms basis)
(100-9900 msec)
2. F-DGT DELY
First digit transmission time after selecting Voice Mail/AA
(100-9900 msec)
3. OFFHK SEL.
Delay time before making call when hot line is selected
(0-250 sec)
4. EFWD DELAY
Ring duration time on the station set for external call
(1-250 sec)
forward
Default
NO ANS FWD
DTMF DUR.
F-DGT DELY
OFFHK SEL
EFWD DELAY
: 15 sec
: 100 msec
: 600 msec
: 15 sec
: 10 sec
Display
[201] NO ANS FWD

015 sec
2. Press the station number.(e.g. 202)

Or, press the [Message] button(DS-24SE) or the
ANS/RLS] button(DS-4028E) to select all stations.
[202] NO ANS FWD

015 sec

Or, press [Volume] to select the time variable
[202] NO ANS FWD

010 sec
[ALL] NO ANS FWD

015 sec
Page 2-165
4. Enter the time variable value.
[202] NO ANS FWD

015 sec _

Related Program
Program 102
Program 306
Page 2-166
Call Forwarding (MCP/MCP2)

Set Hot Line
503 Change C.O. Time Variable

This program allows the user to change the time variables of each C.O. line.
The C.O. time variables are listed below, and the content in ( ) represents the range of
C.O. Time Variables
00. ANS. BAK TM
Description
Answer Back detection time
Data Range & Unit

(0-2500 msec)

01. CLEARING
Time delayed for Hook On during C.O. recall
(100-9900 msec)

02. CO SUPV TM
C.O. Check interval during call
(10-2500 msec)

03. DTMF DUR.
DTMF Tone generation time
(100-9900 msec)

04. F-DGT DELY
First digit transmission time after C.O. selection
(100-9900 msec)

05. FLASH TIME
C.O. Flash time (Entered on 10ms basis)
(20-2500 msec)
06. NO RING TM
Maximum time required for acknowledging
(1-25 sec)
disconnection due to no C.O. ring signal

07. PAUSE TIME
Wait time until the other party is ready
(1-25 sec)
08. PRS DET TM
Pulse duration time of PRS signal
(0-2500 msec)

09. RING DET. TM
C.O. incoming detection time
(10-2500 msec)

10. WINK TIME
WINK signal duration time on E&M C.O. line
(100-300 msec)

11. MF/DP INT
Interval between digits for pulse dial
(100-9900 msec)

12. MFR DLY TM
Wait time for MFR allocation
(0-25 sec)
Default
ANS. BAK TM
CLEARING
CO SUPV TM
DTMF DUR.
F-DGT DELY
FLASH TIME
NO RING TM
PAUSE TIME
PRS DET TM
: 600 msec
: 1000 msec
: 2500 msec
: 100 msec
: 600 msec
: 600 msec
: 4 sec
: 3 sec
: 0 msec
Page 2-167
RING DET. TM
WINK TIME
MF/DP INT
MFR DLY TM
: 300 sec
: 200 sec
: 800 sec
: 0 sec
.Programming Procedure
Display
[701] ANS BAK TM

0600 MS
2. Enter the C.O. line number.(e.g. 702)

the cursor. Or, press the [Message] button
(DS-24SE) or the [ANS/RLS] button
(DS-4028E) to select all stations.
[702] ANS BAK TM

0600 MS
3. Enter the time variable number.

Or, press [Volume] to select the time
variable and press the [Right] Soft button.
[702] CLEARING
1000 MS _
4. Enter the time variable value.
[702] CLEARING
2000 MS
[ALL] ANS BAK TM

0600 MS

Related Program
N/A
Page 2-168
504 Make/Break Dial Pulse Ratio

This program allows the user to change the Make/Break Dial Pulse Ratio of the C.O.
line and the number of pulse per second
0
MAKE/BREAK RATIO
Make/Break ratio of dial pulse(01-99)
PULSE PER SECOND
Number of dial pulse per second(10 or 20)
Default
MAKE/BREAK RATIO : 33 MAKE
PULSE PER SECOND : 10 PPS
Display
MAKE/BREAK RATIO
33 MAKE
2. Enter the variable number([0], [1]).

MAKE/BREAK RATIO
33 MAKE
3. Enter the variable value and repeat the procedure

from step 2.
MAKE/BREAK RATIO
40 MAKE

Related Program
Program 402
Set C.O. Line Dial Type
Page 2-169
505 Change System Date/Time

This program allows the user to change the date and time of the system.
YYMMDDW : HHMM
YY : Years under 100(00-99) - 1990~2089
MM : Month(01-12)
DD : Date(01-31)
W : Weekday(0. Sunday - 6. Saturday)
HH : Hour(00-23)
MM : Minute(00-59)
Default
YYMMDDW : HHMM
0211155 : 0000(Date shall be identical to the program version date)
Display
OLD:0211115:0111
NEW:YYMMDDW:HHMM
2. Enter new date and time.
OLD:021115:1111
NEW:02MMDDW:HHMM

Related Program
Program 109
Page 2-170
Date/Time Display Format
506 Change System Tone Cycle

This program allows the user to change the tone cycle of the system.
Fourteen types of tones may be assigned. The continuous/interrupt tone shall be assigned
for each tone.
0
INTERRUPT TONE
Interrupt tone
CONTINUOUS TONE
Continuous tone
Default
TONE
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
500
500
500
500
50
50
50
50
1000
250
1000
250
03. DND/NO MORE
250
250
250
250
04. ERROR TONE
250
250
250
250
05. HOLD/CAMPON
500
3500
500
3500
00. BUSY TONE

01. CONFM/BARGE
02. DIAL TONE
06. MSGWAT TONE
CONTINUOUS TONE
07. RGBACK TONE
1000
2000
1000
2000
08. RING TONE
1000
2000
1000
2000
09. TRSFER TONE
100
100
100
100
10. DID RNGBACK
1000
2000
1000
2000
500
500
500
500
1000
2000
1000
2000
11. CO BUSY
12. CO RING BACK
13. CO DIAL
CONTINUOUS TONE
All tones are INTERRUPT tones except MSGWAT TONE and CO DIAL, and the
unit is msec .
CO BUSY, CO RING BACK, and CO DIAL are not provided by the system, but are
provided by the service provider.
Page 2-171
Display
BUSY TONE
INTERRUPT TONE
2. Enter the tone number([00]-[13]).

Or, press [Volume] to select the tone number
BUSY TONE
INTERRUPT TONE
3. Enter [1](Continuous Tone) or [0](Interrupt Tone).

Or, press [Volume] to select Continuous/Interrupt
Tone, and press the [Right] Soft button.
BUSY TONE :0500

0500 0500 0500
4. If the Interrupt Tone is selected, a new Interrupt

Tone cycle shall be entered.
The cycle shall be a four-digit number.
BUSY TONE
INTERRUPT TONE

Enter ON/OFF twice respectively.
Related Program
N/A
Page 2-172
507 Set Ring Mode Auto Conversion Time

This program allows the user to set the start time and end time for automatically
converting to nighttime mode at the designated time.
The start/end time and the ring mode shall be set for each weekday.
The ring mode changes to the corresponding ring mode at the start time and changes
to another ring mode upon the end time. If the end time is set at a earlier hour than
the start time, the ring mode changes at the end time of the next weekday.
The ring mode conversion button([RTO] or [RP]) is not required, but the mode
conversion button can be used conveniently when changing the mode manually.
If the night time/day time mode was set using the [RTO] button, the designated mode
is maintained until another mode is set manually.
The Hour and Minute shall be entered in the 24-hour mode when entering the time.
0. SUN
1. MON
2. TUE
3. WED
4. THU
5. FRI
6. SAT
When setting the ring mode, it is convenient to initially set all hours as the nighttime
mode and then assign the daytime modes on the nighttime mode.
Ring Mode 1
00:00 - 23:59 Nighttime mode(includes all modes except mode 2-4)
Ring Mode 1
08:00 - 12:00 Morning office hours
Ring Mode 1
12:01 - 12:59 Lunch time
Ring Mode 1
13:00 - 17:00 Afternoon office hours
Program 758 Ring Mode Conversion Table shall be assigned when using with devices
that only have the night time/day time mode such as voice mail.
Default
N/A
Page 2-173
Display
RING PLAN(SUN:1)
ST:
END:
2. Enter the weekday number([0]-[6]).

Or, press [Volume] to select the weekday
to move the cursor.
RING PLAN(MON:1)
ST:
END:
3. Enter the ring mode number([1]-[6]).

Or, press [Volume] to select the ring mode
and press the [Right] Soft button to
move the cursor.
RING PLAN(MON:1)
ST:_
END:
4. Enter the ring mode start time.

Or, press the [Right] Soft button to
move the cursor.
RING PLAN(MON:1)
ST:0800 END:_
5. Enter the ring mode end time.

Or, press the [Right] Soft button to move the cursor.
RING PLAN (MON:1)

ST:0800 END:1700

Related Program
Program 722
Program 723
Page 2-174

Set a Button for Each Type of a Phone (MCP/MCP2)
509 Set Holiday

This program allows the user to assign annual holidays.
The ring mode automatically switches to the night mode on the assigned date. Up to 60
annual holidays may be entered, and the date shall be entered in the order of month and
date(MMDD). RING PLAN is the mode number that operates on the assigned holiday.
Default
N/A
Display
RING PLAN
FOLLOW 1
2. Enter the ring mode([0]) or the holiday([1]).

Or, press [Volume] to select the ring mode or
holiday and press the [Right] Soft button to
move the cursor.
ASSIGN HOLIDAY
01:
3a. When setting the ring mode, enter the ring mode
that should operate on the holiday.
Or, press [Volume] to select the ring mode
RING PLAN
FOLLOW 1
3b. When setting the holiday, enter the holiday

number([01]-[60]).
Or, press [Volume] to select the holiday number
ASSIGN HOLIDAY
01:
4. Enter the holiday(MMDD).
ASSIGN HOLIDAY
01:0101

Related Program
Program 507
Page 2-175
510 Change Common Phone Ring Cycle

This program allows the user to change the ring cycle of the normal station.
Default
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
1. STN RING(Station Ring)
400
200
400
2000
2. TRUNK RING(C.O. Ring)
1000
2000
1000
2000
3. DOOR RING(Door Ring)
400
100
400
2000
4. ALARM RING(Alarm Ring)
400
200
400
4000
5. CBK RING(Callback Ring)
1000
3000
1000
3000
Unit is msec.
Display
1:STN RING :0400

0200 0400 2000
2. Enter the ring number([1]-[5]).

Or, press [Volume] to select the ring number
2:TRK RING :1000

2000 1000 2000
3. Enter the new ring cycle.

The cycle shall be a four-digit number.
2:TRK RING :1000

3000 1000 3000
Enter ON/OFF twice respectively.

Related Program
N/A
Page 2-176
511 Set Common Phone Message Wait Lamp Cycle

This program allows the user to set the message wait lamp cycle of the normal station.
Default
INTERRUPT LED 1000
1000(msec)
2. Press [Volume] to select [INTERRUPT LED]

3. Enter the ring cycle data.
Display
MW LAMP CADENCE
CONTINUOUS LED
MW LAMP CADENCE
INTERRUPT LED
MW LAMP CADENCE
1000 1000

Related Program
N/A
Page 2-177
513 Set Hotel Time Variable (MCP2)

This program allows the user to set various time variables related to the Hotel feature.
This program is applicable only when using the Hotel feature.
CHECK OUT
If the room is still in check-in status after the checkout time, the
room charge for the new day is automatically charged. However,
this does not apply when the room status is HOLD.
ROOM CLEAN TIME
The status of all rooms in check-in status is changed to NEED

CLEANING after this time.
CHECK IN END TM
The room charge for the new day is not automatically charged for
rooms that checked in after this time.
Default
N/A
Display
CHECK OUT TIME

HH:MM : :
2. Enter the time variable number([0]~[2]).

Or, press [Volume] to select the time variable and
ROOM CLEAN TIME

HH:MM : _ :
3. Enter the time.
ROOM CLEAN TIME

HH:MM : 14:00

Related Program
N/A
Page 2-178
514 Set Substitute External Sound Source (MCP/MCP2)

This program allows the user to set an external sound source instead of the system
tone. External Sound sources may be set for the seven tones listed below.
This program is not applicable to iDCS-M systems equipped with the MCP board.
BUSY TONE
Busy tone
DIAL TONE
Dial tone
DND TONE
Do not disturb tone
TRANSFER TONE
Transfer tone
MSG WAIT TONE
Message wait tone
ERROR TONE
Error tone
RINGBACK TONE
Ringback tone
Default
TONE
Display
BUSY TONE
TONE
2. Enter the system tone number([0]-[6]).

Or, press [Volume] to select the system tone and press
DIAL TONE
TONE
3. Enter the phone number of the external sound source.

Or, press [Volume] to select the external sound source
DIAL TONE
701

Related Program
N/A
Page 2-179
600 Attendant Group

This program allows the user to select a group to serve as an attendant from station
groups.
Default
1 to 6 : 500
Display
1. Click [Transfer] and [600].
OPERATOR GROUP
1:500
2:500
2.
OPERATOR GROUP
1:500
2:500
Enter a ring mode number([1] to [6]).

Or, click [Volume] to select a ring mode number.
Click the [Right] Soft button to move the cursor.
3. Enter the number of a station group to serve as

an attendant when ring mode is 1.
Or, click [Volume] to select a station group.
OPERATOR GROUP
1:501
2:500
4. Enter the number of a station group to operate

as an attendant when ring mode is 2 to 6.
OPERATOR GROUP
2:502
1:501

Related Program
Program 601
Page 2-180
601 Station Group (MCP/MCP2)

This program allows the user to specify a station group.
A station can belong to all station groups. Up to 48 members can be specified to a

station group. However, if the method of ring distribution is UNCONDITION, up to 32
members can be specified to a station group.
Information specified in a station group is described below :

4. NEXT PORT below is not supported in iDCS-M to which the MCP board is mounted.
TYPE
Type of a station group
RING
Method of ring distribution
OVERFLOW
Time to connect next group
GRP TRSF
Time to transfer a group
NEXT PORT
Station(group) to be connected at next
MEMBER
Member of a station group
NXT HUNT
If a ringing member does not respond within a certain time in

sequential or distributed incoming mode, the member will stop
ringing and the next member will ring.
The member does not operate in 0 SEC.
GROUP BUSY
If all the members of a station group is busy, specifies whether

the group will be treated as busy or not.
(This is not applied to the UNCONDITIONAL group.)
The types of a station group are described below :

5. MSG GROUP below is not supported in the iDCS-M system to which the MCP
board is mounted.
NORMAL GRP
Normal Station Group
VMAA GROUP
Voice Mail/Auto Attendant Group
UCD GROUP
Uniform Call Distribution Group
AA GROUP
Internal Auto Attendant Group
BI-VMS GROUP
Internal Voice Mail Group
MSG GROUP
Message Group. If the member of this group leaves a

message, the answered call will be connected to the group.
Page 2-181
The ring distribution methods of a station group are described below :

0
1
SEQUENTIAL
Always connected to the first member in a pause state within
(sequential incoming)
the group
DISTRIBUTE
Connected to a member in turn in the specified order
(distributed incoming)
2
UNCONDITION
Connected to all members
(automatic incoming)
UNCONDITION can be set to NORMAL GRP and MSG GROUP only.
To enable a busy member to ring off hook when a call is connected to a group, set the
off-hook ring of Program 300 to ON. Off-hook ring is performed in the UNCONDITION
method only.
Default
TYPE
NORMAL GRP
MCP
MCP2
iDCS-L
548 : AA GROUP
549 : VMAA GROUP
iDCS-M
528 : AA GROUP
529 : VMAA GROUP
iDCS-L
548 : AA GROUP
549 : VMAA GROUP
iDCS-M
528 : AA GROUP
529 : VMAA GROUP
RING
DISTRIBUTE
OVERFLOW
030 SEC
GRP TRSF
045 SEC
NEXT PORT
NONE
MEMBER
NONE
NXT HUNT
000 SEC
GROUP BUSY
OFF
1. Click [Transfer] and [601].
2. Enter the phone number of a station group.

Then, click the [Right] Soft button.
Page 2-182
Display
[501] STN GROUP
TYPE:NORMAL GRP
[502] STN GROUP

TYPE:NORMAL GRP
3. Enter control information([0] to [7]).

Or, click [volume] to select control information.
Then, click the [Right] Soft button.
4.
Enter a mode in RING.

Or, click [Volume] to select a mode.
Then, click the [Left] Soft button.
[502] STN GROUP

RING:DISTRIBUTE
[502] STN GROUP

RING:UNCONDITION
5. Press [Transfer] to exit the program. Or, press [Speaker]

to move on to the next program.
Related Program
Program 203
Program 204
Program 300
Assign Nighttime Ring

Common Bell Control
Set Station Function ON/OFF
Page 2-183
602 Enter the Name of a Station Group

This program allows the user to change the name of a station group. Use dial buttons
to enter a name in English. Press a button to see the following characters on LCD
depending on the number of pressing the same dial button. Press another button to
save the displayed characters and move the cursor to the next character. Press [A] to
change uppercase/lowercase input modes.
Press [Volume] to save the characters and move the cursor front and back.
DS-4000 / DS-5000 Phone

Number of
<
>
Space ?
Dialing
Number of
Dialing
Press the dial button #. Then, the following special characters will appear in the
order below :
#, space, &, !, :, ?, ., ,, %, $, -, <, >, /, =, [, ], @, ^, (, ), _, +, {, }, |, ; , , ,
Default
N/A
Programmable Buttons
Button A : Select Uppercase/Lowercase
Button B : Select Korean characters/English characters
Page 2-184
Display
[500] SGR NAME
2. Press the phone number of a station group(e.g. 502).

Or, press [Volume] to select a station group.
Press the [Right] Soft button to move the cursor.
[502] SGR NAME

_
3. Use the table in previous page to enter the name

of a station group. Press the [Right] Soft
button and repeat the steps from 2.
[502] SGR NAME

Business 2

Related Program
Program 104
Program 404
Program 600
Program 601
Change Station Name

Enter C.O. line Name
Attendant Group
Page 2-185
603 C.O. Line Group (MCP/MCP2)

This program allows the user to specify a C.O. line group. A C.O. line can be a
member of single or multiple C.O. line group(s). This program is useful for the
programming of auto route selection. Refer to the following operating modes:
0
SEQUENTIAL
Select the first member unconditionally.
(Sequential Search)
1
DISTRIBUTE
Select a member in turn in the specified order.
(Distributed Search)
Default
For MCP
MODE
SEQUENTIAL
MEMBER
C.O. Lines(LOOP, BRI, and PRI)
800
Private Lines(E&M, B/W)
801
Station(VoIP)
All the members of the other C.O.
NONE
line groups
For MCP2
MODE
SEQUENTIAL
MEMBER
C.O. Lines(LOOP, BRI, and PRI)
800
Private Lines(E&M, B/W)
803
Station(VoIP Networking)
804
C.O. Line(H.323)
805
C.O. Line(SIP)
All the members of the other C.O.
NONE
line groups
2. Press the phone number of a C.O. line group.

Or, press [Volume] to select a C.O. line group.
Then, press the [Right] Soft button.
Page 2-186
Display
[9] TRK GROUP
MODE:SEQUENTIAL
[800] TRK GROUP

MODE:SEQUENTIAL
3.
Enter [0] (MODE) or [1](MEMBER) (e.g. 1).

Or, press [Volume] to select MODE/MEMBER.
[800] TRK GROUP

MEMBER 01:NONE
4.
Enter the number of a member in MEMBER.

Or, press [Volume] to select the number of a
member. Then, press the [Right] Soft button.
[800] TRK GROUP

MEMBER 01:NONE
5.

Related Program
Program 712
Program 724

Page 2-187
604 Internal Page

This program allows the user to enter a station to be paged in internal page and
specify whether a station is included in pages from each internal page zone.
Up to 99 stations can be paged and a digital phone can be set to over 2 zone members.
1 to 4 is used as the numbers of internal page zone and 5 to 8 are used as the numbers
of external page zone. The member of page zone 0 is used for internal page or
internal/external page.
Default
N/A
Display
INT.PAGE ZONE(0)
MEMBER 01:NONE
2. Enter the number of a page zone([0]-[4]).

Or, press [Volume] to select a page zone.
INT.PAGE ZONE(1)
MEMBER 01:NONE
3. Enter the number of a page member([01]-[99]).

Or, press [Volume] to select a page member.
INT.PAGE ZONE(1)
MEMBER 01:NONE
4. Enter the phone number of a page member.

Or, select the phone number of a page member.
Press the [Right] Soft button to save the data.
INT.PAGE ZONE(1)
MEMBER 01:201
5.

Related Program
N/A
Page 2-188
605 External Page

This program allows the user to specify a page member for each external page zone.
An external page speaker can be set to the member of all external page zones.
Up to 8 members can be set to an external page zone(5 to 8).
Default
N/A
Display
EXT.PAGE ZONE(5)
MEMBER 1:NONE
2.
Enter the number of a page zone([5]-[8]).

Or, press [Volume] to select a page zone.
EXT PAGE ZONE(5)

MEMBER 1:NONE
3.
Enter the number of a page member([1]-[8]).

EXT PAGE ZONE(6)
Or, press [Volume] to select a page member.
MEMBER 1:NONE
Or, press the [Left] Soft button and repeat the steps from 2.
4. Enter the phone number of a page member(e.g. 361).

Or, press [Volume] to select an external speaker.
EXT PAGE ZONE(6)

MEMBER 2:NONE

Related Program
N/A
Page 2-189
606 Assign a Speed Dial Block

This program allows the user to assign a speed dial block(consisting of 10 speed dials)
to a common speed dial or an individual speed dial.
Up to 50 speed dials can be specified to the common speed dial block and up to 5
speed dials can be specified to the individual speed dial block. The total number of
the common speed dial block and individual speed dial block is up to 250 in the
system. This program allows the user to use memory for speed dials efficiently.
FREE LIST shows the number of extra blocks to which speed dials can be specified.
Default
SYSTEM(Common Speed Dial) : 20
STATIONS(Individual Speed Dial) : 1
Display
FREE LIST:20
SYSTEM:20
2. Press [0]. Or, press the [Right] Soft button to

move the cursor.
FREE LIST:20
SYSTEM:20
3. Press [Volume] to select the mode of the

common speed dial block(SYSTEM)
or speed dial block for each station(EXT).
FREE LIST:20
SYSTEM:20
4.
FREE LIST:10
SYSTEM:30
Enter the number of a block. Or, press

[Volume] to select the number of a block.

Related Program
Program 105
Program 106
Program 705
Program 706
Page 2-190
Speed Dial
Speed Dial Name
Enter Common Speed Dial
Enter Common Speed Dial Name
607 UCD Group Options

This program allows the user to set the options of uniform call distribution. If there is
no UCD group, NO UCD GROUP will be displayed.
Control information specified depending on the options of uniform call distribution is
shown below :
00
FIRST MSG
Message sent when all the members of the UCD group are busy
01
SECOND MSG
Message sent repetitively until a call can be connected to a member
02
EXIT CODE
A dial button(0-9, *, #) to be pressed when the user wants to
of a UCD group when all the members of the UCD group are busy
connect to FINAL DEST promptly while listening an
announcement because all the members of the UCD group are
busy
03
RETRY COUNT
Number of sending SECOND MSG repetitively
04
FINAL DEST
A table number of a station(group) or an auto attendant to be

connected when there is not any member to be connected even
if the user waits as long as RETRY COUNT. Press the [A] button
to enter the table number of an auto attendant.
05
RING-NEXT
Time(00 to 99 seconds) to ring for the next member after ringing

stops if a member of a UCD group does not answer a call. This
option is not applied if the time is 0 second.
06
UCD RECL
Time to send holding tone between SECOND MSGs
07
MOH SOURCE
Music on Hold sent between SECOND MSGs
08
WRAP-UP
(NONE, TONE, 371-376)

Time for the member of a UCD group to be ready for processing
the next call after a call is terminated
09
AUTO LOG OUT
Specifies whether a member of a UCD group will be logged out

when ringing stops and a call rings to the next member because the
member does not answer a call.
10
ALLOUTFINAL
If all the members of a UCD group are logged out, specifies

whether calls are transferred to final destination.
11
AGENT PIN NO
If an agent wants to enter a UCD group, specifies whether an

agent code for UCD will be pressed.
12
GBUSY NEXT
If all agents are busy, specifies whether the next port is called
immediately during overflow time.
Page 2-191
Default
00.
01.
02.
03.
04.
05.
06.
07.
08.
09.
10.
11.
12.
FIRST MSG
SECOND MSG
EXIT CODE
RETRY COUNT
FINAL DEST
RING-NEXT
UCD RECL
MOH SOURCE
WRAP-UP
AUTO LOG OUT
ALLOUT FINAL
AGENT PIN NO
GBUSY NEXT
: 61
: 62
: NONE
: 03
: 5000
: 30 SEC
: 10 SEC
: NONE
: 10 SEC
: ON
: OFF
: OFF
: OFF
Display
[501] UCD OPTION

FIRST MSG:61
2. Enter the phone number of a UCD group.

Or, press [Volume] to select a UCD group.
[501] UCD OPTION

FIRST MSG:61
3.
Enter control information([00]-[12]).

Or, press [Volume] to select control information.
[501] UCD OPTION

SECOND MSG:62
4.
Enter the value of control information.

Or, press [Volume] to select a value of control
information. Then, press the [Right] Soft button.
[501] UCD OPTION

SECOND MSG:02
5.

Related Program
Program 601
Program 717
Page 2-192

UCD Agent Code (MCP/MCP2)
608 Assign a Caller Information Saving Block

(MCP/MCP2)
This program allows the user to assign entries for saving caller information to each
station. Since the number of unassigned entries is displayed, the entries can be added
or deleted in each station. 10 entries are assigned to each station initially. Up to 50
entries can be assigned and entries can be assigned in the unit of 10. The number of
entries provided to the system is as follows:
System
MCP
MCP2
Number of Buffers
iDCS-L
1500
iDCS-M
1000
iDCS-L
2000
iDCS-M
2000
Default
10
2.
Enter the number of a station.

Or, press [Volume] to select a station.
3.
Enter the number of entries.

Or, press [Volume] to select a number.
Or, press [Hold] to delete the entry.
4.

Display
[201] REVIEW BLK
10:340 FREE
[205] REVIEW BLK

10:340 FREE
[205] REVIEW BLK

50:300 FREE
Related Program
Program 119
Program 312
Program 725

Set Caller ID
Page 2-193
609 Assign an Outgoing Call Saving Block (MCP/MCP2)

This program allows the user to assign a buffer that saves the dialing information of
outgoing calls.
Up to 50 buffers can be assigned to each digital phone with LCD.
To use the MCP system, a LAN board is required to be mounted to the system.
The total number of buffers depends on the system as shown below :

System
MCP
MCP2
Number of Buffers
iDCS-L
1500
iDCS-M
1000
iDCS-L
2000
iDCS-M
2000
Default
10
Display
[201] LOG BLOCK

10:1180 FREE
2.

Or, press [Volume] to select the number of a station.
[202] LOG BLOCK

10:1180 FREE
3.
Enter the number of buffers([00]-[50]).

Or, press [Volume] to select the number of buffers.
[202] LOG BLOCK

30:1100 FREE
4.

Related Program
N/A
Page 2-194
611 Set a Short Message to a Station (MCP2)

This program allows the user to set a station used to send a urgent short message. Up
to 100 stations can be set to the system.
Default
Not Used
Display
[201] TMSG STN

NOT USED:CAN
2.

[202] TMSG STN

NOT USED:CAN
3.
Specify whether a urgent message will be used

or not. A message, NOT USED : 00 FREE
will be displayed on LCD if the maximum
number of the station used to send a urgent
message is exceeded.
[202] TMSG STN

USED
4.

Related Program
Program 117
Emergency Text Message (MCP2)
Page 2-195
612 Station for a Simultaneous Conference Call (MCP2)

This program allows the user to set a station used for a simultaneous conference call.
Up to 100 stations can be set to the system.
Default
Not Used
Display
[201] CONF STN

NOT USED :CAN
2.

[202] CONF STN

NOT USED :CAN
3.
Specify whether a urgent message will be used

or not. A message, NOT USED : 00 FREE will
be displayed on LCD if the maximum number
of the station used for a simultaneous
conference call is exceeded.
[202] CONF STN

USED
4.

Related Program
Program 118
Page 2-196
Conference Group (MCP2)
614 Set a Station/C.O. Line Call Group (MCP2)

This program allows the user to set a call group in which each station or C.O. line is
included. It is useful if the user wants to limit a call between stations, outgoing calls
through a C.O. line, or call-pickup. Stations are set within the call group numbers
001~300 and C.O. lines are set within the call group numbers 301~500.
Default
001
Display
STATION GROUP
201:001
2.
Enter [0] if the user wants to set a call group to

a station. Enter [1] if the user wants to set a call
group to a C.O. line.
Or, press [Volume] to select a desired item.
3.
Enter a number the user wants.

TRUNK GROU{
702:301
4.
Enter the number of the call group the

user wants to set.
Or, press [Volume] to select the number of the call
group the user wants to set.
TRUNK GROUP
702:302
TRUNK GROUP
701:301

Related Program
Program 304
Program 317
Program 318
Set Available C.O. Line for Each Station (MCP2)

Set Available Station Call Group for Each Station Call Group (MCP2)
Set Available C.O. Call Group for Each C.O. Call Group (MCP2)
Page 2-197
615 MGI Group (MCP2)

This program allows the user to set a MGI port, which is assigned by the type of
users who shall use the MGI port for calling.
0
LOCAL IPP
MGI port used to make a call with private type of IP phone
REMOTE IPP
MGI port used to make a call with public type of IP phone
NETWORKING
MGI port used to make a call to VoIP networking call
VoIP TRUNK
MGI port used to make a call through C.O. lines such as
MGI3 REQ
H.323 or SIP
MGI port to be used if MGI3 is necessary for a VoIP call such
as facsimile
Display
USER:LOCAL IPP
MODE:SEQUENTIAL
2.
USER:NETWORKING
MODE:SEQUENTIAL
Enter the type of the user you want to set.

Or, press [Volume] to select the type of a user.
3. Select [0] to change a MGI selection mode.

Select [1] to enter numbers in MEMBER.
USER:NETWORKING
MEMBER 001:3801
4. Select the type of the mode you want in MODE

(0 : SEQUENTIAL, 1 : DISTRIBUTE).
Or, press [Volume] to select the type of the mode
you want. Press the [Right] Soft button to save the data.
USER:NETWORKING
MODE:DISTRIBUTE
5. Enter the number of a member in MEMBER.

Or, press [Volume] to select the number of a member.
USER:NETWORKING
MEMBER 001:3809

Related Program
N/A
Page 2-198
616 Set MGI Fixed User (MCP2)

This program allows the user to set a dedicated MGI port for a specific port that
requires MGI for making calls. The dedicated MGI port is not assigned to other ports
even when the MGI port is not actually being used.
Ports that require MGI for making calls include IP phone, VOIP C.O. line, and VOIP
networking C.O. line.
Display
[3801]MGI USER
NONE
2. Enter the MGI port number.

Or, press [Volume] to select the MGI port and press
[3803]MGI USER
NONE
3. Enter the port number that requires MGI for calls.

Or, press [Volume] to select the port number and
[3803]MGI USER
3201
4. Press [Transfer] to exit the program. Or, press [Speaker] to move on to the next
program.
Related Program
N/A
Page 2-199
700 Copy a Service Class Table

This program allows the user to copy the contents of a specific service class table to
another one. Press the [F] button to change the program to 701, Service Class Table.
Default
N/A
Programmable Button
Button F : Save Input and Move to Program 701
Display
COPY COS ITEMS

COS01 COS01
2.
Enter a source service class([01]-[30]).

Or, press [Volume] to select a service class
to copy. Then, press the [Right] Soft button.
COPY COS ITEMS

COS01 COS01
3.
Enter a target service class([01]-[30]).

Or, press [Volume] to select a service class.
COPY COS ITEMS

COS01 COS10
4.

Related Program
Program 701
Page 2-200
Service Class Table
701 Service Class Table

This program allows the user to change the contents of a service class table. When
selecting the number of a service class, press the <F> button to change the program
to Program 700, Copy a Service Class Table. The service class table is categorized as
follows :
0
TOLL LEVEL
Sets a limitation class of C.O. line calling for each service class.
USABLE FEATURE
Specifies whether functions provided by the system can be used

for each service class.
CALL STN GROUP
Specifies whether 50 station groups defined in the system can be

called for each service class.
CALL TRK GROUP
Specifies whether 50 C.O. line groups defined in the system can

be called for each service class.
CALL BIVMS STN
Specifies whether an internal voice mail port can be used for each
service class.
The limitation class of C.O. line calling specified in the service class table can be
entered with dial buttons manually.
Dial No.
Limitation Class of Calling
The functions specified in the service class table are shown below :
00
AA CALER
Automatic Answering by a Caller
01
ABSENCE
Absence
02
ALM CLR
Clear an Alarm
03
AUTO RDL
Automatic Re-dialing
04
CALLBACK
Call Back
05
CID ABND
Query saved information on no-reply incoming calls
06
CID INQR
Query caller information from a call on hold
Page 2-201
07
CID INVT
Check other station calling status/override/call disconnection
08
CONFER
Conference
09
DALM CLR
Clear a DISA alarm ring
10
DIRECT
Directory Dial
11
DISA
DISA
12
DND
Do Not Disturb
13
DND FWRD
Call Forwarding in case of Do Not Disturb
14
DND OVRD
Override Do Not Disturb
15
DOOR
Reply to Door Phone Ring
16
DSS
Direct Station Selection
17
DTS
Direct Trunk Selection
18
EXT AREC
Record a Station Call to a Voice Mail, SVM-800 automatically
19
EXT FWD
External Call Forwarding
20
FEATURE
Use Features
21
FLASH
Flash
22
FOLLOW-ME
Reverse Call Forwarding
23
FORW ORD
Call Forwarding
24
FWDTOVMS
Call Forwarding to a Voice Mail, SVM-800
25
GRP I/O
Include/Exclude a Group
26
HOLD
Hold
27
HOT LINE
Hot Line Service
28
INTERCOM
Station Call
30
MESSAGE
Message
31
MM PAGE
Meet Me Page
32
NEW CALL
New C.O. Line Call
33
OHVAED
Receive Off hook Page
34
OHVAING
Off hook Page
35
ONEA2
Interrupt a C.O. Line Call
36
OPERATOR
Call through an Attendant
37
OUT TRSF
Transfer to C.O. Line
38
OVERRIDE
Listen-in Calling
39
PAGE 0
Page to Zone 0
40
PAGE 1
Page to Zone 1
41
PAGE 2
Page to Zone 2
42
PAGE 3
Page to Zone 3
43
PAGE 4
Page to Zone 4
44
PAGE 5
Page to Zone 5
Page 2-202
45
PAGE 6
Page to Zone 6
46
PAGE 7
Page to Zone 7
47
PAGE 8
Page to Zone 8
48
PAGE 9
Page to Zone 9
49
PAGE *
Page to Zone *
50
PGM MSG
Absent Message
51
PICKUP
Call Pickup
52
PRB
Clear Privacy/Join Calling
53
REM.HOLD
Remote Hold
54
RNG PLAN
Convert Ring Mode
55
SECURE
Reject Calling Listening-in
56
SET RLOC
Exchange Information on Station Subscribers
57
SSPD TOL
Limit Calling by Common Speed Dial
58
STN LOCK
Lock Station
59
SYS SPD
Common Speed Dial
60
TRK AREC
Record a C.O. Line Call to a Voice Mail, SVM-800 automatically
61
TRK EHLD
Individual Hold on a C.O. Line
62
UNCO CNF
Conference Call through a C.O. Line
63
VM AREC
Automatic Recording to an Internal Voice Mail
64
VM AME
Set Automatic Answering Mode to an Internal Voice Mail
65
VM REC
Recording to an Internal Voice Mail
66
VMS PSWD
Password of a Voice Mail, SVM-800
67
VMS REC
Recording to a Voice Mail, SVM-800
Default
TOLL LEVEL
Service Class
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
30
Others
LEVEL
USE FEATURE
DND
DND OVRD
EXT AREC
EXT FWD
FOLOW-ME
FORWARD
: NO
: NO
: NO
: NO
: NO
: NO
Page 2-203
OUT TRSF
OVERRIDE
PGM MSG
SET RLOC
STS MSG
TRK AREC
UNCO CNF
VM AREC
VM AME
VM REC
Others
: NO
: NO
: NO
: NO
: NO
: NO
: NO
: NO
: NO
: NO
: YES
CALL TRK GRP

TRKGRP 01~50(iDCS-L), 01~30(iDCS-M) : YES
CALL STN GRP
STNGRP 01~80(iDCS-L), 01~40(iDCS-M) : YES
Display
COS CONTENTS(01)
TOLL LEVEL:A
2.
Enter a service class([01]-[30]).

Or, press [Volume] to select a service class.
COS CONTENTS(05)
TOLL LEVEL:A
3. Enter the category number of functions([0]-[3]).

Or, press [Volume] to select a function category.
Then, press the [Right] Soft button
COS CONTENTS(01)
00:aa CALER:YES
4. Enter a function number(e.g. 23) out of [00]-[65].

Or, press [Volume] to select a function.
COS CONTENTS(01)
22:FORWARD :NO
5.
COS CONTENTS(01)
22:FORWARD :YES
Enter [1] (YES) or [0](NO).


Related Program
Program 700
Page 2-204
Copy a Service Class Table
702 Enter a Table of Limiting Calls through a C.O. Line

This program allows the user to enter the dials of limiting calls through a C.O. line.
Class A allows all calls through a C.O. line and Class H limits all calls through a C.O.
line. The table below shows Classes B to G. Up to 500 dials of up to 12 digits that
limit calls through a C.O. line are saved. Whether the 6 classes are applied to each
dial or not is displayed.
This program is related to the contents of 'Program 704, Meta Characters to Limit
Calling.'
Button
Input
0-*
Dial the user wants to limit
A-C
Meta characters, X, Y, and Z
This program is used to check multiple dials simultaneously. If a meta character is

included in a dial button and the button corresponds to [1] in the meta character table,
the number corresponding to the meta character will be 1.
F End of a dial(marked as E)
Default
ENTRY
DIGIT
001
00X
002
0X
003
101
004
7008X
005
Others
Page 2-205
Display
DENY(001) :BCDEFG
00X
:111111
2.
Enter a number([001]-[500]) of the calling

limitation table.
Or, press [Volume] to select a number of the
calling limitation table.
DENY(010) :BCDEFG
:000000
3.
Enter the dial of limiting calling and then press

4. Enter whether a dial for each class is used or not

([0] : NO, [1] : YES) and then, press the [Right]
Soft button.
DENY(010) :BCDEFG
0X
:000000
DENY(010) :BCDEFG
0X
:010101

Related Program
Program 703
Program 704
Page 2-206
Enter a Table of Allowing Calls through a C.O. Line

Meta Characters to Limit Calling
703 Enter a Table of Allowing Calls through a C.O. Line

This program allows the user to enter a dial that allows calls through a C.O. line.
Class A allows all calls through a C.O. line and Class H limits all calls through a C.O.
line. The table below shows Classes B to G.
Up to 500 dials of up to 12 digits that allow calls through a C.O. line are saved.
Whether the 6 classes are applied to each dial or not is displayed.
This program is related to the contents of 'Program 704, Meta Characters to Limit
Calling.'
Button
Input
0-*
Dial the user wants to allow
A-C
Meta Characters X, Y, and Z
This program is used to check multiple dials simultaneously. If a meta character is

included in a dial button and the button corresponds to [1] in the meta character table,
the number corresponding to the meta character will be 1.
F End of a dial(marked as E)
Default
ENTRY
DIGIT
001
011X
002
012X
003
015X
004
016X
005
017X
006
018X
007
019X
008
080X
009
11X
Rest
Page 2-207
Display
ALOW(001) :BCDEFG
01X
:000000
2.
Enter a number([001]-[500]) of the calling

allowance table.
Or, press [Volume] to select a number of the
calling limitation table.
ALOW(010) :BCDEFG
:000000
3.
Enter the dial of allowing calling.

4. Enter whether a dial is used for each class

([0] : NO, [1] : YES). Then, press the [Right]
Soft button.
ALOW(010) :BCDEFG
032
:000000
ALOW(010) :BCDEFG
:010101
032

Related Program
Program 702
Program 704
Page 2-208
Enter a Table of Limiting Calls through a C.O. Line

Meta Characters to Limit Calling
704 Meta Characters to Limit Calling

This program allows the user to specify whether a number can be entered to the
corresponding digit when multiple dials that differ in one digit only are entered to the
table of limiting or allowing calls through a C.O. line. For example, the numbers,
1 and 2 of a digit, X correspond to [1]. The table shows 0X. Then, the dials will be
01 and 02.
Default
Display
:0123456789*#
X:111111111111
2.
Enter the number ([0] : X, [1] : Y, [2] : Z) of a

:0123456789*#
Y:000000000000
meta character.
Or, press [Volume] to select the number of a meta
character. Press the [Right] Soft button to move the cursor.
3.
Enter whether each dial is used or not

([0] : NO, [1] : YES). Then, press the [Right]
Soft button.
4.

:0123456789*#
Y:000100010001
Related Program
Program 702
Program 703

Page 2-209
705 Enter Common Speed Dial

This program allows the user to enter the phone number of common speed dial.
Up to 500 phone numbers can be saved to common speed dial. If any speed dial
block is not assigned, a message, SPDBLK NOT EXIST will be displayed and
speed dials will not be able to be pressed. The phone number of a speed dial is up
to 24 characters long and consists of 0-9, *, and .
The phone number of a speed dial might include C.O. line(group). When C.O.
line(group) is entered, - appears after the C.O. line automatically to differentiate
the phone number of a speed dial from that of an external phone number.
OCC code is displayed as '*' and hidden on display when dialed.
Default
N/A
Button B
Enters C.O. Line Flash Code F
Button C
Enters Pause Code P
Button D
Enters Pulse/DTMF Conversion Code C
Button E
Enters OCC Code [, ]
Button F
Saves Input and Move to Program 706
Button ANS/RLS
Adds the entered number and name of the speed dial to Program 728, Caller
Information Transfer Table
Display
SYS SPEED DIAL

500:
2.
Number of a speed dial([500]-[999]).

speed dial. Press the [Right] Soft button to
move the cursor.
SYS SPEED DIAL

501:_
3.
Enter a speed dial and press the [Right] Soft button.

Then, repeat the steps from 2.
SYS SPEED DIAL

501:9-P033128097
Page 2-210
4.
Press F to change the program to Program 706,

Enter the Name of Common Speed Dial.
(Press [ANS/RLS] to add the entered number and
name of a speed dial to Program 728, Caller
Information Transfer Table. This is required to enter
the name corresponding to the speed dial number.)
SYS SPEED DIAL

ADD CLI XLT ?NO
5. Press [Transfer] to exit the program. Or, press [Speaker] to move

on to the next program.
Related Program
Program 606
Program 706

Enter the Name of Common Speed Dial
Page 2-211
706 Enter the Name of Common Speed Dial

This program allows the user to enter the name of common speed dial. It enables
the user to see the name corresponding to common speed dial number and select
the number of a speed dial.
If a station to which any speed dial is not assigned is selected, a message, SPDBLK
NOT EXIST will be displayed and the name of a speed dial will not be able to be
entered.
If [F] is pressed while the number of a speed dial is selected or the name of a speed
dial is entered, the entered contents will be saved and the program will be changed to
Program 705, Enter Common Speed Dial.
Use dial buttons to enter a name in English. Press a dial to display characters below
on LCD depending on the number of pressing the same dial. Press another dial to
save the displayed characters and move the cursor to the next character. Press [A]
to change uppercase/lowercase input modes.
DS-4000 / DS-5000 Phone

Number of
Dialing
0
1
<
>
Space ?
Number of
Dialing
order below :
#, space, &, !, :, ?, ., ,, %, $, -, <, >, /, =, [, ], @, ^, (, ), _, +, {, }, |, ; , , ,
Default
N/A
Page 2-212
Button
Select Uppercase/Lowercase
Button B
Select Korean/English
Button ANS/RLS
Add the entered number and name of a speed dial to Program 728, Caller
Information Transfer Table
Display
SYS SPEED NAME

500:SEC KiHung
2.
SYS SPEED NAME

501:_
Press the number(e.g. 501) of a speed dial([500]-[999]).

Or, press [Volume] to select the number of a speed
dial. Press the [Right] Soft button to move the cursor.
3. Enter the name of a speed dial. Press the [Right]

SYS SPEED NAME
Soft button and repeat the steps from 2.
501:SEC KP LAB
Or, press F to change the program to Program 705,
SYS SPEED NAME
Enter Common Speed Dial.
ADD CLI XLT ?NO
(Press [ANS/RLS] to add the entered number and
name of a speed dial to Program 728,
Caller Information Transfer Table. This is required to
enter the name corresponding to the speed dial number.)
Related Program
Program 606
Program 705

Enter Common Speed Dial
Page 2-213
707 Enter a Class Change Code (MCP/MCP2)

This program allows the user to set a class change code, which is entered to change
the service class of a station and make a call.
Up to 500 class change codes of 4 to 10 digits can be entered. However, up to 250
class change codes of 4 digits only can be entered in iDCS-M to which the MCP
board is mounted.
Default
N/A(However, COS is 01.)
Display
AUTHOR.CODE(001)
_
C:01
2.
Press the number(e.g. 002) of a class change

code([01]-[500]).
Or, press [Volume] to select the number of a class
change code. Press the [Right] Soft button to
move the cursor.
AUTHOR.CODE(002)
C:01
3.
Enter a class change code. Press the [Right]

AUTHOR.CODE(002)
3245
C:01
4.
Enter a class to change([01]-[30]).

Or, press [Volume] to select a class. Press the
[Right] soft button and repeat the steps from 2.
AUTHOR.CODE(002)
3245
C:04

Related Program
Program 305
Program 701
Page 2-214
Set Force Code Type

Service Class Table
708 Enter an Account Code (MCP/MCP2)

This program allows the user to change an account code if the user presses an
account code for billing whenever he or she makes a call. Up to 999 account codes
can be entered. However, up to 500 account codes can be entered in iDCS-M to
which the MCP board is mounted.
Default
N/A
Display
ACCOUNT CODE
001:
2.
ACCOUNT CODE
010:_
Press the number(e.g. 010) of an account code

([001]-[999]).
Or, press [Volume] to select the number of an account
code. Press the [Right] Soft button to move the cursor.
3. Enter an account code(up to 12 characters long).

ACCOUNT CODE
010:4343678

Related Program
Program 305
Set Force Code Type
Page 2-215
709 Enter a Code Excluded from the Limitation of Calls

through a C.O. Line
This program allows the user to enter special characters excluded from the limitation
of calls through a C.O. line.
0
PBX ACCESS CODE
Code for using PBX when the system is connected to PBX

(Number : 5 (4 digits))
SPECIAL CODE
TOLL OVERRIDE
Code used for a special purpose such as making a call to CO
(Number : 10 (4 digits))
Urgent call code that ignores call limitation and forced input code
for a urgent call(Number : 8 (14 digits))
3
OVER USE TRK GRP
C.O. line group dialed by pressing a urgent call code
Default
N/A
Display
PBX ACCESS CODE

1:9
2.
Press the type of a code([0]-[3]).

Or, press [Volume] to select the type of a code.
PBX ACCESS CODE

1
3.
Press a code number([1]-[5] or [01]-[10]).

Or, press [Volume] to select a code number.
PBX ACCESS CODE

2
4.
Enter a code and press the [Right] Soft button.

Repeat the steps from 2.
PBX ACCESS CODE

2:6
5.

Related Program
Program 702
Program 703
Page 2-216

710 Enter a Digit for Auto Route Selection (MCP/MCP2)

This program allows the user to enter the referred route table and a digit for auto
route selection, which connects the cheapest C.O. line group automatically by
analyzing the external phone number dialed by the user.
Up to 2,000 digits for auto route selection(up to 10 characters long) can be entered.
However, up to 1,000 digits can be entered in the MCP board mounted iDCS-M.
The entered digits are sorted in an ascending order and saved.
Default
N/A
Display
LCR DIGIT (0001)

DIGIT:
2.
LCR DIGIT (0002)

DIGIT:_
Enter a number(e.g. 0002) from the digit table

([0001]-[2000]).
Or, press [Volume] to select a number for the digit table.
3. Enter a digit(e.g. 89) and press the [Right] Soft button.
LCR DIGIT (0002)

LENGTH:-- RT:01
4. Enter the length of a digit([02]-[31]) according to

the length of digits. (For example, if a digit is 012345,
its length will be 06.)
Or, press [Volume] to select the length of a digit.
LCR DIGIT (0002)

LENGTH:02 RT:01
5. Enter a number from the referred route table([01]-[32]).

Or, press [Volume] to select a number from
the route table. Press the [Right] Soft button
to move the cursor.
LCR DIGIT (0002)

DIGIT:89

Page 2-217
Related Program
Program 310
Program 711
Program 712
Program 713
Page 2-218
Set Auto Route Selection Class

711 Enter a Timetable for Auto Route Selection

This program allows the user to enter a timetable to be referred to depending on a day
of the week(0.SUN-6.SAT) and time zone(0.A-3.D) of the auto route selection
function, which connects the cheapest C.O. line group automatically by analyzing
the external phone number dialed by the user.
Day of the Week
0
SUN
MON
TUE
WED
THU
FRI
SAT
Time
Default
N/A
Display
LCR TIME (SUN:A)

HHMM:
LCRT:-
2.
Enter a day of the week([0]-[6]).

Or, press [Volume] to select a day of the week.
LCR TIME (MON:A)

HHMM:
LCRT:-
3.
Enter time zone([0]-[3]).

Or, press [Volume] to select time zone.
LCR TIME (MON:B)

LCRT:HHMM:
Page 2-219
4. Enter start time.(Enter 24-hour mode.)

LCR TIME (MON:B)

HHMM:1200 LCRT:-
5. Enter the referred timetable(LCRT : [1]-[4]).

Or, press [Volume] to select a timetable.
LCR TIME (MON:B)

HHMM:1200 LCRT:3

Related Program
Program 310
Program 710
Program 712
Program 713
Page 2-220

712 Enter the Route Table for Auto Route Selection

(MCP/MCP2)
This program allows the user to enter the time zone of the auto route selection
function, which connects the cheapest C.O. line group automatically by analyzing the
external phone number dialed by the user, a C.O. line group selected by its class, and
the number of a dial conversion table referring to the C.O. line group.
If the user dials a valid digit, the system will select a specific C.O. line group pre-set
based on route table for auto route selection. Up to 32 C.O. line groups can be entered to
the route table. However, up to 16 C.O. line groups can be entered to the route table of
the MCP board mounted iDCS-M.
If one or more C.O. line group is available for calling, the system will locate the first
specified C.O. line group and select an available C.O. line group. If all of the C.O.
line groups are busy, a call will be connected when a group is available.
Default
N/A
Display
LCR ROUTE (01:1)

C:1 G:NONE M:---
2.
Enter a route table ([01]-[32]).

Or, press [Volume] to select a route table.
LCR ROUTE (02:1)

C:1 G:NONE M:---
3.
Enter a timetable (LCRT : [1]-[4]).

Or, press [Volume] to select a timetable.
LCR ROUTE (02:2)

C:1 G:NONE M:---
4.
Enter a class ([1]-[8]).

Or, press [Volume] to select a class.
LCR ROUTE (02:2)

C:1 G:NONE M:---
5.
Enter the phone number of a C.O. line group(e.g. 800).

Or, press [Volume] to select a C.O. line group.
LCR ROUTE (02:2)

C:1 G:800 M:---
Page 2-221
6.
Enter a dial conversion table([001]-[200]) (e.g. 010).

Or, press [Volume] to select a dial conversion table.
LCR ROUTE (02:2)

C:1 G:800 M:010

Related Program
Program 310
Program 710
Program 712
Program 713
Page 2-222

Enter the Route Table for Auto Route Selection
713 Enter a Dial Conversion Table for Auto Route

Selection (MCP/MCP2)
This program allows the user to change(i.e. convert, insert, or add) a dial to make a
call after selecting a C.O. line group through the auto route selection function, which
connects the cheapest C.O. line group automatically by analyzing the external phone
number dialed by the user.
Up to 200 C.O. line groups can be entered to the dial conversion table. However, up
to 100 C.O. line groups can be entered to the dial conversion table in the MCP board
mounted iDCS-M.
Maximum Number of Digits
Number of Digits to be Deleted
15
Insert(Before Dialing)
14
Add(After Dialing)
14
The actual dialing order of all digits is Insert a Digit + Dial a Digit - Digit to be Deleted
+ Add a Digit.
Default
N/A
Display
LCR MODIFY (001)

NOF DEL DGT:00
2.
Enter a number from a dial conversion table

([001]-[200]).
Or, press [Volume] to select a number from a
dial conversion table.
LCR MODIFY (002)

NOF DEL DGT:00
3.
Enter the number(e.g. 02) of digits to be deleted

([00]-[15]).
Or, press [Volume] to select the number of digits.
LCR MODIFY (002)

I:
Page 2-223
4.
Enter a digit to be inserted and press the [Right]

Soft button.
5.
Enter a digit to be added and press the [Right]

Soft button.
LCR MODIFY (002)

A:_
LCR MODIFY (002)

NOF DEL DGT:02

Related Program
Program 310
Program 710
Program 711
Program 712
Page 2-224

714 Enter the Conversion Table of Dialing a Station

Directly (MCP/MCP2)
This program allows the user to change the name of the entered dial and a station
number selected depending on the dial when an external call is dialed to a station
directly.
Up to 999 dials can be entered to the dial conversion table. Up to 400 dials can be
entered to the dial conversion table in the MCP board mounted iDCS-M.
MOH SOURCE below is not supported in the MCP board mounted iDCS-M.
DGT
16 digits received from outside can be entered. A digit different from each other
can be entered as *.
(For example, enter 20* or 2** if there are 201, 202, and 203.)
MOH SOURCE
Music on Hold specified when holding tone depends on a digit received from
outside when a C.O. line incoming call holds. In case of NONE, Music on Hold
for each C.O. line is used.
RING PLAN
Displays station(group)/C.O. line(group) connected depending on day or night

mode. B means that the received digits are deleted from left to right as many as
the number set to Delete and remaining digits as using numbers is forwarded.
1-6
Displays statio (group)/C.O. line(group) terminated to each ring mode(6 in total).

B means that the received numbers are deleted from left to right as many as
the number set to Delete and remaining digits as using numbers is forwarded.
CW
Specifies whether call is parked automatically when the transferred station is busy.
DELETE
When incoming station(group)/C.O. line(group) in day or night mode is

displayed, the received digits shall be deleted from left to right as many as the
displayed number and remaining digits as using numbers shall be forwarded.
NAME
Enters a name corresponding to the entered digit with up to 11 characters.
Use dial buttons to enter a name in English. Press a dial to display characters below
save the displayed characters and move the cursor to the next character.
Press [A] to change uppercase/lowercase input modes.
Page 2-225
DS-4000/DS -5000 Phone

Number of
<
>
Space ?
Dialing
0
1
Number of
Dialing
order below :
#, space, &, !, :, ?, ., ,, %, $, -, <, >, /, =, [, ], @, ^, (, ), _, +, {, }, |, ; , , ,
When a digit is entered, enter '.' It means that all digits are applicable. When diurnal/
nocturnal incoming is set, press [B] to display B, which means that the entered digit
is dialed.
Default
MOH
ENTRY
DIGIT
CW
DELETE
NAME
001
2**
NO
N/A
NONE
002
3**
NO
N/A
NONE
003
5**
NO
N/A
NONE
004
8**
NO
N/A
NONE
Others
Page 2-226
SOURCE
N/A
Display
DID DIGIT (001)

DGT:2**
2. Enter the number(e.g. 005) from the conversion

table([001]-[999]).
Or, press [Volume] to select a number from the
dial conversion table.
DID DIGIT (005)

DGT:_
3. Enter a dial number. Press the [Right] Soft button

to move the cursor.
DID DIGIT (005)

MOH SOURCE:NONE
4. Enter the phone number of Music on Hold.

Or, press [Volume] to select Music on Hold.
DID DIGIT (005)

1:NONE 2:NONE
5. Enter the phone number of an incoming station

(group) or C.O. line(group) when ring mode is 1.
Or, press [Volume] to select an incoming
number. Press the [Right] Soft button
to move the cursor.
DID DIGIT (005)

1:B
2:NONE
6.
Enter the phone number of an incoming station(group)

or C.O. line(group) when ring mode is 2 to 6.
Or, press [Volume] to select an incoming number.
7.
Enter whether a call is parked or not automatically

([0]-[1]). Or, press [Volume] to select YES/NO.
8. Enter the number of a dial to be deleted([0]~[8]).

Or, press [Volume] to select a digit to be deleted.
9. Enter a name. Press the [Right] Soft button and
repeat the steps from 2.
DID DIGIT (005)

CW:NO DELETE:0
DID DIGIT (005)

CW:NO DELETE:0
DID DIGIT (005)

NAME:_
DID DIGIT (005)

DGT:6**

Related Program
Program 416
Set Private Line/DID Answering Mode
Page 2-227
715 Enter an Absent Message (MCP/MCP2)

This program allows the user to change and enter an absent message. Select a number
from Program 115, Set an Absent Message.
20 absent messages can be set to the MCP board mounted iDCS-M. 15 absent messages
can be set to the MCP2 board mounted system for each tenant.
Use dial buttons to enter a name in English. Press a dial to display characters below on
LCD depending on the number of pressing the same dial. Press another dial to save
the displayed characters and move the cursor to the next character. Press [A] to change
uppercase/lowercase input modes.
DS-4000/DS-5000 Phone
Number of
Dialing
0
1
<
>
Space ?
Number of
Dialing
order below :
#, space, &, !, :, ?, ., ,, %, $, -, <, >, /, =, [, ], @, ^, (, ), _, +, {, }, |, ; , , ,
Default
01.
02.
03.
04.
05.
06.
07.
08.
09.
10.
11-15.
Page 2-228
GIVE ME THE CALL

TAKE A MESSAGE
ASK THEM TO HOLD
SEND TO MY VM
TRSF TO MY SECY
LEAVE A MESSAGE
PAGE ME
OUT OF TOWN
IN A MEETING
I WILL CALL BACK
Blank Message
Display
PGM.MESSAGE (01)
GIVE ME THE CALL
2.
PGM.MESSAGE (12)
Blank Message
Enter a number(e.g. 16) of an absent message

([01]~[15]).
Or, press [Volume] to select the number of an
absent message. Press the [Right] Soft button
to move the cursor.
3. Use the above table to enter a message.

PGM.MESSAGE (12)
CALL TO MOBILE

Related Program
Program 115
Absent Message (MCP/MCP2)
Page 2-229
717 UCD Agent Code (MCP/MCP2)

This program allows the user to enter the code of UCD agent. The entered code of UCD
agent shall belong to only a UCD group. Up to 4 digits can be entered to the code.
System
MCP
MCP2
Maximum Number of Agent Code

iDCS-L
300
iDCS-M
100
iDCS-L
300
iDCS-M
100
Default
N/A
Display
AGENT PIN (001)

ID:
GRP:NONE
2.
Enter the number of an agent code.

Or, press [Volume] to select the number of an agent
code. Press the [Right] Soft button to move the cursor.
AGENT PIN (002)

ID:
GRP:NONE
3.
Enter an agent code. Press the [Right] Soft button

to move the cursor. Up to 4 digits can be entered
to an agent code.
AGENT PIN (002)

ID:432 GRP:NONE
4. Enter the number of a UCD group.

Or, press [Volume] to select a UCD group. Press the
[Right] Soft button and repeat the steps from 2.
AGENT PIN (002)

ID:432 GRP:510

Related Program
Program 607
Page 2-230
UCD Group Options
718 Area Code

This program allows the user to set the country code and area code(up to 4 digits) of
the city in which the system is installed. A country code and an area code is needed to
use CTI.
Default
AREA : NONE
COUNTRY : 82
Display
MY AREA CODE
AREA:
2.
Enter a country code([0]) or an area code([1]).

Or, press [Volume] to select a country code/an
area code. Press the [Right] Soft button to
move the cursor.
MY AREA CODE
COUNTRY:82
3.
Enter a country code or an area code(up to 4 digits).

Repeat the step 2 to select and enter a country
code or an area code again.
MY AREA CODE
AREA:02

Related Program
N/A
Page 2-231
719 Guidance Data (MCP2)

This program allows the user to enter guidance data to be displayed on large LCD
phones.
Use dial buttons to enter guidance data in English. Press a dial to display characters
below on LCD depending on the number of pressing the same dial. Press another dial
to save the displayed characters and move the cursor to the next character.
Press [A] to change uppercase/lowercase input modes.
Number of
Dialing
0
1
<
>
Space ?
Number of
Dialing
order below :
#, space, &, !, :, ?, ., ,, %, $, -, <, >, /, =, [, ], @, ^, (, ), _, +, {, }, |, ; , , ,
Default
N/A
2.
Page 2-232
Display
IDLE DISPLAY(01)
Press the location of the line of a large LCD phone

IDLE
(01~12) on which guidance data is to be displayed.
_
Or, press [Volume] to select the desired location
of the line. Press the [Right] Soft button to move the cursor.
DISPLAY(02)
3. Use the above table to enter guidance data.

IDLE DISPLAY(02)
WELCOME TO ABC

Related Program
Program 120
Large LCD Option (MCP2)
Page 2-233
720 Copy Keys

This program allows the user to copy the details of a button for each station to
another phone.
Default
N/A
Display
[201] COPY KEY

FROM:NONE
2.
[202] COPY KEY

FROM:NONE
Enter the phone number(station number) of a

digital phone.
Or, press [Volume] to select a phone number.
Or, press [Message] to set all digital phones.
[ALL] COPY KEY

FROM:NONE
3. Enter the phone number(station number) of source

[202] COPY
digital phone to be copied(e.g. 201).
FROM:201
Or, press [Volume] to select a station number to
be copied. Press the [Right] Soft button to move the cursor.
KEY

Related Program
Program 107
Program 721
Program 722
Program 723
Page 2-234
Subscriber Button Extenders (MCP/MCP2)

Save/Restore Keys
Set a Button for Each Phone Type (MCP/MCP2)
721 Save/Restore Keys

This program allows the user to save(1.SAVE) or restore(0.RESTORE) the details of
buttons for each station. Save a key to a buffer depending on the type of phones.
A buffer is used for Program 723, Set a Button for Each Type of Phones. If a phone
is installed newly, the buffer is used to initialize programmable buttons. Use the buffer
carefully.
Default
RESTORE
Display
[201] SAVE KEY

RESTORE
2.
Enter the phone number(station number) of a

digital phone.
Or, press [Volume] to select a station number.
[202] SAVE KEY

RESTORE
3.
Enter [1] (Save) or [0] (Restore).

Or, press [Volume] to select Save/Restore.
[202] SAVE KEY

SAVE

Related Program
Program 107
Program 722
Program 723

Page 2-235
722 Set a Button for Each Station (MCP/MCP2)

This program allows the user to set a specific function to the programmable buttons
of a phone(24-button phone and add-on module).
The multipurpose button(CALL) is set to programmable buttons 1 and 2 by default.
When a function is selected, the function that starts with a character is displayed
depending on the number of pressing a dial.
Dial
Number
1
If the user wants to set the function that was already set to another button, a message,
SAME KEY IS K___ will be displayed and the user will be prompted to change the
setting. Press [1] to delete the existing button and set the function to the new button.
The types of functions that can be set to programmable buttons are described below :
Function expansion numbers are set to some functions (marked as ___) so that the
functions can be used independently. An expansion number shall be set to the function
of selecting C.O. line and C.O. line group directly. However, expansion numbers
might not be set to the other functions.
AAPLAY
AA Message Play
AAREC
AA Message Record
AB
Absence
ABAND
Check an abandoned call by a caller before answering(CID ABANDON)
ABW
Connect/disconnect to an agent from UCD group
ACC
Accountant : Not supported to the MCP board mounted iDCS-M system
ACCT
Accountant : Supported to the MCP board mounted iDCS-M system only
ALARM
Alarm
AN/RLS
Answer/Release-Can be set only if this function is not already set to the fixed key
BARGE
Barge-in/Override
Page 2-236
BILL
Billing to a room : Serves as a hotel
BLOCK
OHVA Block
BOOK
Booking
BOOTH
Set to use a booth phone : Serves as a hotel
BOSS
Boss and Secretary
CAD
Call Activity Display
CALL
Call Button-Expansion number is set automatically
CAMP
Station Camp-on
CANMG
Message-Cancel
CBK
Call Back
CHIN
Check-in : Serves as a hotel
CHOUT
Check-out : Serves as a hotel
CHOICE
Spot Choice Information Display
CID
CID Function Selection
CONF
Conference
CONP
Connected Name Display : Not supported to the MCP board mounted

iDCS-M system
CR
Record to internal voice mail(Call Record)
CREDIT
Check and change charges for a room : Serves as a hotel
CS
Park status of UCD group(CALL STATUS)
CSNR
Save caller ID to SNR buffer(CID Saved Number Redial)
DGPALM
Set alarm time on multiple stations
DICT
Dictation
DIR_
Directory dial(Directory)
DIVERT
Divert to secretary : Supported to the MCP2 system
DLOCK
Answer to door phone ring(Door Unlock)
DND
Do Not Disturb
DNDO
DND Override
DP
Direct Pick Up
DROP
Call drop and reset during transfer(Call Drop)
DS
Direct station selection button(DSS Key)
DT
Direct C.O. line selection button(DTS Key)
EP
Established call Pick up

: Not supported to the MCP board mounted iDCS-M system
EXTMIC
Select external/internal microphones from a phone to which an external microphone can

be connected(External Microphone)
FAUTO
Forced Auto Answer(by a caller)
FLASH
C.O. line Flash
FWRD
Call Forward
Page 2-237
GPIK
Group Pick Up
GCONF
Call a Conference Group : Supported to the MCP2 system
HDSET
Headset Mode
HLDPK
Hold Pick Up
HOLD
Hold
HOTEL
Hotel : Serves as a hotel
IG
In/out of Group
INFDSP
Display information on spot view
INQIRE
Query CID information on holding tone(CID Inquire)
ISPY
Check the call status of another station(CID I SPY)
LANREQ
Send control message to LAN card(LAN Request)
LCR
Auto Route Selection
LISTN
Group Listening
LNR
Last Number Redial : Can be set only if this function is not already set to the
fixed key
LOG
Search the latest saved incoming/outgoing calls(Call LOG)
MMPA
Meet Me Page Answer
MMPG
Meet Me Page
MS
Transmit a specific tone to key destination(Manual Signaling)

MSG
Message : Can be set only if this function is not already set to the fixed key
MUTE
Mute : Can be set only if this function is not already set to the fixed key
MW
Message Waiting
NEW
New Call
NIGHT
C.O. line night group(Night Group)
NND
Transform number/name/data mode when a caller ID is checked

(Number/Name/Date)
NOCLIP
NO CLIP Send
NXT
Select the next data when a caller ID is checked(CID Next Call)
OHVA
Off Hook Voice Announcement
OPER
Attendant Call(Operator)
PAGE
Page
PAGPK
Pick Up Page Hold
PARK
Call Park/Retrieve
PAUSE
Pause
PMSG
Status Message
PRB
Privacy Release/Bridge
Page 2-238
PROG
Program
PTHR
Path Replacement
RB
Room Bill: Serves as a hotel
REJECT
OHVA Reject
RETRY
Auto Redial On Busy
REVW
CID Review
RP
Transform/display ring mode(Ring Plan)
RSV
Room Status View : Serves as a hotel
RTO
Ring Plan Override
SETDND
Set/Release DND to other stations

SETMG
Set Message W/O Ring
SG
Station Group
SLOCAT
Staff Locater : Serves as a hotel
SNR
Saved Number Redial
SP
Supervisor
SPD
Speed Dial
SPKR
Speaker. Can be set only if this function is not already set to the fixed key
STATE
Set the status of boss : Supported to the MCP2 system
STORE
Store caller ID to individual speed dial buffer
SYSALM
System Fault Alarm
TG
Trunk Group
TIMER
Timer
TRARPT
Traffic Report
: LAN card is required in the system to which the MCP board is mounted.
TRSF
Transfer. Can be set only if this function is not already set to the fixed key
UA
UNA Pick Up
VDIAL
Voice Dial
VG
SVM-800 Group Message
VM
Call an internal voice mail(VM Memo)
VMADM
Change an internal voice mail(VM Administration)
VMAME
Auto-answer an an internal voice mail(VM Auto Answer Emulation)
VMMSG
Check messages in an internal voice mail(VM Message)
VMSCMT
SVM-800 announcements(VMS Commect)
VMSMSG
Check SVM-800 messages(VMS Message)
VMSOUT
SVM-800 out call mode(VMS OUT CALL)
VMSCMT
Page 2-239
VMSMSG
VMSOUT
VMSREC
Record SVM-800(VMS Record)
VMSVAC
VMS(Vacant)
VREC
Voice Record
VT
VMS Transfer
WAKEUP
Wakeup Call : Serves as a hotel
XCHIN
Fast check-in : Serves as a hotel
Default
<24-button Digital Phone>
CALL1
CALL1
CALL2
CALL1
DT701
CALL1
DT702
CALL1
DT703
CALL1
DT704
CALL1
DT705
CALL1
DT706
CALL1
DT7017
CALL1
DT708
CALL1
DT709
CALL1
DT7010
CALL1
DT711
CALL1
DT712
CALL1
DT713
CALL1
DT714
CALL1
DT715
CALL1
DT716
CALL1
CONF
CALL1
SPD
CALL1
NONE
CALL1
PAGE
CALL1
CBK
CALL1
GPIK01
CALL1
48-button Add-on module
Page 2-240
DS
CALL1
DS
CALL1
DS
CALL1
DS
CALL1
DS
CALL1
DS
CALL1
DS
CALL1
DS
CALL1
DS
CALL1
DS
CALL1
DS
CALL1
DS
CALL1
DS
CALL1
DS
CALL1
DS
CALL1
DS
CALL1
DS
CALL1
DS
CALL1
DS
CALL1
DS
CALL1
DS
CALL1
DS
CALL1
DS
CALL1
DS
CALL1
DS
CALL1
DS
CALL1
DS
CALL1
DS
CALL1
DS
CALL1
DS
CALL1
DS
CALL1
DS
CALL1
DS
CALL1
DS
CALL1
DS
CALL1
DS
CALL1
DS
CALL1
DS
CALL1
DS
CALL1
DS
CALL1
DS
CALL1
DS
CALL1
DS
CALL1
DS
CALL1
DS
CALL1
DS
CALL1
DS
CALL1
DS
CALL1
Display
[201] KEY [MAST]
01:CALL1
2.
Enter the phone number of a digital phone.

Or, press [Volume] to select an absent station.
3.
Enter a digital phone([0]) or a add-on module([1]-[4]).

Or, press [Volume] to select a digital phone/button
expansion box. Press the [Right] Soft button to
move the cursor. If a add-on module is not set in
pairs, this step will be skipped.
[202] KEY [MAST]

01:CALL1
4.
Enter the number of a programmable button([01]-[99]).

Or, press [Volume] to select a button number.
[202] KEY [MAST]

03:DT701 _
[202] KEY [MAST]

01:CALL1
5. Use dial buttons and [Volume] to select a function.

If the button does not need an expansion number,
data will be saved and status will be returned
to Step 4.
[202] KEY (MAST)

03:DT701 GPIK_
6. Enter an expansion number.

Or, press [Volume] to select an expansion number.
[202] KEY [MAST]

03:DT701 DS201
[202] KEY [MAST]

03:DT701 DS

Related Program
Program 107
Program 209
Program 720
Program 721
Program 723

Assign Add-On Module (MCP/MCP2)
Copy Keys
Save/Restore Keys
Page 2-241
723 Set a Button for Each Type of a Phone (MCP/MCP2)

This program allows the user to set the same function to the same programmable
button for each type of phones that have programmable buttons.
For MCP
00
24 BTN SETS
Phone that has 24 programmable buttons
01
12 BTN SETS
02
7 BTN SETS
03
6 BTN SETS
04
32 BTN AOMS
Add-on module that has 32 programmable buttons
05
40-64 BTN AOMS
Add-on module that has 40-64 programmable buttons
06
20 BTN SETS
07
28 BTN SETS
08
18 BTN SETS
09
8 BTN SETS
For MCP2
00
24 BTN SETS
01
12 BTN SETS
02
7 BTN SETS
03
6 BTN SETS
04
32 BTN AOMS
Add-on module that has 32 programmable buttons
05
40-64 BTN AOMS
Add-on module that has 40-64 programmable buttons
06
20 BTN SETS
07
28 BTN SETS
08
18 BTN SETS
09
8 BTN SETS
10
99 BTN SETS
11
38 BTN SETS
12
21 BTN SETS
13
14 BTN SETS
Page 2-242
A multipurpose button(CALL) is set to programmable buttons 1 and 2 by default.

When a function is selected, the function that starts with a character is displayed
depending on the number of dialing.
Dial
Number
1
If the user wants to set a function specified to another button, a message, SAME
KEY IS K___ will be displayed to prompt if the function is changed. Press [1] to
delete the existing button and set the function to another button.
The types of functions that can be set to programmable buttons are shown below : Set a
function expansion number to use some functions(underlined). An expansion number
shall be set to the function of selecting a C.O. line and a C.O. line group directly.
An expansion number does not need to be set to the other functions.
AAPLAY
Play Auto Attendant Messages(AA Message Play)
AAREC
Record Auto Attendant Messages(AA Message Record)
AB
ABSENCE
ABAND
Check information on caller abort calls before response(CID ABANDON)
ABW
Call connection/Release a UCD group
ACC
Account : Not supported to the MCP board mounted iDCS-M system
ACCT
Account : Supported to the MCP board mounted iDCS-M system
ALARM
Alarm
AN/RLS
Answer/Release - Can be set only if this function is not set to a fixing key.
BARGE
Barge-in/Override
BILL
Billing to Room Charge : Serves as Hotel
BLOCK
Off hook Page Lock(OHVA BLOCK)
BOOK
Booking
BOOTH
Booth phone is set to be used : Serves as a hotel
Page 2-243
BOSS
Boss and Secretary
CAD
Display call processing status
CALL
Multipurpose Call Button-Expansion number is automatically set
CAMP
Station Camp-on
CANMG
Cancel Messages
CBK
Call Back
CHIN
Check-in : Serves as a hotel
CHOUT
Check-out : Serves as a hotel
CHOICE
Display information on spot choice
CID
Select CID function
CONF
Conference
CONP
Connected Name Display

CR
Record internal voice mail(Call Record)
CREDIT
Check and change charges for a room : Serves as a hotel
CS
Call Status(of the UCD group)
CSNR
Save caller ID to SNR buffer(CID Saved Number Redial)
DGPALM
Set alarm time to multiple stations
DICT
Note(Dictation)
DIR_
Directory Dial
DIVERT
Transfer to secretary : Supported to the MCP2 system
DLOCK
Door Unlock
DND
Do Not Disturb
DNDO
DND Override
DP
Direct Pick up
DROP
Call drop and reset during transfer(Call Drop)
DS
Direct station selection button(DSS Key)
DT
Direct C.O. line selection button(DTS Key)
EP
Established call Pick up

EXTMIC
Select external/internal microphones from a phone to which an external

microphone can be connected(External Microphone)
FAUTO
Forced Auto Answer(by a caller)
FLASH
C.O. line Flash
FWRD
Call Forward
GPIK
Group Pick Up
GRCONF
Call a Conference Group : Supported to the MCP2 system
HDSET
Headset Mode
HLDPK
Hold Pick Up
Page 2-244
HOLD
Hold
HOTEL
Hotel : Serves as a hotel
IG
In/out of Group
INFDSP
Display information on spot view
INQIRE
Query CID information on holding tone(CID Inquire)
ISPY
Check the call status of another station(CID I SPY)
LANREQ
Send control message to LAN card(LAN Request)
LCR
LISTN
Group Listening
LNR
Last Number Redial : Can be set only if this function is not already set to the
fixed key
LOG
Search the latest saved incoming/outgoing calls(Call LOG)
MMPA
Meet Me Page Answer
MMPG
Meet Me Page
MS
Transmit a specific tone to key destination(Manual Signaling)

MSG
MUTE
Mute : Can be set only if this function is not already set to the fixed key
MW
Message Waiting
NEW
New Call
NIGHT
C.O. line night group(Night Group)
NND
Transform number/name/data mode when a caller ID is checked

(Number/Name/Date)
NOCLIP
NO CLIP Send
NXT
Select the next data when a caller ID is checked(CID Next Call)
OHVA
Off Hook Voice Announcement
OPER
Attendant Call(Operator)
PAGE
Page
PAGPK
Pick Up Page Hold
PARK
Call Park/Retrieve
PAUSE
Pause
PMSG
Status Message
PRB
Privacy Release/Bridge
PROG
Program
PTHR
Path Replacement
RB
Room Bill : Serves as a hotel
Page 2-245
REJECT
OHVA Reject
RETRY
Auto Redial On Busy
REVW
CID Review
RP
Transform/display ring mode(Ring Plan)
RSV
Room Status View : Serves as a hotel
RTO
Ring Plan Override
SETDND
Set/Release DND to other stations(REMOTE SET DND)

SETMG
SG
Station Group
SLOCAT
Staff Locater : Serves as a hotel
SNR
Saved Number Redial
SP
Supervisor
SPD
Speed Dial
SPKR
Speaker. Can be set only if this function is not already set to the fixed key
STATE
Specify the state of a boss : Supported to the MCP2 system only
STORE
Store caller ID to individual speed dial buffer(CID STORE)
SYSALM
System Fault Alarm
TG
Trunk Group
TIMER
Timer
TRARPT
Traffic Report
: LAN card is required in the system to which the MCP board is mounted.
TRSF
Transfer. Can be set only if this function is not already set to the fixed key
UA
UNA Pick Up
VDIAL
Voice Dial
VG
SVM-800 Group Message
VM
Call an internal voice mail(VM Memo)
VMADM
Change an internal voice mail(VM Administration)
VMAME
Auto-answer an an internal voice mail(VM Auto Answer Emulation)
VMMSG
Check messages in an internal voice mail(VM Message)
VMSCMT
VMSMSG
VMSOUT
VMSREC
Record SVM-800(VMS Record)
VMSVAC
VMS(Vacant)
VREC
Voice Record
VT
VMS Transfer
WAKEUP
Wakeup Call : Serves as a hotel
XCHIN
Fast check-in : Serves as a hotel
Page 2-246
Default
Same as the default of Program 722 Set a Button for Each Station.
Display
TYPE:24 BTN SETS

01:CALL1
2. Enter the type of a digital phone([00]-[13]).

Or, press [Volume] to select the type of a
digital phone. Press the [Right] Soft button
to move the cursor.
TYPE:24 BTN SETS

01:CALL1
3. Enter the number of a programmable button([01]-[99]).

Or, press [Volume] to select a button number.
TYPE:24 BTN SETS

03:DT701
4. Use dial buttons and [Volume] to select the type

of functions. Press the [Right] Soft button to move
the cursor. If the button does not need an
expansion number, data will be saved and status
will be returned to Step 3.
TYPE:24 BTN SETS

03:DT701 DS_
5.
TYPE:24 BTN SETS

03:DT701 DS201
Enter the expansion number of a function.

Or, press [Volume] to select an expansion number.

Related Program
Program 107
Program 209
Program 720
Program 721
Program 722

Assign Add-On Module (MCP/MCP2)
Copy Keys
Save/Restore Keys
Page 2-247
724 Change Dial Numbers (MCP/MCP2)

This program allows the user to change stations, C.O. lines, station groups, C.O.
line groups, dial numbers(function numbers) that call the functions.
For MCP
00
STN DIAL NO.
Station dial number. Displays cabinet-slot-port offset numbers.
01
TRK DIAL NO.
C.O. line dial number. Displays cabinet-slot-port offset numbers.
02
AA DIAL NO.
03
MISC DIAL NO.
Other port dial number. Displays cabinet-slot-port offset numbers.
04
STNG DIAL NUMBER
Dial number of station group. Displays the number of groups.
05
TRKG DIAL NUMBER
Dial number of C.O. line group. Displays a group number.
06
FEAT DIAL NUMBER
Displays functions.
07
S0 STN DIAL NO.
Dial number of ISDN phone. Displays the serial number of phones.
09
NTWK LCR DIAL NO.
Networking and dial number. Displays serial number : for iDCS-L

system only
10
VIRT EXT DIAL NO.
Virtual station dial number without hardware. Displays serial number
For MCP2
00
STN DIAL NO.
Station dial number. Displays cabinet-slot-port offset numbers.
01
TRK DIAL NO.
02
AA/VD DIAL NO AA
Or VOICE DIAL number. Displays cabinet-slot-port offset numbers.
03
MISC DIAL NO.
Other port dial number. Displays cabinet-slot-port offset numbers.
04
STNG DIAL NUMBER
Station group dial number. Displays a group number.
05
TRKG DIAL NUMBER
C.O. line group dial number. Displays a group number.
06
FEAT DIAL NUMBER
Displays functions.
07
S0 STN DIAL NO.
ISDN phone dial number. Displays the serial number of a phone.
09
NTWK LCR DIAL NO
Networking dial number. Displays serial number.
10
VIRT SLT DIAL NO
Station dial number of virtual phone without hardware.
11
VIRT DGP DIAL NO
Displays serial number.

Station dial number of virtual digital phone without hardware.
Displays serial number.
Page 2-248
12
MGI DIAL NO.
MGI dial number. Displays cabinet-slot-port offset numbers.
13
IP STN DIAL NO.
IP phone dial number
14
MOBILE DIAL NO.
Dial number of a wireless terminal
15
VOIP NET DIAL NO.
Virtual C.O. line dial number of VOIP networking
16
H323 TRK DIAL NO
Virtual C.O. line dial number of VOIP H.323 connection
17
SIP TRK DIAL NO
Virtual C.O. line dial number of VOIP SIP connection
If the user wants to set an existing dial number, SAME DIAL EXIST will be
displayed to prompt if the dial number will be replaced. Press [1] to delete already
set dial number and set a new function. When a function to replace the dial number is
selected, a function that starts with the character corresponding to the number of
dialing is displayed.
Dial
Number
1
The type of functions that change phone numbers are described below :
ABAND
Checks Information on Caller Abort Call before Response
ABS
Absent
ABW
Call connection/release UCD group agent
ACCT
ACCOUNT
ALMCLR
Disables Alarms
AUTH
Class change code(AUTHORIZED PREFIX)
BARGE
BARGE-IN/OVERRIDE
BILL
Billing to Room Charge - Serves as a hotel
BLOCK
Lock Offset Page(OHVA BLOCK)
BOSS
Boss and Secretary
CAMP
STATION CAMP-ON
CANMG
MESSAGE CANCEL
CBK
CALL BACK
CHIN
Check-in - Serves as a hotel
CHOUT
Check-out - Serves as a hotel
CHOICE
Displays information on SPOT CHOICE
CONF
CONFERENCE
CONP
CONNECTED NAME DISPLAY
CR
Records into internal voice mail(CALL RECORD)
CREDIT
Check and change charge for room - Serves as a hotel
Page 2-249
DGPALM
Set alarm time to multiple stations
DICT
Note(Dictation)
DIR
Directory Dial
DIRPK
Direct Pick Up
DISALM
DISA Alarm Clear
DIVERT
Divert : Supported to the MCP2 system only
DLOCK
Door Unlock
DND
Do Not Disturb
DNDO
DND Override
FAUTO
Forced Auto Answer
FLASH
C.O. line Flash
FWD
Call Forward
GCONF
Calls Conference Group : Supported to the MCP2 system only
GPPK
Group Pick Up
HDSET
Headset Mode
HLDPK
Hold Pick Up
HOLD
Hold
HOTEL
Hotel-Serves as a hotel
IG
In/Out Of Group
INFDSP
Displays Information on Spot View
LCR
LISTN
Group Listening
LNR
Last Number Redial-Can be set only if this function is not already set to
the fixed key
LOG
Searches the latest saved incoming/outgoing calls(CALL LOG)
MMPA
Meet Me Page Answer
MMPG
Meet Me Page
MSG
MYGRPK
My Group Pick Up
NEW
New Call
NIGHT
Trunk Night Group
NOCLIP
No Clip Send
OHVA
Off hook Page
OPER
Operator
PAGE
Page
PAGPK
Pick Up Page Hold
Page 2-250
PARK
Call Park/Retrieve
PMSG
Status Message
PTHR
Path Replacement
RB
Room Bill-Serves as a hotel
REJECT
OHVA Reject
RSV
Room Status View-Serves as a hotel
RTO
Ring Plan Time Override
SETMG
SKIP
Determines destination after deleting a digit second to the last
SLOCAT
Staff Locater-Serves as a Hotel
SLTALM
Set Alarm
SLTMMC
SLT Programming
SNR
Saved Number Redial
SPEED
Speed Dial
SRELOC
Set Relocation
STATE
Set the Status of Boss : Supported to the MCP2 system only
UA
UNA Pick Up
VDIAL
Voice Dial
VMADM
VM Administration
VMAME
VM Auto Answer Emulation
VMMEMO
VM Memo
VMMSG
VM Message
VMSCMT
VMS COMMECT
VMSMSG
VMS Message
VMSOUT
VMS Out Call
VMSREC
VMS Record
VMSVAC
VMS Vacant
VREC
Voice Record
WAKEUP
Wakeup Time Stamp-Serves as a Hotel
WCOS
Changes to the service class of the users station(Walking COS)
ZONE
Ignores call limitation between stations
Page 2-251
Default
STN DIAL NUM
Serial numbers from 201 or 2001 depending on installed cards
TRK DIAL NUM
Serial numbers from 701 or 7001 depending on installed cards
AA DIAL NUM
Serial numbers from 3951 depending on installed cards
MISC DIAL NUM
Serial numbers from 3901 and 3801 depending on types
STNG DIAL NUMBER
<MCP>
iDCS-L : 500~549 or 5000~5049, iDCS-M : 500~529 or 5000~5029
<MCP2>
iDCS-L : 500~579 or 5000~5079, iDCS-M : 500~539 or 5000~5039
TRKG DIAL NUMBER
<MCP> L : 9, 800~848, M : 9, 800~809

<MCP2> L : 9, 800~828, M : 9, 800~828
FEAT DIAL NUMBER
Page 2-252
ABAND
64
ABS
NONE
ABW
NONE
ACCT
47
ALMCLR
57
AUTH
NONE
BARGE
NONE
BILL
NONE
BLOCK
NONE
BOSS
NONE
CAMP
45
CANMG
42
CBK
44
CHIN
NONE
CHOUT
NONE
CHOICE
NONE
CONF
46
CONP
NONE
CR
NONE
CREDIT
NONE
DGPALM :
NONE
DICT
NONE
DIR
NONE
DIRPK
65
DISALM
58
DLOCK
13
DIVERT
NONE
FEAT DIAL NUMBER
DLOCK
13
DND
40
DNDO
NONE
FAUTO
14
FLASH
49
FWD
60
GRCONF
NONE
GRPK
66
HDSET
NONE
HLDPK
12
HOLD
11
HOTEL
NONE
IG
53
INFDSP
NONE
LCR
NONE
LISTN
NONE
LNR
19
LOG
NONE
FAUTO
14
FLASH
49
MMPA
56
MMPG
54
MSG
43
MMPA
56
MMPG
54
MSG
43
MYGRPK
NEW
NONE
NIGHT
NONE
NOCLIP
NONE
OHVA
NONE
OPER
PAGE
55
PAGPK
10
PARK
NONE
PMSG
48
PTHR
NONE
RB
NONE
REJECT
NONE
Page 2-253
FEAT DIAL NUMBER
RSV
NONE
RTO
NONE
SETMG
41
SKIP
NONE
SLOCAT
NONE
SLTALM
NONE
SLTMMC
15
SNR
17
SPEED
16
SRELOC
NONE
STATE
NONE
UA
67
VDIAL
681
VMADM
NONE
VMAME
NONE
VMMEMO
NONE
VMMSG
NONE
VMSCMT
NONE
VMSMSG
NONE
VMSOUT
NONE
VMSREC
NONE
VMSVAC
NONE
VREC
682
WAKEUP
18
WCOS
59
ZONE
NONE
SO STN DIAL NO
8701~
NTWK LCR DIAL NO
NONE
VIRT SLT DIAL NO
3501~
VIRT DGT DIAL NO
3401~
MGI DIAL NO
3801~
IP STN DIAL NO
3201~
MOBILE DIAL NO
3301~
VOIP NET DIAL NO
8301~
H323 TRK DIAL NO
8401~
SIP TRK DIAL NO
8501~
Page 2-254
Display
STN DIAL NO. :C1

S1-P01:201
2.
Select the desired type of a dial number.

Or, press [Volume] to select the desired type
of a dial number. Press the [Right] Soft button
to move the cursor.
STN DIAL NO. :C1

S1-P01:201
3.
Enter the number of a cabinet([1]-[3]).

Or, press [Volume] to select a cabinet.
STN DIAL NO. :C1

S1-P01:201
4.
Enter a slot number([1]-[9]).

Or, press [Volume] to select a slot. Press
STN DIAL NO. :C1

S4-P01:217
5.
Enter a port offset number([01]-[32]).

Or, press [Volume] to select a port offset
number. Press the [Right] Soft button to
move the cursor.
STN DIAL NO. :C1

S4-P01:217
6.
Enter a dial number. Press the [Right] Soft button

to save the data.
STN DIAL NO. :C1

S4-P01:217 301

Related Program
All programs
Page 2-255
725 Options of Printing System Message Detail

Recording (MCP/MCP2)
This program allows the user to set variables to print System Message Detail
Recording(SMDR).
For MCP
00
PAGE HEADER
Specifies whether to print a page header.
01
LINE PER PAGE
Number of lines to be printed per page(Up to 99 lines).
02
INCOMING CALL
Specifies whether to print information on incoming calls.
03
OUTGOING CALL
Specifies whether to print information on outgoing calls.
04
AUTHORIZE CODE
Specifies whether to print information on authorize code.
05
SMDR START TIME
Specifies whether to print information on a call that ended before

start time.
06
IN/OUT GROUP
Specifies whether to print information on In/Out Group.
07
DND CALL
Specifies whether to print information on DND calls.
08
WAKE-UP CALL
Specifies whether to print information on wake up call.
09
DIRECTORY NAME
Name of a company to be printed along with header.
10
CALLER ID DATA
Specifies whether to print SMDR of caller ID(up to 16 characters).
11
ABANDON CALL
Specifies whether to print information on abandon call before
12
LONG DISTANCE
Specifies whether to print outgoing calls dialed with numbers
answering.
that start with 0.
13
NO. OF DIAL MASK
Number of dial digits not to be printed(up to 18 characters).
15
INCOMING ANSWER
Specifies whether print is made at time of answering incoming

calls. This is meant to be aware of answering time.
16
INTERCOM CALL
Specifies whether to print intercom calls.
17
KEY MMC IN/OUT
Specifies whether key programming starts or ends.
23
DID NUM/NAME
Specifies whether to print the number and name of incoming

calls through DID.
For MCP2
00
PAGE HEADER
Specifies whether to print page header.
01
LINE PER PAGE
Number of lines to be printed per page(Up to 99 lines).
02
INCOMING CALL
Specifies whether to print information on incoming calls.
03
OUTGOING CALL
Specifies whether to print information on outgoing calls.
04
AUTHORIZE CODE
Specifies whether to print information on authorize code.
05
SMDR START TIME
Specifies whether to print information on a call that ended before

start time.
Page 2-256
06
IN/OUT GROUP
Specifies whether to print information on In/Out Group.
07
DND CALL
Specifies whether to print information on DND calls.
08
WAKE-UP CALL
Specifies whether to print information on wake up call.
09
DIRECTORY NAME
Name of a company to be printed along with header
10
CALLER ID DATA
Specifies whether to print SMDR of caller ID(up to 16 characters).
11
ABANDON CALL
Specifies whether to print information on abandon call before

answering.
12
LONG DISTANCE
Specifies whether to print outgoing calls dialed with numbers that

start with 0.
13
NO. OF DIAL MASK
Number of dial digits not to be printed(up to 18 characters)
15
INCOMING ANSWER
Specifies whether print is made at time of answering incoming
16
INTERCOM CALL
Specifies whether to print intercom calls.
17
KEY MMC IN/OUT
Specifies whether key programming starts or ends.
20
HOTEL PAGE FEED
Specifies a location at which page feed is inserted when HM
calls. This is meant to be aware of answering time.
REPT is printed.
21
HOTEL START LINE
Specifies the number of blank lines at the top of pages when HM

REPT is printed.
22
MIN. OF DIAL VIEW
Specifies the minimum number of digits to be displayed when

dial masks are specified to SMDR.
23
DID NUM/NAME
Specifies whether to print the number and name of incoming

calls through DID.
A directory name can have up to 16 characters long. Refer to the description below :
Use dial buttons to enter names in English. Press a dial to display characters below
save the displayed characters and move the cursor to the next character. Press [A] to
change uppercase/lowercase input modes.
Number of
Dialing
0
1
<
>
Space ?
Number of
Dialing
Page 2-257
order below :
#, space, &, !, :, ?, ., ,, %, $, -, <, >, /, =, [, ], @, ^, (, ), _, +, {, }, |, ; , , ,
Default
For MCP
PAGE HEADER
YES
LINE PER PAGE
60 Lines
INCOMING CALL
NO
OUTGOING CALL
YES
AUTHORIZE CODE
NO
SMDR START TIME
YES
IN/OUT GROUP
NO
DND CALL
NO
WAKE-UP CALL
YES
DIRECTORY NAME
N/A
CALLER ID DATA
NO
ABANDON CALL
NO
LONG DISTANCE
NO
NO. OF DIAL MASK
00
INCOMING ANSWER
NO
INTERCOM CALL
NO
KEY MMC IN/OUT
NO
DID NUM/NAME
YES
For MCP2
PAGE HEADER
YES
LINE PER PAGE
60 Lines
INCOMING CALL
NO
OUTGOING CALL
YES
AUTHORIZE CODE
NO
SMDR START TIME
YES
IN/OUT GROUP
NO
DND CALL
NO
WAKE-UP CALL
YES
DIRECTORY NAME
N/A
CALLER ID DATA
NO
ABANDON CALL
NO
LONG DISTANCE
NO
NO. OF DIAL MASK
00
Page 2-258
INCOMING ANSWER
NO
INTERCOM CALL
NO
KEY MMC IN/OUT
NO
HOTEL PAGE FEED:
END
HOTEL START LINE:
MIN. OF DIAL VIEW
00
DID NUM/NAME
YES
Display
PAGE HEADER
PRINT:YES
2.
Press an option number([0]-[17]).

Or, press [Volume] to select an option.
INCOMING CALL
PRINT:NO
3.
Enter option data.

Or, press [Volume] to select data.
INCOMING CALL
PRINT:YES
4.

Related Program
Program 300
Program 804
Set Station Function ON/OFF

Set System I/O Port Parameter (MCP/MCP2)
Page 2-259
726 Voice Mail/Auto Attendant Options

This program allows the user to set variables on Voice Mail/Auto Attendant(VM/AA).
The 8 variables are described below :
0
EXT FOR DN1
First Dial Number of Station
TRK FOR DN1
First Dial Number of C.O. Line
EXT FOR DN2
Second Dial Number of Station
TRK FOR DN2
Second Dial Number of C.O. Line
SEPARATOR
Separator
DISCONNECT SIGNAL
Disconnect Signal
CALL TYPE ID
Call Type ID
PROGRESS TONE ID
CALLER ID NUMBER
0. DIRECT CALL
Direct Call
1. ALL FWD CALL
Call Forwarding Unconditional
2. BSY FWD CALL
Call Forwarding Busy
3. NOA FWD CALL
Call Forwarding No Reply
4. RECALL
Recall
5. DIR TRK CALL
Direct Trunk Call
6. OVERFLOW
Overflow
7. DID CALL
DID Call
8. MESSAGE CALL
Message Call
Progress Tone ID
0. DIAL TONE
Dial Tone
1. BUSY TONE
Busy Tone
2. RING BACK TONE
Ring Back Tone
3. DND NO MORE
DND Tone
4. HDSET ANSWER
Headset Answer
5. SPKER ANSWER
Speaker Answer
Specifies whether to provide information on the caller
Default
Page 2-260
EXT FOR DN1
NO
TRK FOR DN1
NO
EXT FOR DN2
NO
TRK FOR DN2
NO
SEPERATOR
NO
DISCONECT SIGNAL
NO
CALL TYPE ID
DIRECT CALL
NO
ALL FWD CALL
NO
BSY FWD CALL
NO
NOA FWD CALL
NO
RECALL
NO
DIR TRK CALL
NO
OVERFLOW
NO
DID CALL
NO
MESSAGE CALL
NO
PROGRESS TONE ID
DIAL TONE
NO
BUSY TONE
NO
RING BACK TONE
NO
DND NO MORE
NO
HDSET ANSWER
NO
SPKER ANSWER
NO
CALLER ID NUMBER
NO
Button A : Enter an alphabet A
Button B : Enter an alphabet B
Button C : Enter an alphabet C
Display
EXT FOR DN1

NO
2.
Press an option number([0]-[8]).

Or, press [Volume] to select an option number.
Press the [Right] Soft button.
TRK FOR DN1

NO
3-1. [0]-[3] : For dial number, press [1] (YES) or [0](NO).

TRK FOR DN1

YES
Page 2-261
3-2. [4]-[5] : For separator or disconnect signal,

press an ID(0-9, *, , or A-C).
Or, press [Volume] to select an ID.
SEPERATOR
NO
3-3. [6]-[8] : For call type or progress tone, press

[Volume] to select a type number. Press the
[Right] Soft button to move the cursor and
then, press an ID(0-9, *, , or A-C).
Or, press [Volume] to select an ID.
Then, press the [Left] Soft button.
CALL TYPE ID
DIRECT CALL : NO
CALL TYPE ID
DIRECT CALL : *
4. Press [Transfer] to exit the program. Or, press [Speaker]

to move on to the next program.
Related Program
Program 207
Page 2-262
Voice Mail/Auto Attendant Port
728 Enter a Name to the Transfer Table of Caller Information

(MCP/MCP2)
This program allows the user to enter a name corresponding to the phone number of
an external call.
If the name corresponding to the phone number of the call received through CID C.O.
line is different from the name set in the table below, NO CID NAME will be
displayed. Each entry has 14 numbers and 16 names. Use dial buttons to enter names
in English.
System
Number of the Transfer Table of Caller Information
MCP
MCP2
iDCS-L
1500
iDCS-M
400
iDCS-L
2000
iDCS-M
1000
Press dial buttons to see the following characters on LCD depending on the number
of pressing the same dial. Press another button to save the displayed character and
move the cursor to the next character. Press the [A] button to change
uppercase/lowercase input modes.
Number of
Dialing
0
1
<
>
Space ?
Number of
Dialing
order below :
#, space, &, !, :, ?, ., ,, %, $, -, <, >, /, =, [, ], @, ^, (, ), _, +, {, }, |, ; , , ,
Page 2-263
Default
N/A
Display
TRANSLATIO(0001)
DGT:
2.
Enter the number of an entry.

TRANSLATIO(0005)
DGT:_
3.
Enter a phone number and press the [Right] Soft button.

Or, press [Hold] to delete the phone number.
TRANSLATIO(0005)
DGT:2801974_
4.
Enter a name and press the [Right] Soft button.

Or, press [Hold] to delete the name.
TRANSLATIO(0005)
SAMSUNG KEYPHONE
5.

Related Program
Program 119
Program 312
Program 402
Program 415
Program 725
Page 2-264

Set Caller ID
Set C.O. Line Dial Type
Set Abandoned Call Save Status
730 Adjust the Recording Sensitivity of Internal Auto

Attendant
This program allows the user to adjust the sensitivity of recording when recording or
play is made to an internal auto attendant card. The types of recording sensitivity
adjustment are described below :
0. +0.0
Not Adjusted
1. +1.9
1.9dB Raised
2. -6.0
6.0dB Descended
3. -2.5
2.5dB Descended
Default
+0.0
Display

[3951]AA GAIN
REC:+0.0 PL:+0.0
2. Press the phone number of the first port from

the auto attendant card.
Or, press [Volume] to select an auto attendant card.
3.
4.
Enter recording sensitivity([0]-[3]).

Or, press [Volume] to select recording sensitivity.
[3951]AA GAINREC:+0.0
PL:+0.0
[3951]AA GAIN
REC:-6.0 PL:+0.0

Related Program
N/A
Page 2-265
731 Delete Memory from Internal Auto Attendant

This program allows the user to delete recorded messages from internal auto
attendant. Use the program carefully because the program deletes all the messages
inputted to a card. Only the first port(phone) number of internal auto attendant is
selected.
If the internal auto attendant card is mounted for the first time, recording shall be
made after memory is deleted. In addition, recording shall be made after memory is
deleted if the system or card is reset during recording, after recording, or during
memory deletion(displayed as Busy on playback).
Default
N/A
Display
[3951]RAM CLEAR
CLR RECORDED?NO
2.
Press the phone number of the first port of the

internal auto attendant card.
Or, press [Volume] to select an internal
auto attendant port.
[3951]RAM CLEAR
CLR RECORDED?NO
3.
Enter [1] (YES) or [0] (NO).

[3951]RAM CLEARARE YOU

SURE?NO
4.
Enter [1] (YES) or [0] (NO) again.

5.

[3951]RAM CLEAR
ARE YOU SURE?YES
Related Program
N/A
Page 2-266
732 Transfer Table of Internal Auto Attendant

This program allows the user to create the transfer table of internal auto attendant.
The transfer table of internal auto attendant has 12 tables. Each table allows the user
to create 100 entries. Station, station group, resending, the code of changing ring
incoming mode, and table used by internal auto attendant correspond to the digits
entered by the user.
Press [A] to enter another specified transfer table. If P appears on LCD, enter the
number of the transfer table.
Press [B] to resend the entered dial. If an entry number(registration number) is used as
a station number to be transferred, press [B] to display B on LCD.
Press [C] to enter a code of changing ring incoming mode.
Default
Table 01
Entry
001
0 5000
002
2*** B
003
3*** B
004
5*** B
005
8*** B
006
9 P03
Display
AA TRANS TB(01)
001:0 500
2.
Enter a transfer table ([01]-[12]).

Or, press [Volume] to select a transfer table.
AA TRANS TB(01)
001:0 500
3.
Enter an entry number.

Or, press [Volume] to select an entry number.
AA TRANS TB(01)
001:0 500
4.
Enter a digit, which will be entered by the user.

Or, enter Repeat.
AA TRANS TB(01)
001:223 500
Page 2-267
5.
Enter details to be transferred.

Or, press [Volume] to select a station to be transferred.
6.

AA TRANS TB(01)
001:223 223
Related Program
Program 733
Page 2-268
Internal Auto Attendant Options
733 Internal Auto Attendant Options

This program allows the user to set options used by internal auto attendant. There are
12 option tables used by internal auto attendant. The transfer table of program 732
shall be set from each option table.
Options used by internal auto attendant are described below :
00
PLAN MSG1
Announcement message if ring mode is 1
01
PLAN MSG2
02
PLAN MSG3
03
PLAN MSG4
04
PLAN MSG5
05
PLAN MSG6
06
ALTER MSG
Message sent when ring mode has been changed to AA
07
INVLID MSG
Message sent when a wrong number has been dialed
08
NO ANS MSG
Message sent when the transferred station does not answer
09
XFER MSG
Message sent for transfer
10
BUSY MSG
Message sent when a station to be transferred is busy
11
NO STN MSG
Message sent when any station is not be dialed
12
NO ACT MSG
Message sent when dialing is not to be made for a certain time
13
CAMP ON
Camp on a busy station
14
ANS DELAY
Delay time for answer(up to 99 seconds)
15
RETRY CNT
Retry number when a wrong number was dialed
16
TRANS TABLE
Number of the transfer table from program 732
17
BUSY DEST
Alternate incoming destination when a station to be transferred is busy
18
NO ANS DEST
Alternate incoming destination when the transferred station does not

respond
19
NO ACT DEST
Alternate incoming destination when dialing is not to be made for a

certain time
20
INVLID DEST
Alternate incoming destination when a wrong number was dialed
If BUSY, NO ANS, NO ACT, or INVLID DEST is set to NONE, a call will be

terminated.
Page 2-269
Default
PLAN MSG1~6
49
ALTER MSG
49
INVLID MSG
64
NO ANS MSG
51
XFER MSG
53
BUSY MSG
52
NO STN MSG
50
NO ACT MSG
59
CAMP ON
OFF
ANS DELAY
1 SEC
RETRY CNT
03
TRANS TABLE
01
BUSY DEST
5000
NO ANS DEST
5000
NO ACT DEST
5000
INVLID DEST
5000
Display
AA PLAN PROG(01)
PLAN MSG1:49
2. Enter the number of an option table([01]-[12]).

Or, press [Volume] to select an option table.
AA PLAN PROG(01)
PLAN MSG1:49
3. Enter an option number([00]-[20]).

Or, press [Volume] to select an option.
AA PLAN PROG(01)
PLAN MSG2:49
4. Enter option data.

Or, press [Volume] to select data.
AA PLAN PROG(01)
PLAN MSG2:02

Related Program
Program 732
Page 2-270
Transfer Table of Internal Auto Attendant
735 Option Table of Internal Auto Attendant

This program allows the user to set the option table of Program 733 used for each
internal auto attendant port or auto attendant group.
Default
01
Display
[3951]AA PLAN
PLAN NO:01
2. Press the phone number of an internal auto attendant

port or group.
Or, press [Volume] to select an auto attendant.
[5048]AA PLAN
PLAN NO:01
3. Enter the option tables of an auto attendant([01]-[12]).

Or, press [Volume] to select an option table.
[5048]AA PLAN
PLAN NO:02
5.

Related Program
Program 601
Program 733

Page 2-271
736 Message Combination of Internal Auto Attendant

This program allows the user to combine internal auto attendant messages.
There are up to 64 combinations of internal auto attendant messages.
One combination consists of 5 messages.
If the [AAPLAY] button is used to play the recording, the combination will not be
applied.
Default
Each message number
Display
AA MSG MATCH(01)
01
2.
Enter a message number to be used([01]-[64]).

Or, press [Volume] to select a message number.
AA MSG MATCH(01)
01
3.
Enter message numbers to be combined([01]-[64]).

Or, if there are less than 5 message combinations,
enter messages and press the [Right] Soft button.
AA MSG MATCH(01)
11+12+13+14+15
4.

Related Program
Program 733
Page 2-272
739 Set a Hold Message to Internal Auto Attendant

This program allows the user to set the last port of the internal auto attendant card to
Music on Hold. If the messages of internal auto attendant are set as Music on Hold,
the messages will be played repetitively and operate along with external Music on
Hold. Only the last port of the auto attendant card is selected.
Default
N/A
Display
[3958]SET AAMOH
MOH MSG:NOT USE
2.
Enter the phone number of the last port of the

auto attendant card.
Or, press [Volume] to select an auto attendant card.
[3958]SET AAMOH
MOH MSG:NOT USE
3.
Enter an auto attendant message([01]-[64]).

Or, press [Volume] to select an auto attendant
message. Press the [Right] Soft button to
move the cursor.
[3958]SET AAMOH
MOH MSG:10
4.

Related Program
Program 308
Program 309
Program 408
Program 607
Program 736

Set Station Music On Hold
Set C.O. Line MOH
UCD Group Options
Message Combination of Internal Auto Attendant
Page 2-273
748 Enter a Number Ticket for Billing (MCP/MCP2)

This program allows the user to analyze the dialed numbers and determine which
conversion table will be applied.
This program is not supported in the iDCS-M system to which the MCP board is mounted.
About Digits
There are 500 entries. Up to 10 digits can be set to each entry.
The entries are used to search a conversion table corresponding to the number pressed
for dialing from a station. There are 8 types(Nos. 1 to 8) of a dial conversion table.
The dial conversion table is used for Program 433, a Scale of Charges for Calls through
a C.O. line. Exact charges are set according to the billing table from Program 749.
Whenever a new entry is added, the entry is sorted by number system because the
system analyzes numbers in logical order. For example, if an entry with 1, 13, 1305,
and 1401 is set to this program and 13056 is dialed, 1305 will be selected. If an entry
with 1, 13, 13056, and 1401 is set to this program and 1305 is dialed, this program
will not operate until the user enters one more digit.
Default
N/A
Display
COST DP
DIGIT:
(001)
2. Enter an entry number([001]-[500]).

Or, press [Volume] to select an entry.
COST DP
DIGIT:
(001)
3. Enter a dial number of up to 10 digits.

COST DP
DIGIT:051
(001)
4. Enter the number of the billing table([1]-[8]).

Or, press [Volume] to select a billing table.
COST DP
(001)
CALL RATE:NONE
Page 2-274

Related Program
Program 433
Program 749
Set C.O. Line Billing Table (MCP/MCP2)

Charge Rate (MCP/MCP2)
Page 2-275
749 Charge Rate (MCP/MCP2)

The billing table is used to set charges according to each scale of charges. There are 8
charge rates and each rate has the following data :
This program is not supported in the iDCS-M system to which the MCP board is mounted.
FIRST DURATION
Allowable calling time with the amount charged for the initial call.
0 to 500(seconds) can be entered.
FIRST COST
Charge for the FIRST DURATION. 0 to 500(won) can be entered.
SECOND
Time to add charge per certain time after the FIRST DURATION.
DURATION
0 to 500(won) can be entered.
SECOND COST
Charge added per the SECOND DURATION. 0 to 500(won) can be
entered.
4
SURCHARGE
Additional charge added to call charge. 0 to 999(won) can be entered.
Default
N/A
Display
COST RATE (1)

1ST DUR :000 SEC
2.
Enter the number of the billing table([1]-[8]).

Or, press [Volume] to select a billing table.
COST RATE (1)

1ST DUR :000 SEC
3.
Enter the number of a billing item([0]-[5]).

Or, press [Volume] to select an item.
COST RATE (1)

1ST DUR :000 SEC
4.
Enter data on the billing table.

COST RATE (1)

1ST DUR :100 SEC
5.

Page 2-276
Related Program
Program 433
Program 748
Set C.O. Line Billing Table (MCP/MCP2)

Enter a Number Ticket for Billing (MP/MCP2)
Page 2-277
750 Reset the Voice Mail Card

This program allows the user to reset the voice mail card.
0
DOWNLOAD
Specifies whether to create a voice mail(YES) or use the existing voice

mail(NO) when the voice mail card restarts.
CARD RESTART
Restarts the voice mail card.
Default
N/A
Display
VM CARD RESTART
DOWNLOAD ? YES
2.
Enter an item number(0. DOWNLOAD,

1. RESTART). Or, press [Volume] to select
an item. Press the [Right] Soft button
to move the cursor.
VM CARD RESTART
CARD RESTART?NO
3.
Enter whether to reset the card (0. NO, 1. YES).

Or, press [Volume] to select whether to reset the card.
VM CARD RESTART
ARE YOU SURE?NO
4.
If YES(1) is selected, enter whether to reset

the card again.
Or, press [Volume] to select whether to reset
the card again.
Press the [Right] Soft button to reset the card.
VM CARD RESTART
CARD RESTART?NO
5.

Related Program
N/A
Page 2-278
751 Specify Whether to Allow a Voice Mail

This program allows the user to specify whether to create a voice mail for each
station or station group.
Default
All stations: YES
All station groups : NO
Display
ASSIGN MAIL BOX

[2001] YES
2.
ASSIGN MAIL BOX

[2001] YES
Enter the number of a station or a station group.

Or, press [Volume] to select a station or a station
group. Press the [Right] Soft button to move
the cursor.
3. Enter whether to specify a voice mail(0.NO, 1.YES).

Or, press [Volume] to select whether to specify a
voice mail. Press the [Right] Soft button
to move the cursor.
ASSIGN MAIL BOX

ARE YOU SURE?NO
4. Enter whether to specify a voice mail again.

Or, press [Volume] to select whether to specify
a voice mail again. Press the [Right] Soft button
to move the cursor.
ASSIGN MAIL BOX

[2011] YES

Related Program
N/A
Page 2-279
752 Options of Automatic Voice Mail Recording

This program allows the user to specify information used for automatic recording
with the voice mail card when each station is busy.
Default
N/A
Display
AUTO RECORD
STN:2001 MB:NONE
2.
Enter a station number.

Or, press [Volume] to select a station number.
AUTO RECORD
STN:2011 MB:NONE
3.
Enter the number of a voice mail for recording.

voice mail for recording. Press the [Right]
AUTO RECORD
PORT:NONE CALL:I
4. Enter the phone number of a voice mail

port for recording.
of a voice mail port for recording.
AUTO RECORD
PORT:2100 CALL:I
5. Enter the type number of incoming/outgoing

calls(0.I, 1.O, or 2.B).
Or, press [Volume] to select a call type.
AUTO RECORD
STN:2011 MB:2011

Related Program
Program 751
Page 2-280
Specify Whether to Allow a Voice Mail
753 Alarm Ring from a Voice Mail

This program allows the user to specify a station or a station group to ring when the
alarm of the voice mail card is generated.
Default
DEST : 5000
Display
WARNING DEST
DEST:5000
2.
Enter the number of a station or a station group to ring.

Or, press [Volume] to select the number of a station
or a station group.
WARNING DEST
DEST:5000
3.

Related Program
Program 755
Specify the Alarm Condition of a Voice Mail
Page 2-281
754 Halt the Voice Mail Card

This program allows the user to halt the operating voice mail card.
Default
N/A
Display
VM HALT
STATUS:PROC
2.
Enter process(0.PROC) or halt(1.HALT).

Or, press [Volume] to select process or halt.
VM HALT
ARE YOU SURE?YES
3.
Enter halt again if the user selects halt.

Or, press [Volume] to select halt again.
Press the [Right] Soft button to halt the card.
VM HALT
STATUS:PROC
4.

Related Program
N/A
Page 2-282
755 Specify the Alarm Condition of a Voice Mail

This program allows the user to specify the condition of an alarm ring from the voice
mail card. If hard disk within the voice mail card is used more than the value set by
this program, an alarm will be generated.
Default
THRESHOLD : 80
Display
VM ALARM
THRESHOLD:80
2.
Enter an alarm condition(00-99).

Or, press [Volume] to select a condition.
VM ALARM
THRESHOLD:90
3.

Related Program
Program 753
Alarm Ring from a Voice Mail
Page 2-283
756 Set a Voice Mail to Music on Hold

This program allows the user to set the messages of the voice mail card to Music on
Hold. If the port of the voice mail is set to Music on Hold, the voice mail will not
operate as a normal voice mail.
Default
NOT USE
Display
SET VMMOH
[2100] : NOT USE
2.
Enter the phone number of the voice mail port.

Or, press [Volume] to select a voice mail port.
SET VMMOH
[2100] : NOT USE
3.
Enter a message number.

Or, press [Volume] to select a message.
Or, press [Hold] to clear the Music on Hold.
SET VMMOH
[2100] : 10
4.

Related Program
Program 308
Program 309
Program 408
Program 607
Page 2-284

Set Station Music On Hold
Set C.O. Line MOH
UCD Group Options
757 Set a Voice Mail to Incoming or Outgoing

This program allows the user to set each voice mail port to incoming or outgoing only.
Default
IN/OUT
Display
VM IN/OUT
[2100]:IN/OUT
2.
Enter the phone number of the voice mail port.

Or, press [Volume] to select a voice mail port.
VM IN/OUT
[2100]:IN/OUT
3.
Enter an incoming mode or an outgoing mode

(0. IN, 1. OUT, 2. IN/OUT).
Or, press [Volume] to select an incoming mode
or an outgoing mode.
VM IN/OUT
[2100]:OUT
4.

Related Program
Program 756
Set a Voice Mail to Music on Hold
Page 2-285
758 Conversion of System/Voice Mail Ring Modes

The iDCS 500 system supports 6 ring modes. However, existing voice mail devices
support day/night ring modes only. This program allows the user to set ring mode
conversion between the system and a voice mail.
Default
RING 1-6 : DAY
Display
VM DAY/NIGHT
RING 1:DAY
2.
Enter a ring mode number([1]-[6]).

Or, press [Volume] to select a ring mode.
VM DAY/NIGHT
RING 2:DAY
3.
Enter day([0]. DAY) or night([1]. NIGHT).

Or, press [Volume] to select a day mode or
a night mode. Press the [Right] Soft button
to move the cursor.
4.

VM DAY/NIGHT
RING 2:NIGHT
Related Program
Program 507
Page 2-286
760 Cost Items (MCP2)

This program allows the user to set the name of costs and the type of taxes to be
charged regarding the various fees charged to the hotel rooms in the Hotel feature.
This program is only applicable when using the Hotel feature.
Fees charged at hotels are listed below.

00
RM Deposit
Prepaid room charge code
01
PH Deposit
Prepaid phone bill code
02~86
Charge codes modifiable according to user environment
87
Type of tax to be charged for phone bill
88
Type of tax to be charged for FAX phone bill
89
W/UP SET
Wakeup call time setup code
90
W/UP ANS
Wakeup call answer code
91
W/UP N/ANS
Wakeup call no answer code
92
W/UP CANCL
Wakeup call cancel code
93
Check In
Check in code
94
Check Out
Check out code
95
Available
Room status Available code
96
Occupied
Room status Occupied code
97
Clean Room
Room status Need Cleaning code
98
Fix Room
Room status Need Maintenance code
99
Hold
Room status Hold code
The characters shown below are displayed on the LCD panel according to the
The [Volume] button is used to move the cursor backward or forward after saving the
current character.
Page 2-287

Dial count
Dial count
<
>
Space ?
1
2
pressed.
#, space, &, !, :, ?, ., ,, %, $, -, <, >, /, =, [, ], @, ^, (, ), _, +, {, }, |, ; , , ,
Default
N/A
Display
ITEM CODE (00)

NAME:RM Deposit
2. Enter the code number, or use [Volume] to

select the code number and press the [Right]
Soft button.
ITEM CODE (02)

NAME:_
3. Enter the code name and press the [Right]

Soft button. Press [Hold] to erase the code name.
ITEM CODE (02)

NAME:PUBLIC ROOM
4. Set the type of tax to be applied.

Up to 8 types of taxes can be charged.
Press 1 to apply and 0 otherwise.
ITEM CODE (02)

TAXES:10000000
5. Press [Transfer] to exit.

Related Program
Program 761
Page 2-288
Set Tax Rate (MCP2)
761 Set Tax Rate (MCP2)

This program allows the user to set the name, type and rate of the taxes for each tax
for the various fees charged in the Hotel feature.
TAX RATE
Up to 8 types of taxes can be set as taxes chargeable in the Hotel feature.
TYPE
Three types of taxes can be set.

(%) - A certain % of the room charge is charged as tax
(C) - A fixed amount is charged as tax
( I ) - A certain % of tax is included in the room charge
VAL
(%) and (I) represents the percentage of tax on actual charge,

(C) indicates a fixed amount.
NAME
Enter the proper name of the tax.
The characters shown below are displayed on the LCD panel according to the
[Volume] is used to move the cursor backward or forward after saving the current
character.

Dial Count
0
1
Dial Count
<
Dial Count
Dial Count
>
Space ?
pressed.
#, space, &, !, :, ?, ., ,, %, $, -, <, >, /, =, [, ], @, ^, (, ), _, +, {, }, |, ; , , ,
Page 2-289
Default
N/A
Display
TAX RATE
(1)
TYPE:% VAL:00.00
2. Enter the tax number, or use [Volume] to select

the tax number and press the [Right] Soft
button.
TAX RATE
(2)
TYPE:% VAL:00.00
3. Enter the tax type.(0 : %, 1 : C, 2 : I)

Or, press [Volume] to select the tax type and
TAX RATE
(2)
TYPE:I VAL:00.00
4. Enter the tax rate or tax amount, and press the

TAX RATE
(1)
TYPE:I VAL:10.00
5. Press the code name and press the [Right] Soft button.
TAX RATE
NAME:VAT
Press [Hold] to erase the code name.
(2)
6. Press [Transfer] to exit.

Related Program
Program 760
Page 2-290
Cost Items (MCP2)
762 Room Cost Rate (MCP2)

This program allows the user to charge different rates for each weekday by setting the
cost rate of each weekday compared to the standard rate.
Default
100%
Display
RM COST RAT(SUN)
100%:
2. Enter the weekday.(0 : SUN ~ 6 : AT)

Or, press [Volume] to select the weekday and press
RM COST RAT(MON)100%:_
RM
3. Enter the cost rate.(001~999)
RM COST RAT(MON)100%:
080

Related Program
N/A
Page 2-291
800 Set Technician Program Mode

This program allows the user to enable(1. ENABLE) or disable(0. DISABLE)
the Technician Program mode. This program requires the 4 digit(0-9) passcode.
Refer to Program 801 Change Technician Program Passcode.
Default
N/A
Display
ENABLE TECH.PROG
PASSCODE:_
2.
Enter the Technician System Program passcode.

The passcode shall be correct, and other stations
and the IO port shall not be ENABLE to continue
to the next step.
ENABLE TECH.PROG
DISABLE TENANT:1
3.
Enter the program mode([0].DISABLE,
[1].ENABLE).
Or, Press [Volume] to select the program mode.
(The cursor moves only in ENABLE status.)
ENABLE TECH.PROG
ENABLE TENANT:1
4. Enter the program tenant number([1]-[2]).

Or, Press [Volume] to select the tenant.
5.
ENABLE TECH.PROG
ENABLE TENANT:1

Related Program
Program 801
Page 2-292
Change Technician Program Passcode
801 Change Technician Program Passcode

This program allows the user to change the passcode required for the Technician
System Program. The passcode shall consist of four-digit numbers from [0] to [9],
and the characters are displayed as *.
The new passcode shall be entered twice for confirmation. The SUCCESS message
appears if the entered passcodes are identical, while the FAILURE message is
displayed for approximately 2 seconds if the passcodes are not identical.
Default
4321
Display
TECH. PASSCODE
NEW CODE:_
2. Enter the four-digit new passcode.
TECH. PASSCODE
VERIFY :_
3. Re-enter the four-digit new passcode.

Related Program
Program 800
Set Technician Program Mode
Page 2-293
802 Set Operator Program Scope

This program allows the user to enable(1. YES) or disable(0. NO) programming in
the Operator Program mode.
Default
Page 2-294
100
STN LOCK
YES
101
STN CODE
YES
102
CALL FWD
YES
103
ANS, MODE
YES
104
STN NAME
YES
105
SPD DIAL
YES
106
SPD NAME
YES
107
KEY EXT
YES
108
STN STS
YES
109
DAY FORM
YES
110
STN MISC
YES
111
RNG TONE
YES
112
ALM CLK
YES
113
MEMO NO
YES
114
STN VOL
YES
115
PMSG NO.
YES
116
ALM REM.
YES
119
C/A DISP
YES
121
LANGUAGE
YES
201
CUS. CODE
YES
202
CHG. CODE
YES
216
VDIALER
YES
315
BRANCH
YES
404
TRK NAME
YES
502
STN TIME
YES
505
DAT/TIME
YES
602
SGR NAME
YES
705
SPD DIAL
YES
706
SPD NAME
YES
708
ACC CODE
YES
715
PGM MSG
YES
All other programs
NO
Display
CUST.USE MMC :1
100:STN LOCK:YES
2.
CUST.USE MMC :1
100:STN LOCK:YES
Enter the tenant number([1]-[2]).

Or, press [Volume] to select the tenant and press
the [Right] Soft button to save the data.
3. Enter the program number.

Or, press [Volume] to select the program
to move the cursor.
CUST.USE MMC :1
502:STN TIME:YES
4. Enter [1](YES) or [0](NO).

press the [Left] Soft button to move the cursor.
CUST.USE MMC :1
502:STN TIME:NO

Related Program
Program
All programs under 800
Page 2-295
803 Set Tenant Group

This program allows the user to set the tenant for cabinets, slots, and ports.
Press the [Message] button to select all ports in the slot.
The internal/external sound source port is not distinguished by tenant.
Note that the dial number is erased when the tenant group is changed.
Default
All cabinets, slots, and ports are assigned to tenant 1.
Display
TENANT GROUP
C:1 S:1 01 T:1
2. Enter the cabinet number([1]-[3]).

Or, press [Volume] to select the cabinet and press the
TENANT GROUP
C:1 S:1 01 T:1
3. Enter the slot number([1]-[9]).

Or, press [Volume] to select the slot and press the
TENANT GROUP
C:1 S:2 01 T:1
4. Enter the port number([01]-[32/16]).

(Slot1-Slot3 : 32 ports, Slot4-Slot9 : 16 ports)
Or, press [Volume] to select the port and press the
Or, press the [Message] button to select all ports.
TENANT GROUP
C:1 S:1 10 T:1
5. Enter the tenant number([1]-[2]).

Or, press [Volume] to select the tenant and press the
TENANT GROUP
C:1 S:1 10 T:2
6.
TENANT GROUP
C:1 S:1 ALL T:1

Related Program
N/A
Page 2-296
804 Set System I/O Port Parameter (MCP/MCP2)

The usage of this program is described for each system using MCP and MCP2.
MCP
This program allows the user to set the parameters of the system I/O ports.
There are five I/O ports with the MCP and LAN card each having two I/O ports,
plus a modem port. There is also a separate LAN port.
The same type of service may not be assigned to more than one I/O ports.
Only PCMMC and REMO M/A may be set at the modem port, and the same type of
service may not be set at another I/O port simultaneously.
0. SERVICE : Service Type
00
NOT USE
Not Use
01
PCMMC
PCMMC, Remote M&A
02
SMDR
SMDR
03
UCD REPORT
UCD Report
04
UCD/SMDR
SMDR+UCD Report
05
CTI
CTI
06
CTI/SMDR
CTI+SMDR
07
CTI/UCD
CTI+UCD Report
08
CTI/S/U
CTI+SMDR+UCD Report
09
TRAFFIC
Traffic Report
10
TRF/SMDR
SMDR+Traffic Report
11
ALARM
System Alarm Report
12
ALM/TRAF
System Alarm Report+Traffic Report
13
PERI UCD
UCD Statistics Periodic Report
15
ANI/ALI
Special 110 ANI/ALI Report
30
REMO M/A
Remote M&A
31
C-M&A
Centralized M&A
1. BAUD RATE : Transfer Rate

0
4800 BPS
9600 BPS
19200 BPS
38400 BPS
Page 2-297
2. CHAR LENGTH : Character Length

7
7 BITS
8 BITS
3. PARITY : Parity Bit

0
NONE
ODD
EVEN
4. RETRY COUNT : Retry Count(01~99)

5. STOP BIT : Stop Bit
1
1 BIT
2 BIT
6. WAIT : Message wait time(0000-3600 sec)

7. DSR CHECK : Data Set Ready
0
OFF
ON
Default
PORT1
Page 2-298
PORT2
PORT3
PORT4
PORT5
SERVICE
PCMMC
SMDR
NOT USE
NOT USE
NOT USE
BAVD RATE
19200 BPS
19200 BPS
19200 BPS
19200 BPS
19200 BPS
CHAR LENGTH
8 BITS
8 BITS
8 BITS
8 BITS
8 BITS
PARITY
NONE
NONE
NONE
NONE
NONE
RETRY COUNT
STOP BIT
1 BIT
1 BIT
1 BIT
1 BIT
1 BIT
WAIT
3000 MS
300 sec
30 sec
30 sec
30 sec
DSR CHECK
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
Display
SYS I/O PORT (1)

SERVICE:PCMMC
2. Enter the I/O port number([1]-[5]).

Or, press [Volume] to select the I/O port and
SYS I/O PORT (1)

SERVICE:PCMMC
3. Enter the option number([0]-[7]).

SYS I/O PORT (1)

SERVICE:PCMMC
4. Enter data. Or, press [Volume] to select the data

and press the [Left] Soft button to move the cursor.
SYS I/O PORT (1)

SERVICE:ALARM

Related Program
Program 725
Page 2-299
MCP2
This program allows the user to set the parameters of the system I/O ports. There are
total three I/O ports with two system ports that can be set by the user and one modem
port. The second and third ports from the left of the IOM board are the I/O ports that
the can be set by the user, and the first port from the left is the port dedicated for
checking the system status and may not be used by the user. There is also a separate
LAN port.
The same type of service may not be assigned to more than one ports simultaneously.
Only PCMMC and REMO M/A may be set at the modem port, and the same type of
service may not be set at another I/O port simultaneously.
0. SERVICE : Service Type
00
NOT USE
Not Use
01
PCMMC
PCMMC, Remote M&A
02
SMDR
SMDR
03
UCD REPORT
UCD Report
04
UCD/SMDR
SMDR+UCD Report
05
CTI
CTI
06
CTI/SMDR
CTI+SMDR
07
CTI/UCD
CTI+UCD Report
08
CTI/S/U
CTI+SMDR+UCD Report
09
TRAFFIC
Traffic Report
10
TRF/SMDR
SMDR+Traffic Report
11
ALARM
System Alarm Report
12
ALM/TRAF
System Alarm Report+Traffic Report
13
PERI UCD
UCD Statistics Periodic Report
15
ANI/ALI
Special 110 ANI/ALI Report
16
HM REPT
Hotel Report
17
PMS
Hotel PMS
18
PMS SMDR
Hotel PMS+SMDR
19
BD-PMS
Bi-Directional PMS
30
REMO M/A
Remote M&A
31
C-M&A
Centralized M&A
1) BAUD RATE : Transfer Rate
Page 2-300
4800 BPS
9600 BPS
19200 BPS
38400 BPS
2) CHAR LENGTH : Character Length

7
7 BITS
8 BITS
3) PARITY : Parity Bit

0
NONE
ODD
EVEN
4) RETRY COUNT : Retry Count(01~99)

5) STOP BIT : Stop Bit
1
1 BIT
2 BIT
6) WAIT : Message Wait Time(0000-3600 sec)

7) DSR CHECK : Data Set Ready
0
OFF
ON
Default
PORT2
PORT3
PORT5
SERVICE
PCMMC
SMDR
NOT USE
BAVD RATE
19200 BPS
19200 BPS
19200 BPS
CHAR LENGTH
8 BITS
8 BITS
8 BITS
PARITY
NONE
NONE
NONE
RETRY COUNT
STOP BIT
1 BIT
1 BIT
1 BIT
WAIT
3000 MS
300 sec
30 sec
DSR CHECK
OFF
OFF
OFF
Page 2-301
Display
SYS I/O PORT (2)

SERVICE:PCMMC
2. Enter the I/O port number([2], [3], [5]).

Or, press [Volume] to select the I/O port and press
SYS I/O PORT (2)

SERVICE:PCMMC
3. Enter the option number([0]-[7]).

SYS I/O PORT (2)

SERVICE:PCMMC
4. Enter data.
Or, press [Volume] to select the data and press
the [Left] Soft button to move the cursor.
SYS I/O PORT (2)

SERVICE:ALARM

Related Program
Program 725
Page 2-302
805 Display Program Version

This program allows the user to display the revision number of the software installed
in the system. Only the version can be verified. The revision number of the software
installed in the card mounted on each slot can also be verified.
The NO CARD messages is displayed when cards are unavailable for slots, the NO
INSTALL CARD message when the card is not mounted on the slot, and the NO
VERSION DATA message when there is no version data due to unavailable software
or software malfunction.
Default
N/A
Display
MCP VERSION
2001.05.01 S1.00
2. Enter the slot number([00]-[30]).

Or, press [Volume] to select the software location.
C1-S1:TEPRI/EP
2001.03.11 V1.03

Related Program
N/A
Page 2-303
806 Verify New Card Installation

This program allows the user to erase the old card data to let the system operate with
the new card when a new card is installed on the system.
If the type of the new card is different from the previous one, the related data need to
be reset. The user shall let the system initialize the card by notifying the system of the
first use of the card to prevent the related data from being erased when another card is
mounted.
The types of the previous card and the new card are displayed.(Previous card New
card) Refer to Program 724 Change Dial Numbers to change the dial number since the
dial number of the previous card remains after executing this program.
The card can be reset by setting the previous and new cards in the same status.
Default
N/A
Display
C:1-S:1 P:N[00]
4TRK 16DLI
2. Select the cabinet and press the [Right] Soft

button to move the cursor.
C:1-S:1 P:N[00]
4TRK 16DLI
3. Select the slot and press the [Right] Soft button

to move the cursor.
C:1-S:1 P:N[00]
ARE YOU SURE?NO
4. Select [YES] and press the [Right] Soft button

to move the cursor.
C:1-S:1 P:1[16]
16DLI 16DLI

Related Program
N/A
Page 2-304
807 Adjust Digital Phone Tone Quality (MCP/MCP2)

This program allows the user to adjust the volume of the digital phone. The volume is
set separately for each type of the digital phone. The adjusted volume is applied to all
phones of the same type.
The types of digital phones are listed below.
MCP
00
US24
Not available in Korea.
01
EU24
02
KR24
DS-24SE phone
03
KP24
DS-24SI phone
04
KP20
05
7B
06
6B
07
EKTS
08
AOM
Add-on module
09
DOR
Door phone
10
28D
DS-4028E, DS-4018E, DS-4008E phone
11
FX
Full Duplex Module of the DS-4028E and DS-4018E phone
00
US24
01
EU24
02
KR24
DS-24SE phone
03
KP24
DS-24SI phone
04
KP20
05
7B
06
6B
07
EKTS
08
AOM
Add-on module
09
DOR
Door phone
10
28D
DS-4028E, DS-4018E, DS-4008E phone
11
12L
Large LCD phone
12
21D
DS-5038D, DS-5021D, DS-5014D phone
13
ITP
IP phone phone
14
FX
Full Duplex Module of the DS-4028E and DS-4018E phone
MCP2
Page 2-305
The types of volume adjustable are listed below. Maximum volume is 8.

0.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
KEY TONE VOL

SIDETONE VOL
HANDSET TX
MIC TX LEVEL
NOISE GUARD
NOISE THRES.
ALC THRES.
TX/RX THRES.
TX/RX COMP.
Contact your retailer for specialized assistance since the Program 807 Adjust Digital
Phone Tone Quality has a significant effect on the reliability of the system.
Default
KEY TONE VOL
SIDETONE VOL
HANDSET TX
MIC TX LEVEL
NOISE GUARD
NOISE THRES
ALC THRES
TX/RX THRES
TX/RX COMP
:1
:1
:5
:3
:8
:1
:7
:3
:5
Display
VOL.CONTROL:US24
KEY TONE VOL:1
2. Enter the phone type number([00]-[14]).

Or, press [Volume] to select the phone type and
VOL.CONTROL:KR24
KEY TONE VOL:1
3. Enter the volume type([0]-[8]).

Or, press [Volume] to select the volume and press
VOL.CONTROL:KR24
HANDSET TX :5
4. Enter data([1]-[8]).
the [Left] Soft button.
VOL.CONTROL:KR24
HANDSET TX :6
Page 2-306
5.

Related Program
N/A
Page 2-307
809 Adjust Volume and Sensitivity (MCP/MCP2)

This program is described respectively for systems mounted with MCP and MCP2.
MCP
This program allows the user to adjust the overall volume and sensitivity of the phones
installed in the system.
0
1
2
TX LEVEL
Adjusts the transmitting sensitivity (Max. : 9)
CONTROL
INDEX : 0
LEVEL : 0
MISC
Adjusts the level of the internal music source of the MCP card or the external
TSW GAIN
music source of the MISC card.(0~7, higher numbers mean lower levels)
TSW GAIN
Adjusts the tone sensitivity(As shown below, there are 25 types of connections of
CONTROL
the T-Switch that adjusts the tone sensitivity. Connection between C.O. lines are
only applicable when set as 0 in Program 421 Adjust C.O. line sensitivity.)
Page 2-308
DGP
DGP
Adjusts sensitivity from digital phone Tx to digital phone Rx
DGP
SLT
Adjusts sensitivity from digital phone Tx to normal station Rx
DGP
ATRK
Adjusts sensitivity from digital phone Tx to analog C.O. Rx
DGP
DTRK
Adjusts sensitivity from digital phone Tx to digital C.O. Rx
DGP
DECT
Adjusts sensitivity from digital phone Tx to DECT Rx
DGP
VOIP
Adjusts sensitivity from digital phone Tx to VOIP C.O. Rx
DGP
SVMi
Adjusts sensitivity from digital phone Tx to SVMi Rx
SLT
DGP
Adjusts sensitivity from normal station Tx to digital phone Rx
SLT
SLT
Adjusts sensitivity from normal station Tx to normal station Rx
SLT
ATRK
Adjusts sensitivity from normal station Tx to analog C.O. Rx
SLT
DTRK
Adjusts sensitivity from normal station Tx to digital C.O. Rx
SLT
DECT
Adjusts sensitivity from normal station Tx to DECT Rx
SLT
VOIP
Adjusts sensitivity from normal station Tx to VOIP C.O. Rx
SLT
SVMi
Adjusts sensitivity from normal station Tx to SVMi Rx
ATRK
DGP
Adjusts sensitivity from analog C.O. Tx to digital phone Rx
ATRK
SLT
Adjusts sensitivity from analog C.O. Tx to normal station Rx
ATRK
ATRK
Adjusts sensitivity from analog C.O. Tx to analog C.O. Rx
ATRK
DTRK
Adjusts sensitivity from analog C.O. Tx to digital C.O. Rx
ATRK
DECT
Adjusts sensitivity from analog C.O. Tx to DECT Rx
ATRK
VOIP
Adjusts sensitivity from analog C.O. Tx to VOIP C.O. Rx
ATRK
SVMi
Adjusts sensitivity from analog C.O. Tx to SVMi Rx
DTRK
DGP
Adjusts sensitivity from digital C.O. Tx to digital phone Rx
DTRK
SLT
Adjusts sensitivity from digital C.O. Tx to normal station Rx
DTRK
ATRK
Adjusts sensitivity from digital C.O. Tx to analog C.O. Rx
DTRK
DTRK
Adjusts sensitivity from digital C.O. Tx to digital C.O. Rx
DTRK
DECT
Adjusts sensitivity from digital C.O. Tx to DECT Rx
DTRK
VOIP
Adjusts sensitivity from digital C.O. Tx to VOIP C.O. Rx
DTRK
SVMi
Adjusts sensitivity from digital C.O. Tx to SVMi Rx
DECT
DGP
Adjusts sensitivity from DECT Tx to digital phone Rx
DECT
SLT
Adjusts sensitivity from DECT Tx to normal station Rx
DECT
ATRK
Adjusts sensitivity from DECT Tx to analog C.O. Rx
DECT
DTRK
Adjusts sensitivity from DECT Tx to digital C.O. Rx
DECT
DECT
Adjusts sensitivity from DECT Tx to DECT Rx
DECT
VOIP
Adjusts sensitivity from DECT Tx to VOIP C.O. Rx
DECT
SVMi
Adjusts sensitivity from DECT Tx to SVMi Rx
VOIP
DGP
Adjusts sensitivity from VOIP C.O. Tx to digital phone Rx
VOIP
SLT
Adjusts sensitivity from VOIP C.O. Tx to normal station Rx
VOIP
ATRK
Adjusts sensitivity from VOIP C.O. Tx to analog C.O. Rx
VOIP
DTRK
Adjusts sensitivity from VOIP C.O. Tx to digital C.O. Rx
VOIP
DECT
Adjusts sensitivity from VOIP C.O. Tx to DECT Rx
VOIP
VOIP
Adjusts sensitivity from VOIP C.O. Tx to VOIP C.O. Rx
VOIP
SVMi
Adjusts sensitivity from VOIP C.O. Tx to SVMi Rx
SVMi
DGP
Adjusts sensitivity from SVMi Tx to digital phone Rx
SVMi
SLT
Adjusts sensitivity from SVMi Tx to normal station Rx
SVMi
ATRK
Adjusts sensitivity from SVMi Tx to analog C.O. Rx
SVMi
DTRK
Adjusts sensitivity from SVMi Tx to digital C.O. Rx
SVMi
DECT
Adjusts sensitivity from SVMi Tx to DECT Rx
SVMi
VOIP
Adjusts sensitivity from SVMi Tx to VOIP C.O. Rx
SVMi
SVMi
Adjusts sensitivity from SVMi Tx to SVMi Rx
There are four types of tone sensitivity adjustment as shown below :

0
+0. 0
No adjustment.
+1. 9
Up 1. 9 dB
- 6. 0
Down 6. 0 dB
- 2. 5
Down 2. 5 dB
Page 2-309
3.
0.
1.
2.
R2 LEVEL CONTROL : Adjust R2MFC signal detection

THRESHOLD
TX LEVEL
RX LEVEL
Default
TX LEVEL CONTROL
INDEX
LEVEL
MISC TSW GAIN

BGM/MOH : 0
TSW GAIN CONTROL
DGP DGP
+0. 0
DTRK DGP
+0. 0
DGP SLT
+0. 0
DTRK SLT
+1. 9
DGP ATRK
+0. 0
DTRK ATRK
+1. 9
DGP DTRK
+0. 0
DTRK DTRK
+0. 0
DGP DECT
-0. 0
DTRK DECT
-6. 0
DGP VOIP
+0. 0
DTRK VOIP
+0. 0
DGP SVMi
-2. 5
DTRK SVMi
-2. 5
SLT DGP
+0. 0
DECT DGP
+0. 0
SLT SLT
+0. 0
DECT SLT
+0. 0
SLT ATRK
+0. 0
DECT ATRK
+0. 0
SLT DTRK
+0. 0
DECT DTRK
+1. 9
SLT DECT
- 6. 0
DECT DECT
-6. 0
SLT VOIP
+0. 0
DECT VOIP
+0. 0
SLT SVMi
-2. 5
DECT SVMi
-2. 5
ATRK DGP
+0. 0
VOIP DGP
+0. 0
ATRK SLT
+0. 0
VOIP SLT
+0. 0
ATRK ATRK
- 6. 0
VOIP ATRK
+0. 0
ATRK DTRK
- 6. 0
VOIP DTRK
+0. 0
ATRK DECT
- 6. 0
VOIP DECT
-6. 0
ATRK VOIP
+0. 0
VOIP VOIP
+0. 0
ATRK SVMi
- 2. 5
VOIP SVMi
-2. 5
SVMi DGP
+0. 0
Page 2-310
SVMi SLT
+0. 0
SVMi ATRK
+0. 0
SVMi DTRK
+0. 0
SVMi DECT
-6. 0
SVMi VOIP
+0. 0
SVMi SVMi
-2. 5
R2 LEVEL CONTROL
0
THRESHOLD
TX LEVEL
-2. 5
RX LEVEL
+0. 0
Display

Press [Speaker].
TX LEVEL CONTROL
LEVEL 0 0
2. Enter the adjustment item([0]-[3]).

Or, press [Volume] to select the adjustment item
TSW GAIN CONTROL

SLT SLT :+0.0
3. Press [Volume] to select the call type and press

TSW GAIN CONTROL

SLT DTRK:+0.0
4. Press [Volume] to select the sensitivity and press

TSW GAIN CONTROL

SLT DTRK:+2.0

Related Program
N/A
Page 2-311
MCP2
This program allows the user to adjust the overall volume and sensitivity of the phones
installed in the system.
0
1
2
TX LEVEL
Adjusts the transmitting sensitivity(Max. : 9)
CONTROL
INDEX : 0
LEVEL : 0
MISC
Adjusts the level of the internal music source of the MCP card or the external
TSW GAIN
music source of the MISC card.(0~7, higher numbers mean lower levels)
TSW GAIN
Adjusts the tone sensitivity(As shown below, there are 25 types of connections of
CONTROL
the T-Switch that adjusts the tone sensitivity. Connection between C.O. lines are
only applicable when set as 0 in Program 421 Adjust C.O. line sensitivity.)
Page 2-312
DGP
DGP
Adjusts sensitivity from digital phone Tx to digital phone Rx
DGP
SLT
Adjusts sensitivity from digital phone Tx to normal station Rx
DGP
ATRK
Adjusts sensitivity from digital phone Tx to analog C.O. Rx
DGP
DTRK
Adjusts sensitivity from digital phone Tx to digital C.O. Rx
DGP
DECT
Adjusts sensitivity from digital phone Tx to DECT Rx
DGP
VOIP
Adjusts sensitivity from digital phone Tx to VOIP C.O. Rx
DGP
SVMi
Adjusts sensitivity from digital phone Tx to SVMi Rx
DGP
WLI
SLT
DGP
Adjusts sensitivity from normal station Tx to digital phone Rx
SLT
SLT
Adjusts sensitivity from normal station Tx to normal station Rx
SLT
ATRK
Adjusts sensitivity from normal station Tx to analog C.O. Rx
SLT
DTRK
Adjusts sensitivity from normal station Tx to digital C.O. Rx
SLT
DECT
Adjusts sensitivity from normal station Tx to DECT Rx
SLT
VOIP
Adjusts sensitivity from normal station Tx to VOIP C.O. Rx
SLT
SVMi
Adjusts sensitivity from normal station Tx to SVMi Rx
SLT
WLI
Adjusts sensitivity from normal station Tx to WLI Rx
ATRK
DGP
Adjusts sensitivity from analog C.O. Tx to digital phone Rx
ATRK
SLT
Adjusts sensitivity from analog C.O. Tx to normal station Rx
ATRK
ATRK
Adjusts sensitivity from analog C.O. Tx to analog C.O. Rx
ATRK
DTRK
Adjusts sensitivity from analog C.O. Tx to digital C.O. Rx
ATRK
DECT
Adjusts sensitivity from analog C.O. Tx to DECT Rx
ATRK
VOIP
Adjusts sensitivity from analog C.O. Tx to VOIP C.O. Rx
ATRK
SVMi
Adjusts sensitivity from analog C.O. Tx to SVMi Rx
ATRK
WLI
Adjusts sensitivity from analog C.O. Tx to WLI Rx
Adjusts sensitivity from digital phone Tx to WLI Rx
DTRK
DGP
Adjusts sensitivity from digital C.O. Tx to digital phone Rx
DTRK
SLT
Adjusts sensitivity from digital C.O. Tx to normal station Rx
DTRK
ATRK
Adjusts sensitivity from digital C.O. Tx to analog C.O. Rx
DTRK
DTRK
Adjusts sensitivity from digital C.O. Tx to digital C.O. Rx
DTRK
DECT
Adjusts sensitivity from digital C.O. Tx to DECT Rx
DTRK
VOIP
Adjusts sensitivity from digital C.O. Tx to VOIP C.O. Rx
DTRK
SVMi
Adjusts sensitivity from digital C.O. Tx to SVMi Rx
DTRK
WLI
Adjusts sensitivity from digital C.O. Tx to WLI Rx
DECT
DGP
Adjusts sensitivity from DECT Tx to digital phone Rx
DECT
SLT
Adjusts sensitivity from DECT Tx to normal station Rx
DECT
ATRK
Adjusts sensitivity from DECT Tx to analog C.O. Rx
DECT
DTRK
Adjusts sensitivity from DECT Tx to digital C.O. Rx
DECT
DECT
Adjusts sensitivity from DECT Tx to DECT Rx
DECT
VOIP
Adjusts sensitivity from DECT Tx to VOIP C.O. Rx
DECT
SVMi
Adjusts sensitivity from DECT Tx to SVMi Rx
DECT
WLI
Adjusts sensitivity from DECT Tx to WLI Rx
VOIP
DGP
Adjusts sensitivity from VOIP C.O. Tx to digital phone Rx
VOIP
SLT
Adjusts sensitivity from VOIP C.O. Tx to normal station Rx
VOIP
ATRK
Adjusts sensitivity from VOIP C.O. Tx to analog C.O. Rx
VOIP
DTRK
Adjusts sensitivity from VOIP C.O. Tx to digital C.O. Rx
VOIP
DECT
Adjusts sensitivity from VOIP C.O. Tx to DECT Rx
VOIP
VOIP
Adjusts sensitivity from VOIP C.O. Tx to VOIP C.O. Rx
VOIP
SVMi
Adjusts sensitivity from VOIP C.O. Tx to SVMi Rx
VOIP
WLI
Adjusts sensitivity from VOIP C.O. Tx to WLI Rx
SVMi
DGP
Adjusts sensitivity from SVMi Tx to digital phone Rx
SVMi
SLT
Adjusts sensitivity from SVMi Tx to normal station Rx
SVMI
ATRK
Adjusts sensitivity from SVMi Tx to analog C.O. Rx
SVMI
DTRK
Adjusts sensitivity from SVMi Tx to digital C.O. Rx
SVMI
DECT
Adjusts sensitivity from SVMi Tx to DECT Rx
SVMi
VOIP
Adjusts sensitivity from SVMi Tx to VOIP C.O. Rx
SVMi
SVMi
Adjusts sensitivity from SVMi Tx to SVMi Rx
SVMi
WLI
Adjusts sensitivity from SVMi Tx to WLI Rx
Page 2-313
WLI
DGP
Adjusts sensitivity from WLI Tx to digital phone Rx
WLI
SLT
Adjusts sensitivity from WLI Tx to normal station Rx
WLI
ATRK
Adjusts sensitivity from WLI Tx to analog C.O. Rx
WLI
DTRK
Adjusts sensitivity from WLI Tx to digital C.O. Rx
WLI
DECT
Adjusts sensitivity from WLI Tx to DECT Rx
WLI
VOIP
Adjusts sensitivity from WLI Tx to VOIP C.O. Rx
WLI
SVMi
Adjusts sensitivity from WLI Tx to SVMi Rx
WLI
WLI
Adjusts sensitivity from WLI Tx to WLI Rx
There are four types of tone sensitivity adjustment as shown below :
3.
0.
1.
2.
+0. 0
No adjustment.
+1. 9
Up 1. 9 dB
-6. 0
Down 6. 0 dB
-2. 5
Down 2. 5 dB
R2 LEVEL CONTROL : Adjust R2MFC signal detection

THRESHOLD
TX LEVEL
RX LEVEL
Default
TX LEVEL CONTROL
INDEX
LEVEL
MISC TSW GAIN

BGM/MOH : 0
TSW GAIN CONTROL
DGP DGP
+0. 0
DTRK DGP
+0. 0
DGP SLT
+0. 0
DTRK SLT
+1. 9
DGP ATRK
+0. 0
DTRK ATRK
+1. 9
DGP DTRK
+0. 0
DTRK DTRK
+0. 0
DGP DECT
-6. 0
DTRK DECT
-6. 0
Page 2-314
DGP VOIP
+0. 0
DTRK VOIP
+0. 0
DGP SVMi
-2. 5
DTRK SVMi
-2. 5
DGP WLI
+0. 0
DTRK WLI
+0. 0
SLT DGP
+0. 0
DECT DGP
+0. 0
SLT SLT
+0. 0
DECT SLT
+0. 0
SLT ATRK
+0. 0
DECT ATRK
+0. 0
SLT DTRK
+0. 0
DECT DTRK
+1. 9
SLT DECT
-6. 0
DECT DECT
-6. 0
SLT VOIP
+0. 0
DECT VOIP
+0. 0
SLT SVMi
-2. 5
DECT SVMi
-2. 5
SLT WLI
+0. 0
DECT WLI
+0. 0
ATRK DGP
+0. 0
VOIP DGP
+0. 0
ATRK SLT
+0. 0
VOIP SLT
+0. 0
ATRK ATRK
-6. 0
VOIP ATRK
+0. 0
ATRK DTRK
-6. 0
VOIP DTRK
+0. 0
ATRK DECT
-6. 0
VOIP DECT
-6. 0
ATRK VOIP
+0. 0
VOIP VOIP
+0. 0
ATRK SVMi
-2. 5
VOIP SVMi
-2. 5
ATRK WLI
+0. 0
VOIP WLI
+0. 0
SVMi DGP
+0. 0
WLI DGP
+0. 0
SVMi SLT
+0. 0
WLI SLT
+0. 0
SVMi ATRK
+0. 0
WLI ATRK
+0. 0
SVMi DTRK
+0. 0
WLI DTRK
+0. 0
SVMi DECT
-6. 0
WLI DECT
+0. 0
SVMi VOIP
+0. 0
WLI VOIP
+0. 0
SVMi SVMi
-2. 5
WLI SVMi
+0. 0
SVMi WLI
+0. 0
WLI WLI
+0. 0
R2 LEVEL CONTROL
0
THRESHOLD
TX LEVEL
-2. 5
RX LEVEL
+0. 0
Page 2-315
Display
1. Press [Transfer] and [809]. Press [Speaker].
TX LEVEL CONTROL
LEVEL 0 0
2. Enter the adjustment item([0]-[3]).

Or, press [Volume] to select the adjustment
item and press the [Right] Soft button to move
the cursor.
TSW GAIN CONTROL

SLT SLT :+0.0
3. Press [Volume] to select the call type and press

TSW GAIN CONTROL

SLT DTRK:+0.0
4. Press [Volume] to select the sensitivity and press

TSW GAIN CONTROL

SLT DTRK:+2.0

Related Program
N/A
Page 2-316
810 Limit System Use Temporarily

This program allows the user to disable(1. HALT) or operate(0. PROC) the system .
Programming is possible without setting ENABLE in Program 800 Set Technician
Program Mode.
Enter the number in the order of cabinet - slot. Select [All] when selecting cabinet to
apply the program to the entire system, and select [All] when selecting slot to apply
the program to the entire cabinet.
Default
N/A
Display
HALT/PROCESSING
C:ALL S:ALL PROC
2. Enter the cabinet number([1]-[3] or [0].ALL).

Or, press [Volume] to select the cabinet and press
the [Right] button to move the cursor.
HALT/PROCESSING
C:2 S:ALL PROC
3. Enter the slot number([1]-[9] or [0].ALL).

Or, press [Volume] to select the cabinet and press
the [Right] button to move the cursor.
HALT/PROCESSING
C:2 S:ALL PROC
4. Set whether to disable use([0] : PROC, [1] : HALT).

Or, press [Volume] to select changes and press the
HALT/PROCESSING
C:2 S:ALL HALT

Related Program
Program 811
Restart System (MCP/MCP2)
Page 2-317
811 Restart System (MCP/MCP2)

This program allows the user to restart the system through software.
MCP
0
RESET SYSTEM
Restarts system without deleting backup data
CLEAR MEMORY
Restarts system after deleting all system data
RESET SYSTEM
Restarts system without deleting backup data
CLEAR MEMORY
Restarts system after deleting all system data
FAST RESTART
Restarts system without newly loading program from SmartMedia
MCP2
CLEAR MEMORY sets data as default values.

Program Mode.
In this case, the user must enter the technician program passcode.
Default
N/A
Display
SYSTEM RESTART
RESET SYSTEM?NO
2. Enter the restart mode([0], [1], [2]).

Or, press [Volume] to select the restart mode and
SYSTEM RESTART
0 SYSTEM?NO
RESET
Mode 1
SYSTEM RESTART
CLEAR MEMORY?NO
Mode 2
SYSTEM RESTART
FAST START ? NO
Page 2-318
3. Enter whether to restart([0] : NO, [1] : YES).

Or, press [Volume] to select whether to restart
If No([0]) is selected, move the cursor to
the bottom first space of the selection
display screen in step 2.
SYSTEM RESTART
ARE YOU SURE?NO
4. Confirm restart([0] : NO, [1] : YES).

Or, press [Volume] to reselect restart and press
the [Right] Soft button. If No([0]) is selected,
programming returns to step 1.
SYSTEM RESTART
ARE YOU SURE?YES
Related Program
Program 810
Program 812
Limit System Use Temporarily

Change Program Country Version
Page 2-319
812 Change Program Country Version

This program allows the user to change the country version of the system software.
Program Mode. In this case, the user must enter the technician program passcode.
System restarts when the current country version is changed, and all data are initialized
according to the new country version.
Country version is designed to conform to the countrys standards. Therefore, contact

your Customer Support Center for specialized assistance when using Program 812
Change Program Country Version.
Default
KOREA
Display
SELECT COUNTRY
KOREA
2. Press [Volume] to select the country version and

DEFAULTING SYSTEM
ARE YOU SURE?NO

Or, press [Volume] to select whether to restart
DEFAULTING SYSTEM
ARE YOU SURE?YES
Related Program
Program 811
Page 2-320
Restart System (MCP/MCP2)
813 Use Hotel Feature (MCP2)

This program allows the user to decide whether to use the Hotel feature.
Default
DISABLE
Display
HOTEL OPERATION
DISABLE

Or, press [Volume] to select whether to use the
Hotel feature and press the [Right] Soft button.
HOTEL OPERATION
CHANGE NOW ? NO
3. Enter [1](YES) or [0](NO) for confirmation.

Or, press [Volume] to select whether to use the
otel feature and press the [Right] Soft button.
HOTEL OPERATION
ARE YOU SURE?NO
Related Program
Programs related to the Hotel feature
Page 2-321
814 Set System Programming Language

This program allows the user to set the language displayed when programming the
system. The Available languages are listed below.
0.
1.
2.
11.
ENGLISH
GERMAN
PORTUGAL
KOREAN
The new language is displayed immediately after changing the programming language.
Default
KOREAN
Display
SYS.MMC LANGUAGE
ENGLISH
2. Enter the new language([0]-[11]).

Or, press [Volume] to select the language and
SYS.MMC LANGUAGE
KOREAN

Related Program
N/A
Page 2-322
815 Copy Database

This program allows the user to copy the system DB(SRAM) to the SmartMedia card,
and vice versa.
The system DB can be copied manually or automatically to the SmartMedia during
operation. The DB is copied to the SmartMedia at the Daily Save Time everyday.
But this is not applicable when the Daily Save Time is set to 00:00.
The DB of the SmartMedia card may only be copied manually to the system, and the
system restarts to operate with the new DB.
The name of the DB saved in the SmartMedia card is DATABASE.MCP when the
MCP board is mounted, and DATABASE.MPP when the MCP2 board is mounted.
Default
Daily Save Time
00 : 00
Display
CUST DBASE:SMDB
S:10/01/00 01:01
2. Press [Volume] to select SRAM or SMDB.

The most recent saved time is displayed.
CUST DBASE:SRAM
S:08/01/00 20:10
3. Press the [Right] Soft button to move the cursor.
CUST DBASE:SRAM
S:08/01/00 20:10
4. Press [Volume] to select the program item and

CUST DBASE:SRAM
COPY TO SMDB:NO
5. Press [Volume] to select YES and press the [Right]

CUST DBASE:SRAM
ARE YOU SURE:NO
6. Press [Volume] to select YES again and press

the [Right] Soft button to save data.
CUST DBASE:SRAM
S:11/22/00 15:30
Page 2-323

Related Program
N/A
Page 2-324
818 Download Program (MCP/MCP2)

This program is described respectively for systems with MCP and MCP2 board.
MCP
This program allows the user to download the new version of programs from the
SmartMedia card to MCP, SCP/LCP, LAN, and TEPRI, and change the version of the
program.
Default
N/A
Display
PGM DOWNLOAD
MCP:MCPLS113.PGM
2. Press [Volume] to select the program saved in

the SmartMedia card.
The version of the software is displayed.
PGM DOWNLOAD
LAN:LANV107.PGM
PGM DOWNLOAD
LAN:LANV107.PGM
4. Press [Volume] to select the program and press

LAN PGM
DOWNLOAD NOW?NO
5. Press [Volume] to select YES.

Press the [Right] Soft button to start download.
PRI PGM:C1-S1
DOWNLOAD NOW?YES

Or, press [Speaker] to move on to the next program..
Related Program
N/A
Page 2-325
MCP2
This program allows the user to download the new version of programs from the
SmartMedia card to MCP2, SCP2/LCP2, and TEPRI, and change the version of the
program.
Default
N/A
Display
PGM DOWNLOAD
MPP:MPPLV100.PGM
2. Press [Volume] to select the program saved in

the SmartMedia card.
The version of the software is displayed.
PGM DOWNLOAD
PRI:PRIV104.PGM
PGM DOWNLOAD
PRI:PRIV104.PGM
4. Press [Volume] to select the program and press

PRI PGM:C1-S1
DOWNLOAD NOW?NO
5. Select the number of the cabinet and slot for

each type of the program.
PRI PGM:C1-S1
DOWNLOAD NOW?NO
6. Press [Volume] to select YES.

Press the [Right] Soft button to start download.
PRI PGM:C1-S1
DOWNLOAD NOW?YES

Related Program
N/A
Page 2-326
819 Display SmartMedia Data (MCP/MCP2)

MCP
This program displays the name and size of the files saved in SmartMedia.
<Files that can be saved in SmartMedia>
STARTUP.INI
When the user selects the MCP or SCP program in MMC 818, the related data is
saved in this file. This file is created only when the program is selected.
STARTUP.SYS
This program loads the MCP program saved in SmartMedia using the memory in
the MCP board when the system is initiated. This program is essential since it is
required for starting the system.
MCPLV100.PGM
Program for the MCP board.

SmartMedia shall have one or more MCP program since there is no MCP
program in the MCP board. The name of the program for iDCS-M is
MCPMxxxx.PGM and MCPLxxxx.PGM for iDCS-L. SmartMedia shall have the
MCP program corresponding to the type of the system(iDCS-L or iDCS- M).
LANV100.PGM
LAN program.
LAN program is already installed in the card. The LAN program in SmartMedia is
used for S/W version upgrade.
SCPV100.PGM
SCP/LCP program.
SCP or LCP program is already installed in the card. The programs in
SmartMedia are used for S/W version upgrade.
PRIV100.PGM
TEPRI program.
TEPRI program is already installed in the card. The TEPRI program in
SmartMedia is used for S/W version upgrade.
DATABASE.MCP
This database file is created in SmartMedia when the DB is copied to SMDB in

MMC 815. This file is created only when the SMDB is created in MMC 815.
Display
STARTUP.INI
sz:512 byte
2. Press [Volume] to display the data of the files

saved in SmartMedia.
MCPMV100.PGM
sz:2549258 byte
3. Press [Hold] and select [1](YES) to delete the

file shown on the LCD screen from SmartMedia.
STARTUP.INI
DELETE FILE? NO
Page 2-327

Related Program
N/A
Page 2-328
MCP2
This program displays the name and size of the files saved in SmartMedia.
<Files that can be saved in SmartMedia>
STARTUP.INI
When the user selects the MCP2 or SCP2 program in MMC 818, the related data
is saved in this file. This file is created only when the program is selected.
STARTUP.PRE
This program loads the MPP program saved in SmartMedia using the memory in
the MCP2 board when the system is initiated. This program is essential since it is
required for starting the system. .
MPPLV100.PGM
Program for the MCP2 board.

SmartMedia shall have one or more MCP2 program since there are no MCP2
programs in the MCP2 board. The name of the program for iDCS-M is
MPPMxxxx.PGM and MPPLxxxx.PGM for iDCS-L. SmartMedia shall have the
MCP2 program corresponding to the type of the system(iDCS-L or iDCS- M).
SPPV100.PGM
SCP2/LCP2 Program.
SCP2 or LCP2 program is already installed in the card.
The programs in SmartMedia are used for S/W version upgrade.
PRIV100.PGM
TEPRI program.
TEPRI program is already installed in the card. The TEPRI program in SmartMedia
is used for S/W version upgrade.
DATABASE.MPP
This database file is created in SmartMedia when the DB is copied to SMDB in

MMC 815. This file is created only when the SMDB is created in MMC 815.
Default
N/A
Display
STARTUP.PRE
sz:77656 byte
2. Press [Volume] to display the data of the files

saved in SmartMedia.
MPPLV100.PGM
Sz:7307776 byte
3. Press [Hold] and select [1](YES) to delete the

file shown on the LCD screen from SmartMedia.
MPPLV100.PGM
DELETE FILE ? NO

Related Program
N/A
Page 2-329
820 Set System Link Number (MCP/MCP2)

This program allows the user to set the node number used for networking. Up to 12
characters may be entered as the node number. The user can enter the IP address for
VoIP networking in systems equipped with the MCP2 board. In addition, different
SELF node IP types can be set for each node of the recipient to send different IP
address of the SELF node sent to the receiving node depending on whether the target
node is connected to a private IP network or to a public IP network. This option is
only applicable when SYSTEM IP CHANGE is set to ENABLE in Program 830 Set
LAN Parameter.
The iDCS-M system equipped with the MCP board does not support this program.
SELF, which means the self node must be set for networking. The rest of the items do
not need to be set since they are needed to display the station numbers.
Default
N/A
Display
SELF :LINK ID
2. Select whether to enter items of the self node

or another system.
Or, press [Volume] to select the system and press
SYS01:LINK ID
3. Press the [Right] Soft button and enter the

node number.
SYS01:LINK ID
2
4. For VoIP networking, enter the IP address

for signaling.
SYS01:SIGNAL G/W
255.255.255.255
5. When networking through VoIP, set the IP address

type of the SELF node that is to be sent to the other party.
6.
Page 2-330

Related Program
Program 824
Program 830
Convert Auto Route Selection Expansion Dial

Set LAN Parameter (MCP/MCP2)
Page 2-331
821 Set Networking C.O. Line

This program is used to set the Q-Signaling PRI C.O. line used for networking.
The data shall be set for each PRI card.
Default
NORMAL
Display
[701] Q-SIG TRK

NORMAL
2. Enter the first C.O. number of the PRI card.

Or, press [Volume] to select the PRI card and
[701] Q-SIG TRK

NORMAL
3. Enter normal([0]. NORMAL) or networking

([1]. SIGNALING).Or, press [Volume] to select,
[701] Q-SIG TRK

Q-SIGNALING

Related Program
N/A
Page 2-332
823 Set Network Service Level

This program sets the service level table applied to the networking function.
01
CALL OFFER
Call Offer
03
CC PATH RSV
CC Path Reservation
04
CC SIG CONN
CC Retention of Signal Connection
05
CC SVC RETN
CC Service Retention
06
CCBS
Call Completion to Busy Subscriber
07
CCNR
Call Completion on No Reply
08
CFB
Call Forward Busy
09
CFNR
Call Forward No Reply
10
CFU
Call Forward Unconditional
11
CI
Call Intrusion
12
CI CAPABIL
Intrusion Capability Level(1~3)
14
CI PROTECT
Intrusion Protection Level(0~3)
15
CLIP
Calling Line Identification Presentation
16
CLIR
Calling Line Identification Restriction
17
CNIP
Calling Name Identification Presentation
18
CNIR
Calling Name Identification Restriction
19
CNIRO
Calling Name Identification Restriction Override
20
COLP
Connected Line Identification Presentation
21
COLR
Connected Name Identification Presentation
22
CONP
Connected Name Identification Presentation
23
CONP LEVEL
CONP Level(0~3)
24
CONR
Connected Name Identification Restriction
25
CONRO
Connected Name Identification Restriction Override
26
CT RE-ROUTE
Transfer By Rerouting
27
DND TONE
DND Announcement
28
DNDO
Do Not Disturb Override
29
DNDO CAPABL
DNDO Capability Level(0~3)
30
DNDO PROTEC
DNDO Protection Level(1~3)
31
PATH REPL.
Path Replacement
32
PATH RETEN
Path Retention
Page 2-333
Default
CI CAPABIL
CI PROTECT
CLIR
CNIR
COLR
CONP LEVEL
CONR
CT RE-ROUTE
DND TONE
DNDO
DNDO CAPABL
DNDO PROTEC
All other functions
Display
NETWORK COS (01)

01:CALL OFFER :Y
2. Enter the service level([01]-[30]).

Or, press [Volume] to select the service level and
NETWORK COS (01)

01:CALL OFFER :Y

Or, press [Volume] to select the function and
NETWORK COS (01)

01:CALL OFFER :Y

Or, press [Volume] to select YES/NO and press
NETWORK COS (01)

01:CALL OFFER :N

Related Program
N/A
Page 2-334
824 Convert Auto Route Selection Expansion Dial

This program allows the user to set the dial number conversion data, enabling the
user to call stations of another system, connected through the C.O. line, using the
same number system.
Generally, the system link number and the station number are both required for
dialing the station of another system connected through networking. However,
the user can use this program to add the system link number to the station number
the user entered, using Program 710 Digit for Auto Route Selection.
This program may also be used in systems not connected through networking when
multiple Auto Route Selection function codes are required. In this case, this program
offers the speed dialing function.
Default
N/A
Display
01:601
SZ:0 MAX:00 MB:N
2. Enter the entry number([01]-[96]).

Or, press [Volume] to select the entry number and
01:601
SZ:0 MAX:00 MB:N
3. Enter the converted number(maximum 8 characters)

01:601 60201
SZ:0 MAX:00 MB:N
4. Enter the number of digits of the number used for entry.

Or, press [Volume] to select the number of digits
and press the [Right] Soft button to move
the cursor.
01:601 60201
SZ:3 MAX:00 MB:N
Page 2-335
5. Enter the dial count after which the Auto Route

Selection function should operate.
Or, press [Volume] to select the dial count and
01:601 60201
SZ:3 MAX:06 MB:N
6. Enter whether to assign the voice mail automatically.

Or, press [Volume] to select whether to assign the
voice mail automatically and press the [Right]
01:601 60201
SZ:3 MAX:06 MB:N

Related Program
Program 710
Program 820
Page 2-336
Digit for Auto Route Selection (MCP/MCP2)

Set System Link Number (MCP/MCP2)
825 Set Networking Option

This program allows the user to set the various options required for networking.
ADD NUMBER TO NAME
Adds station number to the name field of the Q-Sig message.
USE REMOTE VM
Uses the voice mail card of the other system connected through Q-Sig.
REMOTE VM NUMBER
Sets the dial number when using the voice mail card of another system.
REMOTE CID NUM
Sets whether to include the node number when sending the C.O. CID
number through the voice mail card.
Default
ADD NUMB TO NAME
YES
USE REMOTE VM
NO
REMOTE VM NUMBER
N/A
REMOTE CID NUMB
YES
Display
ADD NUMB TO NAME

YES

Or, press [Volume] to select the entry and press the
USE REMOTE VM
NO

Or, press [Volume] to select YES/NO and press the
[Right] Soft button to save the data.
USE REMOTE VM
YES

Related Program
N/A
Page 2-337
826 Set System Clock Synchronization Criteria

This program allows the user to set the synchronization criteria for the system clock.
Clocks entering the TEPRI and BRI card may only be used for criteria, and SELF shall
be set when using internal clock. When an available clock enters from more than one
TEPRI card(or BRI card), one of the clocks shall be selected according to priority.
Default
PRIORITY 1
C1-S1
PRIORITY 2
C1-S2
PRIORITY 3
C1-S3
PRIORITY 4
C2-S1
PRIORITY 5
C2-S2
PRIORITY 6
C2-S3
PRIORITY 7
C3-S1
PRIORITY 8
C3-S2
PRIORITY 9
C3-S3
Display
REFERENCE CLOCK
PRIORITY 1:C1-S1
2. Enter the priority number(1-9 or 1-3).

Or, press [Volume] to select the priority and press
REFERENCE CLOCK
PRIORITY 1:C1-S1
3. Enter the cabinet-slot number([00]-[27]).

Or, press [Volume] to select the cabinet-slot number
Or, enter [00] to set internal clock
REFERENCE CLOCK
PRIORITY 1:C2-S2
REFERENCE CLOCK
PRIORITY 1:SELF

Related Program
N/A
Page 2-338
829 LAN Printer Parameter

This program sets the various parameters required for using the LAN printer.
Systems equipped with the MCP board must have the LAN board installed to use this
program.
The eight types of data listed below can be displayed using the LAN printer.
[01] SMDR
[02] UCD REPORT
[03] TRAFFIC REPORT
[04] ALARM REPORT
[05] UCD VIEW
[06] PERIODIC UCD
[07] HOTEL REPORT
[08] PMS
The items that are set in this program are listed below.
00
DATA TYPE
Type of data to be displayed
01
CURR STATUS
Current status of the LAN printer
02
EMPTY BUFF
Prints all data left in the buffer
03
UPDATE LAN
Applies modified items
04
DESTINATION
Sets transfer destination(OFF, PRINTER, PC, BOTH)
05
PRINTER IP
Sets the IP address of the LAN printer
06
PRINTER TCP
Sets the TCP port of the printer
07
LAN TCP
Sets LAN TCP port
08
RETRY COUNT
Retransfer attempt count (00~10)
09
RETRY WAIT
Wait time for retransfer(005~250 sec)
10
PJL ENABLE
Sets PJL(0. FALSE, 1. TRUE)
11
LANGUAGE
Printer language(0. RAW, 1. PCL, 2. PS)
12
PAPER SIZE
Paper size(0. A4, 1. LETTER)
13
FONT TYPE
Font type(0. COURIED, 1. TIMES NEW ROMAN)
14
DUPLEX ENAB
Sets duplex(0. FALSE, 1. TRUE)
15
ORIENTATION
Sets orientation(0. PORTRAIT, 1. LANDSCAPE)
16
PRINT TRAY
Sets printer tray(0. DEFAULT, 1. TRAY 1, 2. TRAY, 3. MANUAL)
17
RESOLUTION
Resolution(0. 300, 1. 600)
18
LINE/PAGE
Line per page
Page 2-339
Default
DATA TYPE
Display type of each numbered data
CURR STATUS
Display current status of the LAN printer
EMPTY BUFF
NO
UPDATE LAN
NO
DESTINATION
OFF
PRINTER IP
200. 1. 1. 1
PRINTER TCP
10010
LAN TCP
10020
RETRY COUNT
03
RETRY WAIT
010 sec
PJL ENABLE
FALSE
LANGUAGE
RAW
PAPER SIZE
A4
FONT TYPE
COURIER
DUPLEX ENAB
FALSE
ORIENTATION
PORTRAIT
PRINT TRAY
DEFAULT
RESOLUTION
300
LINE/PAGE
60
Display
[01] DATA TYPE

SMDR
2. Enter type of data to be printed.

Or, press [Volume] to select the type and press
[02] DATA TYPE

UCD REPORT
3. Enter the item number.

Or, press [Volume] to select the item and press
[02] PRINTER IP
200. 1. 1. 1
4. Select the data.

[02] PRINTER IP
168.219. 83.101
Page 2-340

Related Program
N/A
Page 2-341
830 Set LAN Parameter (MCP/MCP2)

MCP
This program allows the user to set the LAN related parameters. The system shall be
restarted after changing the LAN parameters.
Systems equipped with the MCP board must have the LAN board installed to use this
program.
00
SYSTEM IP ADDRESS
System IP address
01
SYSTEM NET MASK
System IP subnet masking value
02
SYSTEM GATEWAY
System IP gateway address
03
SYSTEM WARM RESET
Restart system
04
SYSTEM MAC. ADD
System hardware address. Unchangeable
05
PCMMC ADDRESS
PCMMC connection IP address
06
REMOTE M/A ADDR
REMOTE M/A connection IP address
Default
SYSTEM IP ADDRESS : 168.219.1.254
SYSTEM NET MASK : 255.255.255
SYSTEM GATEWAY : 168.219.1.1
Display
SYSTEM IP ADDR
168.219. 1.254

SYSTEM GATEWAY
168.219. 1. 1
3. Enter the address data.

Press the [Right] Soft button and move the cursor
if the address is not a three digit number.
SYSTEM GATEWAY
168.219.146. 1

Related Program
N/A
Page 2-342
MCP2
This program allows the user to set the LAN related parameters. The system shall be
restarted after changing the LAN parameters.
00
SYSTEM IP ADDRESS
System IP address
01
SYSTEM GATEWAY
System IP gateway address
02
SYSTEM NET MASK
System IP subnet masking value
03
SYSTEM RESTART
Restart system
04
SYSTEM IP CHANGE
Sets the public IP address for packets outgoing to public

network when the IP address used in the private network and
the IP address used in the public network are not identical
05
SYSTEM PUBLIC IP
System public IP address
06
SYSTEM MAC. ADDR
System hardware address. Unchangeable
07
PCMMC ADDRESS
PCMMC connection IP address
08
REMOTE M/A ADDR
REMOTE M/A connection IP address
Default
PCMMC ADDRESS : 168.219.1.101
REMOTE M/A ADDR : 168.219.1.102
Display
SYSTEM IP ADDR
168.219. 1.254

SYSTEM GATEWAY
168.219. 1. 1

Press the [Right] Soft button and move the cursor
if the address is not a three digit number.
SYSTEM GATEWAY
168.219.146. 1

Related Program
N/A
Page 2-343
831 Set VoIP Parameter (MCP)

This program allows the user to set the parameter of the ITM3 card, which is the
VoIP card of iDCS 500.
0
IP ADDRESS
IP address of the ITM3 card.
SUB MASK
Subnet mask of the ITM3 card.
GATEWAY
Default gateway address of the ITM3 card.
STS PERIOD
Sets the cycle of transmitting the message for Remote IP status check.
Set to 0 for no checks.
MAX FAX CH
Maximum number of channels providing FAX service. Frequent use of

Fax will affect voice calls since FAX occupies more bandwidth than
voice calls. Thus, available FAX channels shall be limited.
CLIP TABLE
Sets the table number of program 323 that should be used as the
Called Party Number when calling through VoIP. The number of
program 405 is used when set as NONE.
VOIP MODE
When receiving a call through VoIP, select whether to use the received
Called Party Number or to use the number of program 714.
VERSION
S/W version of the ITM3 card.
Default
IP ADDRESS
1.1.1.1
SUB MASK
255.255.255.0
GATEWAY
1.1.1.1
STS PERIOD
MAX FAX CH
CLIP TABLE
NONE
VOIP MODE
FOLLOW DID TRANS
VERSION
V3(The latest version)
2. Enter the phone number of the ITM3 card.

Or, press [Volume] to select the ITM3 card and
Page 2-344
Display
[7033]IP ADDRESS
1. 1. 1. 1
[7033]IP ADDRESS
1. 1. 1. 1
3. Enter the parameter item number([0]-[7]).

Or, press [Volume] to select the parameter item and
[7033]IP ADDRESS
_ 1. 1. 1. 1
4. Enter the parameter data and press the [Right]

Soft button to save the data.
[7033]IP ADDRESS
168.219. 83.110

Related Program
Program 323
Program 405
Program 714
Set Caller ID (MCP/MCP2)

Enter C.O. Line Phone Number
Page 2-345
831 Set MGI Parameter (MCP2)

This program allows the user to set the parameter of the MGI card.
0
IP ADDRESS
IP address of the MGI card.
GATEWAY
Subnet mask of the MGI card.
SUB MASK
Default gateway address of the MGI card.
PUBLIC IP
Public IP address of the MGI card
STS PERIOD
Sets the cycle of transmitting the message for Remote IP status

check. Set to 0 for no checks.
VERSION
MGI3 card version type (MGI3 only.)
MAC ADDR
Hardware address of the MGI card. Unchangeable (Not applicable to

the MGI3 card.)
CARD RESET
Select whether to restart the card (Not displayed for MGI3 card.)
Default
IP ADDRESS
1.1.1.1
SUB MASK
255.255.255.0
GATEWAY
1.1.1.1
PUBLIC IP
1.1.1.1
STS PERIOD
Display
[3801]IP ADDRESS
1. 1. 1. 1
2. Enter the phone number of the MGI card.

Or, press [Volume] to select the MGI card and
[3801]IP ADDRESS
1. 1. 1. 1

Or, press [Volume] to select the parameter item
[3801]IP ADDRESS
_ 1. 1. 1. 1

[3801]IP ADDRESS
168.219. 83.110

Related Program
N/A
Page 2-346
832 Set VoIP Access Code (MCP/MCP2)

MCP
This program allows the user to set the codes required for calling through the ITM3
card, which is the VoIP card of the iDCS 500 system.
0
ACCESS DGT
Code required for connecting to the other partys VoIP card. This code is
needed to forward calls to a specific VoIP card in the other partys system.
DGT LENGTH
Length of the VoIP call digit.
DEL.LENGTH
Delete length of the access code. This length of the access code is deleted
when connected to the other partys VoIP card.
INSERT CODE
The digit to be inserted in front of the entered Called Party Number.
IP TABLE 1
First IP table index(0~30) to be referred to when converting the access

code to IP.
IP TABLE 2
Second IP table index(0~30) to be referred to when converting the access

code to IP.
IP START
Sets the start location of the IP table search to disperse calls for a specific
access code.
GK USE
Sets whether to use Gatekeeper for the access code.

(Only applicable when GK ROUTING is Enabled in Program 836.)
The VoIP access code is required for VoIP Call Routing at the gateway, and shall not be
referred to when using Gatekeeper. However, when using GateKeeper while GK
ROUTING is Enabled, use of the Gatekeeper is determined upon whether GK USE is set.
In ITM3 card Version 3, item 00 to 31 of the access code table is used to convert
codes for outgoing calls, and 32 to 62 is used to convert codes for incoming calls.
Default
N/A
Page 2-347
Display
(00) ACCESS CODE
2. Enter the entry number(00-62).

Or, press [Volume] to select the entry and press
(00) ACCESS CODE
3. Enter the code item number([0]-[7]).

Or, press [Volume] to select the code item and
(00) ACCESS CODE

_
4. Enter the code data and press the [Right] Soft

(00) ACCESS CODE

064

Related Program
Program 833
Program 836
Page 2-348
Set VoIP Internet Address

Set VoIP GateKeeper Option (MCP)
MCP2
This program allows the user to set the digit code conversion when transmitting or
receiving calls through H.323 and SIP VoIP.
0
ACCESS DGT
Digit required for connecting to the other party. This digit is needed to
forward calls to the other partys system.
DGT LENGTH
DEL.LENGTH
Length of the VoIP call digit.

Delete length of the access digit. This length of the access digit is deleted
when connected to the other partys VoIP C.O. line.
INSERT DGT
IP TABLE 1
The digit to be inserted in front of the entered Called Party Number.

First IP table index(0~62) to be referred to when converting the access
code to IP.
IP START
Sets the start location of the IP table search to disperse calls for a specific
access code.
GK USE
Sets whether to use Gatekeeper for the access code.

(Only applicable when GK ROUTING is Enabled in Program 836.)
Default
N/A
2. Enter [0](O : Outgoing) or [1](I : Incoming) to

select the type of table.
Or, press [Volume] to selectthe table type and
Display
(O:00)ACCESS DGT
0
(O:00)ACCESS DGT
0
3. Enter the entry number(00-62).

Or, press [Volume] to select the entry and
(O:00)ACCESS DGT
1
4. Enter the code item number([0]-[7]).

Or, press [Volume] to select the code item and
(O:00)DGT LENGTH
1
5. Enter the code data and press the [Right] Soft

(O:00)DGT LENGTH
3
Page 2-349

Related Program
Program 833
Program 836
Page 2-350
Set VoIP Internet Address

Set H.323 GK Option (MCP2)
833 Set VoIP Internet Address

This program allows the user to set the Internet address that can be connected
through VoIP.
Default
N/A
Display
TB(00) ENTRY(00)
1. 1. 1. 1
2. Enter the Internet address table number([00]-[62]).

Or, press [Volume] to select the table and press
TB(00) ENTRY(00)
1. 1. 1. 1
3. Enter the entry number([00]-[15]) of the

Internet ddress table.
Or, press [Volume] to select the entry and press
TB(00) ENTRY(00)
_ 1. 1. 1. 1

Insert 0 in front of digits that are not 3 characters.
TB(00) ENTRY(00)
168.219.83 .101

Related Program
Program 831
Set VoIP Parameter(MCP)

Set MGI Parameter(MCP2)
Page 2-351
834 Set VoIP General Option (MCP)

This program allows the user to set the system parameters of the ITM3 card, which is
the VoIP card of iDCS 500.
01
H.323 FAST SETUP
Sets whether to use H.323 Fast Start.
02
GATEWAY CALL ID
Sets the Caller ID for billing.
03
BILLING TYPE
Sets the billing type.
04
CALLER ID TYPE
Sets the Caller ID type. The Caller ID type is displayed only when it
is identical to that sent by the caller.
05
INCOminG CHANNEL
Sets the search type for the port to be used for incoming calls.
06
DTMF GENERATION
Sets the DTMF generation type.
07
FAX SIGNAL TYPE
Sets the Fax Signal type.
08
SWITCH TO H.245
Sets whether to open H245 channel after connection for Fast Start.
09
DEFAULT DIL NO
Sets the Called Party Number to be used when Called Party

Number is not received.
10
SNMP SERVER IP
Sets the IP address of SNMP server for network management.
11
SIGNALING PORT
Sets ports of H245, RTP, RTCP, and T38 in case of Firewall.

Ports are assigned in sequence starting from this parameter value.
12
STATUS PORT
Sets the port used to send the message through TCP/IP for IP
status inquiry.
13
WCS PORT
Sets the port for interlocking with the Web Call Server.
14
SIGK ACCESS PORT
Sets the port for functions such as TFTP loading.
15
MAKE DEFAULT DB
Initializes all DB related to ITM3.
16
EARLY H245 MODE
Currently not used.
17
RING BACK TONE
Sets whether to use the virtual RING BACK TONE.
18
Q931 NO ANS TIME
Sets the maximum wait time until the called party answers. If the
other party does not answer within this time, the call is processed
as NO ANSWER.
19
ISP TYPE
Sets whether to use the separate process added for a specific ISP.
20
FACILITY TYPE
Currently not used.
21
RELAY RBT
Sets whether to switch from the virtual ringback tone to the actual
ringback tone when the actual ringback tone is sent from the
network while using the virtual ringback tone.
22
WARNING DEST
If fault occurs while making a call through the VoIP C.O. line due to
network failure, an alternate station or station group number is set
for the outgoing call. The fault can be announced when the AA
number is registered.
Page 2-352
Default
PCM COMPANDING
A-LAW
H.323 FAST SETUP
DISABLE
GATEWAY CALL ID
1234
BILLING TYPE
STANDARD
CALLER ID TYPE
ANI
INCOminG CHANNEL
DISTRIBUTE
DTMF GENERATION
H.245 SIGNAL
FAX SIGNAL TYPE
T.38
SWITCH TO H.245
ENABLE
DEFAULT DIL NO
NONE
SNMP SERVER IP
0.0.0.0
SIGNALING PORT
10000
STATUS PORT
20000
WCS PORT
20010
SIGK ACCESS PORT
20020
MAKE DEFAULT DB
NO
EARLY H245 MODE
NO
RING BACK TONE
DISABLE
Q931 NO ANS TIME
090 sec
ISP TYPE
NORMAL
FACILITY TYPE
NORMAL
RELAY RBT
DISABLE
WARNING DEST
NONE
Display
PCM COMPANDING
A-LAW
2. Enter parameter number([00]-[22]).

CALLER ID TYPE
ANI

CALLER ID TYPEIP
Page 2-353

Related Program
N/A
Page 2-354
834 Set H.323 General Option (MCP2)

This program allows the user to set the H.323 process related system parameters.
00
GATEWAY CALL ID
01
H.323 FAST SETUP
Sets whether to use H.323 Fast Start.
02
CALLER ID TYPE
Sets the Caller ID type that is sent to the recipient of the call.
The type shall be identical to that sent by the caller to be displayed.
06
TUNNELING
07
DEFAULT DIL NO
Sets whether to use the Q.931 signaling channel for H.245

signaling instead of using a separate channel.
Sets the call forward number for incoming calls that does not
include the dial digit.
11
CODEC AUTO NEGO
Sets whether to automatically change the CODEC to be used

according to the other party.
14
SIGNAL PORT
Sets the IP port number for H.323 signaling.
17
SEND CLIP TABLE
Sets the Caller Data Table number in Program 323 that will be
sent as the caller information when calling through the VoIP
network. Number in Program 405 is used when set as None.
18
INCOminG MODE
For VoIP incoming calls, sets whether to use the received Called
Party Number as is, or to follow Program 714, or to use the
destination specified for each C.O. line in Program 406.
19
ALLOW GW CHECK
When this option is set as ENABLE, the incoming H.323 call is

blocked if the IP address of the caller does not match the IP
address registered in Program 833 Set VoIP Internet Address.
Default
GATEWAY CALL ID
1234
H.323 FAST SETUP
ENABLE
CALLER ID TYPE
ANI
TUNNELING
ENABLE
DEFAULT DIL NO
5000(Or, 500)
CODEC AUTO NEGO
ON
SIGNAL PORT
10000
SEND CLIP TABLE
INCOMING MODE
FOLLOW DID TRANS
ALLOW GW CHECK
DISABLE
Page 2-355
Display
GATEWAY CALL ID
1234

H.323 FAST SETUP

ENABLE

H.323 FAST SETUP

DISABLE

Related Program
N/A
Page 2-356
835 Set VoIP DSP Option (MCP)

This program allows the user to set the DSP parameters of the ITM3 card, which is
the VoIP card of iDCS 500.
00
AUDIC CODEC
01
ECHO CANCEL
Sets the type of VoIP Codec.

Sets whether to enable Echo Cancellation, which removes the echo
generated from Packet Delay and PSTN due to voice reflection.
02
SILENCE
Sets whether to enable Silence Suppression, which blocks transfer of
SUPPRESS
voice packets by detecting silence during calls.
03
INPUT FILTER
Sets whether to enable Input Filtering of DSP.
04
OUTPUT FILTER
Sets whether to enable Output Filtering of DSP.
05
INPUT GAIN
Sets the PCM Input Gain value entered to DSP.(-31Db~31Db)
06
VOICE VOLUME
Sets the Voice Volume value.(-31Db~31Db)
07
MULTIFRAME
Sets the RTP TX Multiframe Counter value.(1~12)
COUNT
08
JITTER OPTION
Sets the Dynamic Jitter characteristics.
10
RTP DELAY LIMIT
Sets the allowed value(ms) for Voice Packet Delay. When delay
exceeding the Delay Limit is generated, the status changes to Packet
Delay.
11
RTP LOSS LIMIT
Sets the allowed value(%) for RTP Packet Loss. When packet loss
exceeding the Packet Loss Limit is generated, the status changes to
Packet Loss.
12
RTP CHECK
Sets the check period(sec) for RTP Packet Loss.
PERIOD
13
RTP OVER COUNT
Sets the allowed count for exceeding RTP Delay Limit/Loss Limit.
14
MAX JITTER
Sets maximum Jitter Delay value.
DELAY
15
min JITTER DELAY
Sets minimum Jitter Delay value.
16
DTMF TRANS
Sets whether to transmit the DTMF signal through the voice channel
ROUTE
(DISABLE) or through a separate message(ENABLE).
FAX ERROR
Sets additional recovery function for FAX transfer errors when using
CORRECT
T.38 Fax.
17
Page 2-357
Default
AUDIC CODEC
G.723.1
ECHO CANCEL
ENABLE
SILENCE SUPPRESS
ENABLE
INPUT FILTER
ENABLE
OUTPUT FILTER
ENABLE
INPUT GAIN
23
VOICE VOLUME
34
MULTIFRAME COUNT
JITTER OPTION
RTP DELAY LIMIT
600
RTP LOSS LIMIT
10%
RTP CHECK PERIOD
10 sec
RTP OVER COUNT
MAX JITTER DELAY
150 MS
min JITTER DELAY
070 MS
DTMF TRANS ROUTE
ENABLE
FAX ERROR CORRECT
ENABLE
Display
AUDIO CODEC
G.723.1

AUDIO CODEC
G.723.1

AUDIO CODEC
G.729A

Related Program
N/A
Page 2-358
835 Set MGI DSP Option (MCP2)

This program allows the user to set the DSP parameters of the MGI card.
00
AUDIC CODEC
Sets the type of VoIP Codec.

(1 : G.711, 2 : G.723.1, 3 : G.729A, 4 : G.729)
01
ECHO CANCEL
Sets whether to enable Echo Cancellation, which removes the echo

generated from Packet Delay and PSTN due to voice reflection.
02
SILENCE
Sets whether to enable Silence Suppression, which blocks transfer of
SUPPRESS
voice packets by detecting silence during calls.
03
INPUT FILTER
Sets whether to enable Input Filtering of DSP.
04
OUTPUT FILTER
Sets whether to enable Output Filtering of DSP.
05
INPUT GAIN
Sets the call sensitivity of the PCM voice entered to DSP.

(-31Db~31Db)
06
VOICE VOLUME
Sets the volume for converting the voice packet to PCM voice.
(-31Db~31Db)
07
MULTIFRAME
Sets the number of buffering when transferring the voice packet
COUNT
through the network. The voice packet is buffered according to the set
number and sent as a single packet.(1~12)
08
JITTER OPTION
Sets the criteria for controlling the Jitter Buffering operation when
converting the voice packet received from the network into the PCM
voice. Process focuses on Packet Loss when set lower than 4, and on
Packet Delay when set higher than 4.
09
min JITTER DELAY
Sets minimum Jitter Delay value.
10
MAX JITTER
Sets maximum Jitter Delay value.
DELAY
15
FAX ERR
Sets additional recovery function for FAX transfer errors when using
CORRECT
T.38 Fax.
16
MAX FAX COUNT
Sets maximum number of allowed Internet FAX channels.
17
MGI2 AUDIO
Sets the Audio Codec type of the MGI2 card.
CODEC
(0 : G.711, 1 : G.729A)
DTMF TYPE
Sets whether to transmit the DTMF signal through the voice channel
18
(INBAND) or through a separate message(OUTBAND).
Page 2-359
Default
AUDIC CODEC
G.729A
ECHO CANCEL
ENABLE
SILENCE SUPPRESS
ENABLE
INPUT FILTER
ENABLE
OUTPUT FILTER
ENABLE
INPUT GAIN
31
VOICE VOLUME
31
MULTIFRAME COUNT
02
JITTER OPTION
04
min JITTER DELAY
030 MS
MAX JITTER DELAY
150 MS
FAX ERR CORRECT
ENABLE
MAX FAX COUNT
02
MGI2 AUDIO CODEC
G.711
DTMF TYPE
OUTBAND
Display
AUDIO CODEC
G.729A

ECHO CANCEL
ENABLE

ECHO CANCEL
DISABLE

Related Program
N/A
Page 2-360
836 Set VoIP GateKeeper Option (MCP)

This program allows the user to set the GateKeeper parameters of the ITM3 card,
which is the VoIP card of iDCS 500.
00
GK CONNECTION
Sets whether to connect to GateKeeper.
01
GK TYPE
Sets the type of GK.
02
GK IP ADDR
Sets the IP address of GK.
03
GK NAME
Sets the alias name of GK.
04
GW:H323 ID
Sets in the H.323 ID format, which is required for registering

the H323 ID GW to GK.
05
GW:E164 NO
Sets in the E.164 NO format, which is required for registering

the E164 NO GW to GK.
07
RAS MANUAL
Select Enable to selectively connect the GateKeeper according

to the Prefix. Otherwise, select Disable.
08
GK ROUTING
Set when analysis of the dialing digit is performed by systems other

than the GateKeeper when connecting to the GateKeeper. While the
digit is generally analyzed by the GateKeeper, this function allows
the dialing digit to be analyzed using the data designated in the
table of Program 832.
Default
GK CONNECT
DISABLE
GK TYPE
SIGK
GK IP ADDR
0.0.0.0
GK NAME
GW : H323 ID
GW : E164 NO
RAS MANUAL
DISABLE
GK ROUTING
DISABLE
Page 2-361
Display
[7033]GK CONNECT
DISABLE
2. Enter the number of the ITM3 card.

Or, press [Volume] to select the ITM3 card and
[7033]GK CONNECT
DISABLE

[7033]GK CONNECT
DISABLE

[7033]GK CONNECT
ENABLE

Related Program
N/A
Page 2-362
836 Set H.323 GK Option (MCP2)

This program allows the user to set the H.323 GateKeeper parameters.
00
GK CONNECTION
Sets whether to connect to GateKeeper.
01
GK ROUTING
Set when analysis of the dialing digit is performed by systems other

than the GateKeeper when connecting to the GateKeeper.
While the digit is generally analyzed by the GateKeeper, this function
allows the dialing digit to be analyzed using the data designated in
the Outband table of Program 832.
02
GK IP ADDRESS
Sets the IP address of GK.
03
GK NAME
Sets the alias name of GK.
04
ALTER GK IP ADDR
Sets the alternative GateKeeper when operating the GateKeeper

with redundancy.
05
H.323 GATEWAY ID
Sets the system ID that should be registered to GateKeeper

as H.323 ID.
06
E.164 GATEWAY NO
Sets the system ID that should be registered to GateKeeper

as E.164 ID.
07
GK KEEP ALIVE
The transfer cycle of RRQ to GateKeeper
08
GK DOWN ROUTE
Sets the routing method that shall be used when connection with
the GateKeeper in use is lost.
0. ALTER GK : Connect to the alternative GateKeeper.
1. PSTN : Use PSTN routing.
09
GK RAS TYPE
11
URQ REASON MODE
Select MANUAL to selectively connect to GateKeeper according to

Prefix. Otherwise, select AUTO.
When GateKeeper sends the URQ message to Gateway,
the Gateway disables GateKeeper Connection according to the
Reason code.
12
RRQ FAIL TIME
The transfer cycle of RRQ when Fail occurs while transferring RRQ
13
GRQ SEND
Sets whether Gateway shall send the CRQ message.
from Gateway to GateKeeper.
Page 2-363
Default
GK CONNECTION
DISABLE
GK ROUTING
DISABLE
GK IP ADDRESS
0.0.0.0
GK NAME
Gatekeeper
ALTER GK IP ADDR
0.0.0.0
H.323 GATEWAY ID
iDCS 500
E.164 GATEWAY NO
1234
GK KEEP ALIVE
000 sec
GK DOWN ROUTE
PSTN
GK RAS TYPE
AUTO
URQ REASON MODE
ON
RRQ FAIL TIME
30 sec
GRQ SEND
OFF
Display
GK CONNECTION
DISABLE

GK ROUTING
DISABLE

GK ROUTING
ENABLE

Related Program
N/A
Page 2-364
837 Set SIP Option (MCP2)

This program allows the user to set the SIP related parameters.
00
GATEWAY CALL ID
01
CALLER ID TYPE
Sets the Caller ID type. The Caller ID type is displayed only when it is
identical to that sent by the caller.
05
DEFAULT DIL NO.
Sets the call forward number for incoming calls that does not include
the dial digit.
06
UCP PORT : TRUNK
Sets the UDP port number when the other party is C.O. line.
07
UDP PORT : PHONE
Sets the UDP port number when the other party is Phone.
09
RE-TRANS.T1 TIME
When using unreliable transmission protocols such as UDP,

retransmission is performed if there is no answer. RE-TRANS.T1
TIME is the initial retransmission interval defined in RFC2543.
10
RE-TRANS.T2 TIME
The maximum retransmission interval defined in RFC 2543.
11
RE-TRANS.T4 TIME
Defined for various purposes in RFC 2543. For example, in an unreliable

protocol, this can be defined as the time that the User Agent Server
(USA) waits after receiving the ACK message.
12
GENERAL RING TM
In an unreliable transmission protocol, whether the client received the

last response from the server cannot be confirmed. In this case, the
Server shall retransmit the response during this amount of time until
the requested retransmission is received. For example, the wait time
after sending 200 OK for INFO.
13
INVITE LING TIME
In an unreliable transmission protocol, after the client sends ACK for the
INVITE Final Response, the client cannot confirm if the server received
the ACK message. The client waits for this amount of time after
sending ACK for the Final Response.
14
15
PROVISIONAL
After receiving the Provision Response, the User Agent shall wait for
TIME
this amount of time until Timeout ends.
INV.NO RESP TIME
Before sending Cancel for the Invite Request, the User Agent shall
wait for this amount of time.
16
17
GEN.NO RESP
Before sending Cancel for General Request, the User Agent shall
TIME
wait for this amount of time.
REQ.RETRY TIME
After sending General Request, the User Agent shall wait for the Final
Response for this amount of time.
18
SIP SERVER
Sets whether to use SIP Server.
ENBLE
20
SIP SERVER IP
Sets the IP address of the SIP Server.
28
SIP SERVER PORT
Sets the port number of the SIP Server.
29
SIGNAL PORT
Sets the IP UDP port number for signaling.
Page 2-365
32
SEND CLIP TABLE
Sets the Caller Data Table number in Program 323 that will be sent as
the caller information when calling through the VoIP network. Number
in Program 405 is used when set as None.
33
INCOMING MODE
For VoIP incoming calls, sets whether to use the received Called Party
Number as is, or to follow Program 714, or to use the destination
specified for each C.O. line in Program 406.
34
ALLOW GW CHECK
When this option is set as ENABLE, the incoming H.323 call is blocked
if the IP address of the caller does not match the IP address registered
in Program 833 Set VoIP Internet Address.
Default
Page 2-366
GATEWAY CALL ID
1234
CALLER ID TYPE
ANI
DEFAULT DIL NO.
5000 or 500
UDP PORT:TRUNK
05060
UDP PORT:PHONE
05070
RE-TRANS.T1 TIME
0500 MS
RE-TRANS.T2 TIME
4000 MS
RE-TRANS.T4 TIME
5000 MS
GENERAL RING TM
05000 MS
INVITE LING TIME
05000 MS
PROVISIONAL TIME
180000 MS
INV.NO RESP TIME
05000 MS
GEN.NO RESP TIME
05000 MS
REQ.RETRY TIME
05000 MS
SIP SERVER ENBLE
DISABLE
SIP SERVER IP
0.0.0.0
SIP SERVER PORT
05060
SIGNAL PORT
10000
SEND CLIP TABLE
INCOMING MODE
FOLLOW DID TRANS
ALLOW GW CHECK
DISABLE
Display
VIRTUAL RINGBACK
DISABLE

Or, press [Volume] to select the parameter and
RE-TRANS.T1 TIME
0500 MS

RE-TRANS.T1 TIME
0600 MS

Related Program
N/A
Page 2-367
838 Assign Private IP (MCP2)

This program allows the user to register the IP address of devices that uses the
PRIVATE IP to connect H.323 or SIP calls to the system. The H.323 or SIP calls that
are made from the registered IP address are considered connected to the PRIVATE
network, and the PRIVATE IP is sent to the recipient.
Default
N/A.
Display
PRIVATE IP (01)
0. 0. 0. 0
2. Enter the table number ([01]-[80]).

Or, press [Volume] to select the table and press
the [Right] soft button to move the cursor.
PRIVATE IP (02)
_ 0. 0. 0. 0

The address data shall be a three digit number.
Enter 0 in front to make a three digit number if
the data is not a three digit number.
PRIVATE IP (02)
168.219.83 .101

Related Program
Program 833
Page 2-368
Set VoIP Internet Address (MCP2)
840 IP Phone Data (MCP2)

This program allows the user to set the parameters of the IP phone.
0
USER ID
ID used for identification when registering the phone
USER PSWD
ID used for verification when registering the phone
IP ADDR
IP address of the IP phone
MAC ADDR
Hardware address of the IP phone. Unchangeable
IP TYPE
IP address type (0.PRIVATE, 1.PUBLIC)
DSP TYPE
DSP type used for IP phone calls (0.G.711, 1.G.729A)
PHONE TYPE
Type of the IP phone (0.SAMSUNG, 1.SIP STANDARD).
REGIST CLR
Deletes the registered IP phone data.
Default
USER ID
Initial IP phone number (e.g. 3201~)
USER PSWD
1234
IP ADDR
0.0.0.0
MAC ADDR
FFFFFFFFFFFF
IP TYPE
PRIVATE
DSP TYPE
G.729A
PHONE TYPE
SAMSUNG
Display
[3201]IP ADDR
0. 0. 0. 0
2. Enter the IP phone number.

Or, press [Volume] to select the IP phone number
[3202]IP ADDR
0. 0. 0. 0

Or, press [Volume] to select the parameter item
[3202]IP TYPE
PRIVATE

[3202]IP TYPE
PUBLIC

Page 2-369
Related Program
N/A
Page 2-370
841 System IP Interlocking Data (MCP2)

This program allows the user to set the items related to phone interlocking.
0
PHONE VERSION
Registers the phone interlocking version data.
PHONE TFTP IP
IP address to which should be connected for program upgrade
ITP REGISTRATION
Sets whether to permit registration of a new IP phone.

0: DISABLE (Restrict new registration)
1: ENABLE/SYS PSWD (Verifies if the system password of the
new IP phone matches the ITP REGIST PSWD of Program 841)
2: ENABLE/ITP PSWD (Verifies if the ITP password of the new IP
phone matches the USER PSWD of Program 840)
ITP REGIST PSWD
Password used for verification when ITP REGISTRATION is set as

ENABLE/SYS PSWD.
EASYSET ALIVE TIME
Time interval when verifying if the link is alive for EASYSET interlocking.
EASYSET PASSWORD
Sets the identification password for EASYSET server connection.
SMDR TO CTI LINK
Sets whether to send SMDR display data to CTI link.
UCD TO CTI LINK
Sets whether to send UCD display data to CTI link.
Default
0
PHONE VERSION
Depends on the interlocking phone version
PHONE TFTP IP
0.0.0.0
ITP REGISTRATION
ENABLE / SYS PSWD
ITP REGIST PSWD
1234
EASYSET ALIVE TIME
000 sec
EASYSET PASSWORD
1234
SMDR TO CTI LINK
DISABLE
UCD TO CTI LINK
DISABLE
Display
PHONE VERSION
LARGE DGP : 0000
2. Enter the item number([0]-[7]).

IP PHONE REGIST
ENABLE
3. Enter the data and press the [Right] Soft button

to save the data.
IP PHONE REGIST
DISABLE
Page 2-371

Related Program
N/A
Page 2-372
845 Set Wireless Parameter (MCP2)

This program allows the user to set the parameters related to WLI card interlocking.
WLI Parameter
0
SYSTEM ID
ID used to identify systems in the wireless environment. Different IDs shall

be used for each system.
1
2
3
4
SYSTEM KEY
Key used for registering terminal. Different keys shall be used for each system.
st
IP address of the first Domain Name Server(DNS)
nd
IP address of the second Domain Name Server(DNS)
nd
IP address of all WBS in the system used by the wireless terminal.
1 DNS IP
2 DNS IP
2 WBS IP
Different IPs shall be assigned to each system.

5
CODEC LIST
Codec that can be used for VoIP calls between WBS24 and terminal.
G.711u, G.711a, G.726, and G.729 may all be designated.
WBS Parameter
0
IP ADDRESS
The IP address of WBS24, which can be recognized in Ethernet
GATEWAY
Gateway address of the network where WBS24 is installed
NET MASK
Netmask of the network where WBS24 is installed
MAC ADDR
The MAC address of WBS24 that the system received when WBS24 is
connected to the system.
VERSION
Current software version of WBS24.
STATUS
Displays the Alive operation status of WBS24.
USE RF CH.
The RF channel number used by each WBS24.
Default
WLI
0
SYSTEM ID
WBS24
SYSTEM KEY
00000
st
1 DNS IP
0.0.0.0
2nd DNS IP
0.0.0.0
nd
2 WBS IP
168.208.144. 10
CODEC LIST
CODEC 1 : G.726
CODEC 2 : G.729
CODEC 3 : G.711a
CODEC 4 : G.711u
Page 2-373
WBS
IP ADDRESS
0.0.0.0
GATEWAY
0.0.0.0
NET MASK
255.255.255.0
MAC ADDR
0000 0000 0000
VERSION
STATUS
USE RF CH.
OFF
WBS1 : 01,WBS2 : 04, WBS3 : 07,WBS4 : 10
WBS5 : 03, WBS6 : 06, WBS7 : 09, WBS8 : 02
Display
WLI : NETWORK ID
WBS24
2. Select between WLI(0) and WBS1~WBS8(1~8).

Or, press [Volume] to select the item and press the
WBS1: IP ADDRESS
0. 0. 0. 0
3. Enter the parameter item number.

WBS1: USE RF CH.

NONE

WBS1: USE RF CH
00

Related Program
N/A
Page 2-374
846 Wireless Terminal Data (MCP2)

This program allows the user to display the data of the registered wireless terminal.
0
REGISTERED
Displays whether the wireless terminal is registered.
LOCATED
Displays whether the terminal is connected to the system.
PHONE TYPE
Displays the type of the terminal.
WLI NUMBER
The WLI number, through which the terminal is connected to WBS24.
WBS NUMBE
The number of the WBS24 in service where the terminal is in use.
IP OFFSET
Location of the IP pool where the IP of the terminal is located.
IP ADDRESS
IP address assigned to the terminal.
MAC ADDR
MAC address of the terminal.
USER ID
User ID of the terminal.
PASSWORD
User password of the terminal.
Display
[8601]REGISTERED
NO
2. Enter the wireless terminal number.

Or, press [Volume] to select the terminal number
[8602]REGISTERED
NO

Or, press [Volume] to select the item and press the
[8602]LOCATED
DETACH

Related Program
N/A
Page 2-375
847 Reset Wireless BTS (MCP2)

This program allows the user to reset the WLI card or WBS. Status of WBS can also
be verified.
Display
WLI RESET
RESET NOW ? NO
2. Select the card to be reset.

Or, press [Volume] to select the card type and press
WBS 1 RESET
RESET NOW ? NO
3. Enter [1] to reset, or [0] to cancel.

Or, press [Volume] to select between [1] YES and
[0] NO, and press the [Right] Soft button to move
the cursor.
WBS 1 RESET
ARE YOU SURE?NO

Related Program
N/A
Page 2-376
848 Set Wireless IP/MAC Address (MCP2)

This program allows the user to enter the IP or MAC address of the wireless terminal.
The address must be entered to before registration. If the terminal having the same IP
address is already registered, the phone number of the existing terminal is displayed
in the USED item.
Default
0.0.0.0
Display
IP:001 USED:
0. 0. 0. 0
2.
MAC LIST:01
FFFFFFFFFFFF
Press [0] to enter the IP address.

Or, press [1] to enter the MAC address.
Or, press [Volume] to select the type and press the
3. When entering the IP address, select the index

number of the terminal.
Or, press [Volume] to select the index number and
4. Enter the IP address of the wireless terminal.
IP:002 USED:
0. 0. 0. 0
IP:002 USED:
165.213.145.002

Related Program
N/A
Page 2-377
849 Wireless System Data (MCP2)

This program allows the user to set the items required for the authorization of the
wireless terminal.
WLI REGISTRATION
Sets whether to authorize new registration.
WIP REGIST CLEAR
Registrations can be cleared respectively. FORCED and NORAML are

provided as the registration clear mode. FORCED mode only clears the
system related DB for new registrations due to terminal breakage.
In Normal mode, the system and terminal exchange messages and deletes
their DB respectively.
WBS WEP SERVICE
Enables WBS Security. The WEP key must be entered in advance.
WEP KEY
WEP KEY is the password key used for WBS Security identification, and is
made of total 128 BIT.
Default
0.0.0.0
Display
ENTER PASSWORD
_
2. Enter WLI REGIST password.(Default : 0000).
WLI REGISTRATION
DISABLE
3. Enter the item that should be changed.

WBS WEP SERVICE

DISABLE
4. Select the data. Or, press [Volume] to select the

data and press the [Right] Soft button.
WBS WEP SERVICE

ENABLE

Related Program
N/A
Page 2-378
850 Display System Resource

This program allows the user to only inquire the system resources and to verify the
number of resources being used or not being used.
The types of the system resources are listed below.
0.
1.
2.
3.
DTMFR DSPS
CID DSPS
R2MFC DSPS
CONF GROUPS
Default
N/A
Display
DTMFR DSPS
USE:010 FREE:020

R2MFC DSPS
USE:004 FREE:012

Related Program
N/A
Page 2-379
851 Display System Alarm

This program allows the user to view the system alarm. The alarms are saved in 50
main alarm buffers and 50 additional alarm buffers, and conforms to the First In First
Out principal.
In systems equipped with the MCP board, the LAN board must be mounted to executed
this program.
The Clear option deletes the current alarm from the alarm memory. Alarms are
automatically displayed through the alarm port. If the alarm buffer is emptied, new
alarms appear on the alarm buffer.
0
VIEW ALARMS
Shows the alarm.
OVERFLOW CONTROL
Selects the process

method when buffers are
all full.
0. OVERWRITTEN : Overwrites
starting from the oldest entry.
1. STOP RECORDING : Stops
recording.
CLEAR ALARM BUF
Deletes the alarm buffer.
PRINT ALARM BUF
Prints the alarm buffer through the alarm port.
Default
OVERFLOW CONTROL OVER WRITTEN
Display
SYS ALARM REPORT

VIEW ALARMS

[01] 08/20 14:10

MNF02 C1-S01

Or, press [Volume] to select the entry.
[02] 08/20 14:09

MNF01 C1-S01
4. press the [Right] Soft button to move the cursor.
SYS ALARM REPORT

VIEW ALARMS
Page 2-380

Related Program
N/A
Page 2-381
852 Display Alarm Type and Permission

This program allows the user to set the type of the system alarm.
this program.
When an enabled alarm is generated, all digital phones are searched and the alarm is
rung if the system button is assigned. Saving to the alarm buffer and printing through
the alarm I/O port is equally applicable to disabled alarms.
Default
All : OFF
Display
01:MJA01 ACT:OFF
POR Restart
2. Enter the alarm entry number([01]-[86]).

Or, press [Volume] to select the alarm and press
02:MJA02 ACT:OFF
Soft Restart
3. Enter whether to apply alarm ring([0]-[1]).

Or, press [Volume] to select the data and press the
[Right] Soft button to save the data.
02:MJA02 ACT:ON
Soft Restart

Related Program
Program 722
Program 723
Program 851
Page 2-382
Set a Button for Each Station

Set a Button for Each Type of a Phone
Display System Alarm
853 Set Make Busy Status for Maintenance

This program allows the user to make BUSY status for stations, C.O. lines and
common resources.
The station set as BUSY status operates as if in HALT status, and MADE BUSY is
displayed on the outgoing station. Not only stations or C.O. lines but the external
announcement port, AA port, and the DSP receiving STMFR, R2MFCM, CID may
also be set as BUSY or IDLE.
Only the Systems with the MCP2 board are applicable for MGI.
TRK
C.O. line port
STN
Station port
PAGE
External announcement port
AA
AA port
DTMFR
DSP receiving DTMF
CID
DSP receiving CID
R2MFC
DSP receiving R2MFC
CONF
DSP for conference
MGI
MGI port
Default
N/A
Display
MAINTENANCE BUSY
TRK:NONE
2. Enter the port type number([0]-[8]).

Or, press [Volume] to select the type and press the
MAINTENANCE BUSY
TRK:NONE
3. Enter the port phone number or the channel

entry number. Or, press [Volume] to select the
portand press the [Right] Soft button to move
the cursor.
MAINTENANCE BUSY
TRK:702 IDLE
Page 2-383
4. Enter BUSY[0] or IDLE[1].

Or, press [Volume] to select BUSY/IDLE and
press the [Right] Soft button to save the data.
MAINTENANCE BUSY
TRK:702 BUSY

Related Program
N/A
Page 2-384
854 Set System Diagnosis Time

This program allows the user to set the system diagnosis time on weekday basis.
0. SUN
1. MON
2. TUS
3. WED
4. THU
5. FRI
6. SAT
this program.
Default
N/A
Display
DIAGNOSTICS TIME
SUN: :
2. Enter the weekday number([0]-[6]).

Or, press [Volume] to select the weekday and
DIAGNOSTICS TIME
SUN: :
3. Enter the diagnosis time.(HHMM)
DIAGNOSTICS TIME
SUN:22:00

Related Program
N/A
Page 2-385
855 Display System Option Installation Status

This program allows the user to only inquire the daughter board status of the card
installed in the system. Information on the daughter board mounted on the card can
be conveniently verified without dismounting the card.
iDCS-M System
0
MCP D-BD 1
Displays the daughter board installed in MCP option slot 1.
MCP D-BD 2
MCP D-BD 3
MCP SW
Displays if the switch in the MCP card is selected.
C1 POWER-B
Displays if the second power supply card is installed in the basic cabinet.
CxSx VPM
Displays if the VPM board of the voice mail card is installed.
CxSx SW
Displays if the TEPRI switch is selected in the corresponding slot.
iDCS-L System
Page 2-386
00
MCP D-BD 1
01
MCP D-BD 2
02
MCP D-BD 3
03
MCP SW
Displays if the switch in the MCP card is selected.
04
C1 POWER-B
Displays if the 2nd power supply card is installed in the basic cabinet.
05
SCP D-BD 1
Displays the daughter board installed in SCP option slot 1.
06
SCP D-BD 2
07
SCP D-BD 3
08
LCP 1 ONLINE
Displays if the LCP 1 card is operating.
09
C2 POWER-B
Displays if 2nd power supply card is installed in first expansion cabinet.
10
LCP 1 D-BD 1
Displays the daughter board installed in LCP 1 option slot 1.
11
LCP 1 D-BD 2
12
LCP 1 D-BD 3
13
LCP 2 ONLINE
Displays if the LCP 2 card is operating.
14
C3 POWER-B
Displays if 2nd power supply card is installed in 2nd expansion cabinet.
12
LCP 2 D-BD 1
13
LCP 2 D-BD 2
14
LCP 2 D-BD 3
Xx
CxSx VPM
Displays if the VPM board of the voice mail card is installed.
xx
CxSx SW
Displays if the TEPRI switch is selected in the corresponding slot.
Default
N/A
Display
SYSTEM OPTIONS
MCP D-BD 1:ESM

SYSTEM OPTIONSMCP D-BD

2:IPM

Related Program
N/A
Page 2-387
856 Display System Programming Time

This program allows the user to display the time when the system programming
mode was Enabled or Disabled, and the programmed port(station number or I/O port).
this program.
The I/O port(MCP : SIO1, SIO2, SIO3, SIO4, MODEM, LAN. MCP2 : SIO2, SIO3,
MODEM, LAN) is displayed for PCMMC. If the end time is not saved, ILLEGAL
END is displayed, and the user viewing the programming log in the current program
mode is displayed as CURRENT. The most recent 8 data are saved.
Default
N/A
Display
(1) 08/22 10:10

SIO1:08/20 11:00

Or, press [Volume] to select the entry.
(2) 08/22 15:10

210 :CURRENT

Related Program
Program 800
Page 2-388
Set Technician Program Mode
858 Set System Emergency Alarm Key

This program allows the user to set the type of alarm of which the alarm data should
be sent to the Remote M&A PC through LAN.
this program.
Default
All : OFF
Display
01:MJA01 ACT:OFF
POR Restart
2. Enter the alarm entry number([01]-[91]).

Or, press [Volume] to select the alarm and press
02:MJA02 ACT:OFF
Soft Restart
3. Enter whether to activate the alarm([0]-[1]).

02:MJA02 ACT:ON
Soft Restart

Related Program
Program 851
Display System Alarm
Page 2-389
859 Display Hardware Version (MCP/MCP2)

MCP
This program allows the user to only verify the EPLD version of the hardware
installed in the MCP system.
iDCS-M System
0
C1 M-BOARD
Displays the main board version of the basic cabinet.
MCP CARD
Displays the MCP card version.
MCP B1
Type and version of the daughter board installed in MCP option slot 1.
MCP B2
MCP B3
iDCS-L System
00
MCP CARD
Displays the MCP card version.
01
MCP B1
02
MCP B2
03
MCP B3
04
C1 M-BOARD
05
SCP CARD
Displays the SCP card version.
06
SCP B1
Type and version of the daughter board installed in SCP option slot 1.
07
SCP B2
08
SCP B3
09
C2 M-BOARD
Displays the main board version of the first expansion cabinet.
10
LCP1 CARD
Displays the LCP1 card version.
11
LCP1 B1
Type and version of the daughter board installed in LCP1 option slot 1.
12
LCP1 B2
13
LCP1 B3
14
C3 M-BOARD
Displays the main board version of the second expansion cabinet.
15
LCP2 CARD
16
LCP2 B1
17
LCP2 B2
18
LCP2 B3
Default
N/A
Page 2-390
Display
H/W EPLD VERSION

MCP CARD:V01

H/W EPLD VERSION

MCP B3:LAN:V05

Related Program
N/A
Page 2-391
MCP2
This program allows the user to only verify the EPLD version of the hardware installed
in the MCP2 system.
iDCS-M System
0
C1 M-BOARD
MCP2 CARD
Displays the MCP2 card version.
MCP2 B1
Type and version of the daughter board installed in MCP2 option slot 1.
MCP2 B2
MCP2 B3
iDCS-L System
00
MCP2 CARD
Displays the MCP2 card version.
01
MCP2 B1
02
MCP2 B2
03
MCP2 B3
04
C1 M-BOARD
05
SCP CARD
Displays the SCP card version.
06
SCP B1
07
SCP B2
08
SCP B3
09
C2 M-BOARD
Displays the main board version of the first expansion cabinet.
10
LCP1 CARD
11
LCP1 B1
12
LCP1 B2
13
LCP1 B3
14
C3 M-BOARD
Displays the main board version of the second expansion cabinet.
15
LCP2 CARD
16
LCP2 B1
17
LCP2 B2
18
LCP2 B3
Default
N/A
Page 2-392
Display
H/W EPLD VERSION

MCP2 CARD
:V01

H/W EPLD VERSION

MCP2 B3 :LAN :V05

Related Program
N/A
Page 2-393
860 Set ACD Status Service

This program allows the user to set the service, which sends the queue status data to
the I/O port in real-time when using the UCD function that utilizes the ACD card. A
separate software(not available in Korea) interlocking with this data is required.
Default
DISABLE
Display
UCD VIEW SERVICE

DISABLE

Or, press [Volume] to select the item number and
UCD VIEW SERVICE

DISABLE
3. Enter whether to enable service([0]-[1]).

Or, press [Volume] to select whether to enable
service and press the [Right] Soft button to save the
data.
UCD VIEW SERVICE

ENABLE

Related Program
N/A
Page 2-394
890 Initialize Port (MCP2)

This program allows the user to initialize items related to call process or DB for
specific station or C.O. line.
Display
[201] CALL CLEAR

ARE YOU SURE?NO
2. Enter the station or C.O. line.

Or, press [Volume] to select the station or C.O.
the cursor.
[202] CALL CLEAR

ARE YOU SURE?NO
3. Select [0] to initialize the call process part, or

[1] to initialize DB.
[202] DB INITIAL
ARE YOU SURE?NO
4. Press [1] to initialize, or [0] to cancel
[202] DB INITIAL
ARE YOU SURE?YES

Related Program
N/A
Page 2-395
900 Clear System Passcode

This is an A/S program used to delete the passcode when the user has forgot his or
her program passcode. A new passcode should be entered since the passcode is set as
the default value when cleared.
The three types of programs that can clear the passcode are listed below.
0
TECH. CODE
Technician program passcode
CUS. 1 CODE
Operator program passcode of tenant 1
CUS. 2 CODE
Operator program passcode of tenant 2
Contact your reseller for professional assistance when changing the system program
passcode.
Default
N/A
Display
CLEAR PASSCODE
PASSCODE:_
2. Enter the passcode.
CLEAR PASSCODE
TECH. CODE:****
3. Enter the program type([0]-[2]).

Or, press [Volume] to select the program type
CLEAR PASSCODE
TECH. CODE:****
4. Press [Hold] to initialize the passcode.
CLEAR PASSCODE
TECH. CODE:4321

Related Program
Program 201
Program 801
Page 2-396
Change Operator Program Passcode

Change Technician Program Passcode
iDCS 500
Programming Guide
2003 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd.
All rights reserved.
Information in this document is proprietary to SAMSUNG
Electronics Co., Ltd
No information contained here may be copied, translated,
transcribed or duplicated by any form without the prior written
consent of SAMSUNG.
Information in this document is subject to change without notice.
Visit us at
http://www.samsungnetwork.com

Auto Exchange Telephoneidcs 500 Programming Guide

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Auto Exchange Telephoneidcs 500 Programming Guide

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

iDCS 500

Document Content and Organization

SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.

iDCS 500 Programming Guide/Ed.01

Console Screen Output

Description About the Model Name

SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.

iDCS 500 Programming Guide/Ed.01

Introduces the installation related information for iDCS 500 system.

WIP-5000M Phone User s Manual

Added the iDCS 500 MCP2 related contents

SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.

SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.

Manual Title / Ed.00

System Passcode Change

Compliance with the National Version Standard

SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.

CHAPTER 1. Before Programming

Introduction to Programming.......................................................................................... 1-1

Digital Phone Buttons ...................................................................................................... 1-2

Cautions in Programming................................................................................................ 1-5

Program List...................................................................................................................... 1-6

Overview of Programming Procedure.......................................................................... 1-27

SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.

iDCS 500 Programming Guide/Ed.01

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming

SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.

iDCS 500 Programming Guide/Ed.01

206 Assign Barge-in Type..................................................................................................... 2-52

SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.

iDCS 500 Programming Guide/Ed.01

316 Set Identification Ring.................................................................................................... 2-99

SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.

iDCS 500 Programming Guide/Ed.01

423 BRI S/T Mode ................................................................................................................ 2-136

SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.

iDCS 500 Programming Guide/Ed.01

607 UCD Group Options ..................................................................................................... 2-191

SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.

iDCS 500 Programming Guide/Ed.01

723 Set a Button for Each Type of a Phone (MCP/MCP2)..................................................... 2-242

SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.

iDCS 500 Programming Guide/Ed.01

805 Display Program Version ............................................................................................. 2-303

SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.

iDCS 500 Programming Guide/Ed.01

838 Assign Private IP (MCP2).............................................................................................. 2-368

SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.

iDCS 500 Programming Guide/Ed.01

This page intentionally left blank

SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.

Engineer Level Program

Operator Level Program

Subscriber Level Program

SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.

CHAPTER 1. Before Programming

iDCS 500 Programming Guide/Ed.01

Digital Phone Buttons

DS-4000 Series Phone

Figure 1.1 DS-4028E Phone

SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.

iDCS 500 Programming Guide/Ed.01

CHAPTER 1. Before Programming

: Erase the previously entered item